Garmin | G3X Touch™ for Experimental Aircraft | Guide | Garmin G3X Touch™ for Experimental Aircraft G3X Pilot's Guide

Garmin G3X Touch™ for Experimental Aircraft G3X Pilot's Guide
G3X ™ Pilot’s Guide
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
CNS INTERFACE
GPS NAVIGATION
FLIGHT PLANNING
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AFCS
ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
APPENDIX
INDEX
© 2009 - 2016, 2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 11.80 or later. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later
software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR, U.K.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road, Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied,
transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without
the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a
single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic
storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy
of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided
further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is
strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, SafeTaxi®, and MapSource® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its
subsidiaries. G3X™ is a trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be
used without the express permission of Garmin.
Jeppesen® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
NavData™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
SiriusXM Weather is provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
SiriusXM Radio is provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
April, 2019
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Printed in the U.S.A.
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon
the use of the terrain function. The G3X Terrain Proximity feature is NOT
intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does
not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings
during flight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring a certified
terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party sources.
Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and
understand all aspects of the G3X Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook of the aircraft. Thoroughly practice basic operation
prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G3X to all available navigation sources, including the information
from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always
resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G3X internal GPS receivers is geometric
height above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude
displayed by pressure altimeters. Always use pressure altitude displayed by
the G3X PFD when determining or selecting aircraft altitude.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the
G3X system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information
remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so entirely at their
own risk.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained with in
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather
product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather
data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data
link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather
product age.
WARNING: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes
from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates
the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the
G3X to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM)
recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as
severe or giving an intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the
G3X within the following areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and
heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all longitudes; South of
70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between
longitude 75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude
between longitude 70° W and 128° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North
latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia); South of
55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of
Australia and New Zealand)
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS
system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance
of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G3X utilize GPS as a precision
electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G3X can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore,
become unsafe.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary
navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved
navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for
collision avoidance maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any circumstances
or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to
accurately depict all of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack
of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from
aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on
the display.
WARNING: For safety reasons, G3X operational procedures must be learned
on the ground.
CAUTION: The display uses a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating
that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS
CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is
very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass
lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G3X does not contain any user-serviceable parts.
Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and the pilot’s
authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
NOTE: The Garmin G3X has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test
capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely,
it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication
shown by the G3X. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such
an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated
information available in the cockpit.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen
images of the G3X panel and displays, are subject to change and may not
reflect the most current G3X system and aviation databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive
harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with California’s Proposition
65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please
refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can
cause an intermittent loss of attitude and heading displays while the aircraft
is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards away from the
source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim
or blank.
NOTE: Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) data is provided by the FAA and
may not be updated outside of normal business hours. Confirm data currency
through alternate sources and contact your local FSS for interpretation of TFR
data.
NOTE: The Garmin G3X system includes products like the GDU 37X and
the GSU 73 that are not TSO-certified products and have not received FAA
approval or endorsement. Consequently the G3X system is not suitable for
installation in type-certificated aircraft.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Warnings, Cautions & Notes
Blank Page
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Part Number
190-01115-00
Rev
Date
A August,
2009
B January,
2010
C March,
2010
D
June, 2010
Change Summary
Initial release
Description
Production Release
Added System Software Version 2.50 parameters
System Software Version 2.50 to 2.60:
•
•
Added message to indicate if config module is missing
Added warning text to Weight & Balance Page
System Software Version 2.60 to 2.70:
•
•
•
•
•
Added support for Integrated Autopilot control and display via the PFD
Page
Added PFD Setup Menu
Added second Bearing Pointer to PFD HSI
Added fuel range ring to map
Added menu option to XM Page to allow selection of a specific channel number
System Software Version 2.70 to 3.00:
•
•
E
April,
2011
Added Synthetic Vision
Added mach number to configurable Data Fields
System Software Version 3.00 to 3.10:
•
•
•
Added ability to import/export flight plans using the SD card
Added Softkeys to Nearest Airports Page to quickly show/hide private
airports and heliports
Removed ability to adjust Roll Mode reference using the FMS Joystick
System Software Version 3.10 to 3.20:
•
•
•
•
Added ability to display checklist files from SD Card
Added ability to log data to SD Card
Added ability to export Track Log and User Waypoints to SD Card
Added ability to display fuel calculator values in data bar
System Software Version 3.20 to 4.00:
•
•
•
•
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Added support for Jeppesen ChartView and geo-referenced FliteCharts
Added ability to use VNAV when using an external GPS navigation
Source
Added Softkey to Terrain Page to quickly enabled/disable terrain alerts
Added display of Navaid frequency to PFD bearing pointer data fields
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
RR-1
Rev
Date
E April,
2011
Description
System Software Version 4.00 to 4.10:
•
Added support for displaying flight time in databar
System Software Version 4.10 to 5.00:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Added support for VOR, localizer, and glideslope modes for integrated
autopilot
Added option to display trim and flap position on PFD
Added persistent sky/ground display to PFD
Added ability to configure and display Vse (blue line) and Vmc (red
line) on PFD airspeed tape for multiengine aircraft
Added ‘User Selected’ configuration option to allow the position of the
EIS strip to be changed via the Display Setup Page
Added ability to view EGT/CHT cylinder temperature bar graph on a
single-display system
Added automatic sync of altimeter setting to local terrain elevation
when FMS Joystick is pressed and held while BARO Softkey is selected
and aircraft is stationary on the ground
Added display of displaced runway threshold distance to Airport
Review Page
Added menu options to the Waypoint Page to quickly view the departure and destination airports
Added menu option and softkey to the FPL VNAV Page to force a
capture of a VNAV profile
Added Sirius/XM warning text
Improved HSI localizer course auto-slew and localizer backcourse
presentation
System Software Version 5.0 to 5.10:
•
Added Fuel Flow to list of configurable data fields
System Software Version 5.10 to 6.00:
•
•
RR-2
Added pathways
Note about VPX Page
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Rev
Date
F October,
2011
Description
System Software Version 6.00 to 6.10:
•
•
Added baro minimums altitude reference bug and audio alert to PFD
Changed CRS Softkey on PFD Page to indicate which course it controls
(LOC, VOR, or OBS).
System Software Version 6.10 to 6.20:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Added remote transponder interface information
Added ability to switch between internal and external GPS flight plan
sources
Added optional dedicated Traffic Page
Added softkey to Map Page to enable/disable traffic display
Added ability to enable/disable ‘Traffic Not Available’ audio alert
Added ability to enable/diable traffic data on Synthetic Vision display
Added ability to change the layout of PFD1 between full-screen and
split-screen in normal mode via the Display Setup Page
Added arrows to PFD traffic and terrain messages to indicate traffic
and terrain alerts which are outside the Synthetic Vision field of view
Added display of peak EGT temperature to bar graph display on Engine
Page when Lean Mode is active
Added softkey to Terrain page
Changed EGT gauge in EIS strip to display the cylinder with the temperature closest to its own peak value when Lean Mode is active
Changed AP NAV Softkey on PFD Page to cancel armed GS Mode on
the first press if GPS Mode is active and LOC and GS Modes are both
armed
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
RR-3
Rev
Date
G May, 2012
Description
System Software Version 6.20 to 6.30:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Added ability to adjust PFD pitch attitude offset, using the PFD Setup
page.
Added ability to configure the initial MFD page that is displayed after
powerup, using the Display Setup page.
Added ability to display synthetic vision field of view on the map.
Added configurable data fields to display current climb gradient in
percent or altitude gain per nautical mile.
Added runway number labels to runway extension lines on map.
Added items to Map Setup page to adjust visibility of water labels, park
and land cover areas, runway numbers, and runway extension lines.
Simplified requirements for availability of autopilot VNAV mode, and
reduced the need for pilot acknowledgement before VNAV mode can
be activated.
Changed screenshot utility to be activated when Menu key is pressed
and held.
Changed selected altitude data field on PFD to flash in conjunction
with armed autopilot VNAV indicator if an altitude has not been
selected prior to VNAV descent.
Changed Fuel Calculator display on Engine page to show fuel quantity
and pressure gauges if space is available.
Changed wind direction display on PFD to use system units settings for
heading offset.
Changed display of XTK data fields to more closely resemble G1000
presentation.
Improved flight log to more closely match airframe timer, and to
account for time spent with the engine running while on the ground
before or after a flight.
System Software Version 6.30 to 6.40:
•
•
•
•
RR-4
Added option to display G-meter on PFD
Added option to display track-up orientation on PFD HSI
Added support for GTS 8xx active traffic system
Added support for GNS 480
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Rev
Date
H July, 2012
Description
System Software Version 6.40 to 7.00:
•
J
K
August,
2012
May, 2013
Added GDL39 Support
System Software Version 7.00 to 7.20:
•
Added TargetTrend™
System Software Version 7.20 to 7.30:
•
Includes GDL 39 system software 2.51
System Software Version 7.30 to 7.40:
•
•
Added support for Rotax 966385 sensor for CHT and oil temperature
Improved lean assist detection of false peaks due to small temperature
fluctuations
System Software Version 7.40 to 8.00:
•
•
•
•
•
L
M
March,
2015
System Software Version 8.00 to 10.00:
May, 2015
System Software Version 10.00 to 10.20:
•
•
•
•
N
June, 2016
•
•
August,
2016
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Added Electronic Stability Protection.
Added Carbon Monoxide Detector support.
Added Pulse Oximeter support.
Added Flight Director Configuration.
System Software Version 10.20 to 10.40:
•
•
•
•
P
Added GMC 305 AFCS Controller support
Added GSU 25 AHRS support
Added GAP 26 Pitot-AOA Mast support
Added GSA 28 Auto Pilot Servo support
Added GEA 24 Engine/Airframe support
Added GMC 307 info
Added estimated time to VNAV (ETV) field to data bar
Added support for GMC 307 mode control panel
Added configurable option to reset fuel-used value on first engine start
or takeoff following a power cycle
Added Glide Range Ring, Best Airport Bearing Pointer, and Selected
Altitude Intercept Arc
Added Database Reloading instructions
System Software Version 10.40 to 10.80:
•
•
•
•
Various text updates for accuracy
Added info regarding ADAHRS redundancy from standby flight displays
Updated CAS message information regarding ADAHRS data sources
Added description of Best Airport Line
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
RR-5
Rev
Date
Q April,
2019
RR-6
Description
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Added support for GTX 35R/45R, 335/345, and 335R/345R transponders
Added AGL height data field
Added CO level data field
Added support for GMU 11 magnetometer
Added support for GSU 25C/25D
Added VNAV paired with GTN
Added support for GMC 507 and Track Mode
Updated for software version 11.80
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Table of Contents
Section 1 System Overview.................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Line Replaceable Units...................................................................................................... 1
G3X Single Display (Examples)............................................................................................... 7
G3X Dual Display (Examples)................................................................................................. 9
Split-Screen vs. Full-Screen Configurations........................................................................... 12
External Navigators (Optional)............................................................................................. 13
Automatic Flight Control System (Optional).......................................................................... 14
1.2 Display Overview............................................................................................................. 15
1.3 Secure Digital (SD) Cards............................................................................................... 15
1.4 G3X Controls...................................................................................................................... 16
1.5 System Power-up............................................................................................................. 18
1.6 System Operation............................................................................................................ 19
Display Operation................................................................................................................ 19
PFD Display Configuration................................................................................................... 23
G3X System Annunciations.................................................................................................. 24
AHRS Operation.................................................................................................................. 24
1.7 Accessing System Functionality.................................................................................... 28
Menus................................................................................................................................ 28
Data Entry........................................................................................................................... 29
Pages.................................................................................................................................. 31
Main Page Softkeys............................................................................................................. 36
Flight Planning Softkeys...................................................................................................... 48
Nearest Page Softkeys......................................................................................................... 49
1.8 Accessing the Information (INFO) Page...................................................................... 50
Viewing GPS Receiver Status............................................................................................... 50
Position............................................................................................................................... 53
Data Fields and Layout (Full-Screen MFD)............................................................................ 55
1.9 System Settings................................................................................................................. 56
Transponder........................................................................................................................ 57
Data Bar Fields.................................................................................................................... 58
Display................................................................................................................................ 60
Sound................................................................................................................................. 63
Units................................................................................................................................... 64
Date & Time........................................................................................................................ 65
Position............................................................................................................................... 66
Alarms................................................................................................................................ 66
Airport Criteria.................................................................................................................... 68
Section 2 Flight Instruments................................................................................................ 71
2.1 Flight Instruments............................................................................................................ 71
Airspeed Indicator............................................................................................................... 74
Attitude Indicator................................................................................................................ 76
Altimeter............................................................................................................................. 78
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)............................................................................................... 82
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
i
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Table of Contents
Vertical Deviation Indicator and VNAV Indicator................................................................... 82
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)...................................................................................... 85
Trim and Flap Position Indicators (optional).......................................................................... 98
Heading Strip and Turn Rate Indicator.................................................................................. 99
OBS Mode........................................................................................................................ 100
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data............................................................................................ 101
Outside Air Temperature.................................................................................................... 101
Wind Data........................................................................................................................ 102
Angle of Attack (AOA)....................................................................................................... 102
2.3 Vertical Navigation (VNAV).......................................................................................... 104
Using the VNAV Feature.................................................................................................... 105
VNAV Paired With GTN..................................................................................................... 107
Section 3 Engine Indication System............................................................................... 109
3.1 EIS Display & ENG Page................................................................................................ 109
ENG Page Softkeys (Example Configuration)...................................................................... 113
3.2 Lean Assist Mode (Optional)........................................................................................ 113
3.3 Fuel Calculator (Optional)............................................................................................ 117
Fuel Calculator Softkeys.................................................................................................... 119
Confirming Fuel Quantity................................................................................................... 120
3.4 CAS Messages (Optional)............................................................................................. 121
Section 4 CNS Interface......................................................................................................... 125
4.1 Auto-tuning Frequencies (Optional).......................................................................... 125
4.2 Remote Transponder Interface (Optional)............................................................... 128
Transponder Mode Selection.............................................................................................. 131
Entering a Transponder Code............................................................................................. 132
IDENT Function................................................................................................................. 133
ADS-B Out........................................................................................................................ 133
Flight ID Reporting............................................................................................................ 134
Section 5 GPS Navigation..................................................................................................... 135
5.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 135
Compass Arc..................................................................................................................... 135
5.2 Using Map Displays........................................................................................................ 136
Map Page Setup................................................................................................................ 137
Map Range....................................................................................................................... 141
Map Panning.................................................................................................................... 142
Fuel Range Ring................................................................................................................ 144
Glide Range Ring.............................................................................................................. 145
Best Airport Bearing Pointer............................................................................................... 147
Best Airport Line............................................................................................................... 148
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc........................................................................................... 149
Measuring Bearing and Distance....................................................................................... 150
ii
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Table of Contents
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
Topography....................................................................................................................... 150
Satellite View.................................................................................................................... 151
Map Page Traffic................................................................................................................ 152
Map Symbols.................................................................................................................... 152
Airways............................................................................................................................. 154
Waypoints........................................................................................................................ 156
Nearest Information.......................................................................................................... 161
Weather Information......................................................................................................... 163
Intersections..................................................................................................................... 164
NDBs................................................................................................................................ 165
VORs................................................................................................................................ 166
User Waypoints................................................................................................................. 167
Automatic Waypoint Selection........................................................................................... 170
Airspace............................................................................................................................ 171
Airspace Alert Messages.................................................................................................... 172
Smart Airspace™................................................................................................................ 172
Direct-to Navigation Using the G3X.......................................................................... 173
Section 6 Flight Planning...................................................................................................... 177
6.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................... 177
Flight Plan Data Fields....................................................................................................... 178
Manually Switching Between Internal and External Flight Plan Sources............................... 180
Failure of the External GPS Navigation Source.................................................................... 181
6.2 Flight Plan Creation Using the G3X............................................................................ 182
6.3 Flight Plan Storage Using the G3X............................................................................. 184
6.4 Flight Plan Activation Using the G3X......................................................................... 185
6.5 Flight Plan Editing.......................................................................................................... 186
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan....................................................................... 186
Editing Flight Plan Speed, Fuel, and/or Name..................................................................... 188
Copying Flight Plans.......................................................................................................... 191
Deleting Flight Plans......................................................................................................... 191
Inverting a Flight Plan....................................................................................................... 193
Importing/Exporting Flight Plans........................................................................................ 194
6.6 Approaches (Without External Navigator Configured)......................................... 194
Selecting an Approach....................................................................................................... 195
Activating Vectors-to-Final................................................................................................. 198
Section 7 Hazard Avoidance............................................................................................... 201
7.1 Weather Information..................................................................................................... 201
SiriusXM Weather (Optional).............................................................................................. 203
Using SiriusXM Weather Products....................................................................................... 216
Data Link weather (FIS-B).................................................................................................. 220
7.2 Terrain............................................................................................................................... 236
Synthetic Vision................................................................................................................. 237
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
iii
Table of Contents
Terrain Information............................................................................................................ 237
Terrain Views..................................................................................................................... 238
Terrain Settings................................................................................................................. 240
Terrain Alerts..................................................................................................................... 241
7.3 Traffic Systems................................................................................................................ 244
Traffic Prioritization........................................................................................................... 245
Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) (Optional)...................................................................... 245
Garmin GTS 800 Traffic (Optional)..................................................................................... 252
Data Link Traffic (Optional)................................................................................................ 259
Section 8 Additional Features............................................................................................ 271
8.1 Synthetic Vision (SVX)................................................................................................... 272
Synthetic Vision Operation................................................................................................. 273
8.2 SafeTaxi® ......................................................................................................................... 285
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision.................................................................................. 286
8.3 ChartView........................................................................................................................ 286
Aircraft Symbol................................................................................................................. 289
Chart Range...................................................................................................................... 290
Jeppesen Database-published NOTAMs............................................................................. 290
8.4 FliteCharts® ..................................................................................................................... 291
Aircraft Symbol................................................................................................................. 294
Chart Range...................................................................................................................... 295
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date................................................................... 296
8.5 Airport Directory Data.................................................................................................. 296
8.6 SiriusXM Radio Entertainment (Optional)................................................................. 298
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services....................................................................... 298
Using SiriusXM Radio......................................................................................................... 299
8.7 Vertical Power (Optional)............................................................................................. 303
8.8 Electronic Checklists (Optional).................................................................................. 305
8.9 Flight Data Logging....................................................................................................... 305
8.10 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP-X)............................................................... 306
Roll Engagement............................................................................................................... 308
Pitch Engagement............................................................................................................. 309
Airspeed Protection........................................................................................................... 311
8.11 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Detector (Optional).......................................................... 311
8.12 Pulse Oximeter (Optional)......................................................................................... 312
Section 9 Automatic Flight Control Systems (Optional)..................................... 313
AFCS System Architecture ................................................................................................. 313
G3X AFCS Installations Options......................................................................................... 315
Control Wheel Steering (CWS) (Optional)........................................................................... 315
G3X AFCS Status Box........................................................................................................ 316
9.1 AFCS Operation............................................................................................................... 317
iv
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Table of Contents
AFCS PRE-FLIGHT Actions.................................................................................................. 319
AFCS Controls................................................................................................................... 320
Flight Director Operation................................................................................................... 327
9.2 Vertical Modes................................................................................................................. 335
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)....................................................................................................... 337
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS).............................................................................. 338
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT).................................................................................................. 339
Vertical Speed Mode (VS).................................................................................................. 341
Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS) (GMC Mode Controller)...................................................... 343
Vertical Navigation Mode (VNAV)...................................................................................... 344
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)....................................................................... 346
Glidepath Mode (GP) (with external WAAS enabled IFR navigator ONLY)............................ 348
Glideslope Mode (GS)....................................................................................................... 349
Go Around (GA) and Takeoff (TO) Modes........................................................................... 351
9.3 Lateral Modes.................................................................................................................. 352
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)........................................................................................................ 354
Track Select Mode (TRK).................................................................................................... 356
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)............................................................................. 357
Approaches without Vertical Guidance............................................................................... 363
Approaches with Lateral + Vertical Guidance..................................................................... 367
AFCS Alerts....................................................................................................................... 373
9.4 Example Autopilot Flight Plan..................................................................................... 373
Section 10 Annunciations & Alerts.................................................................................. 389
10.1 Miscellaneous Message Advisories.......................................................................... 389
10.2 System Status Messages (INFO Page)..................................................................... 391
10.3 Audio Alerts................................................................................................................... 396
Voice Alerts....................................................................................................................... 396
AOA Aural Alert................................................................................................................. 396
10.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions............................................................ 397
Uncertain Heading............................................................................................................ 397
External Navigator Messages (Optional)............................................................................ 397
CAS Messages (Optional).................................................................................................. 398
Terrain Annunciations........................................................................................................ 400
Traffic Annunciations......................................................................................................... 401
AHRS Alerts (Optional)...................................................................................................... 402
AFCS Alerts (Optional)....................................................................................................... 403
Vertical Power Fault Indications......................................................................................... 405
Section 11 Appendices........................................................................................................... 407
Appendix A: Data Field Options........................................................................................ 407
Appendix B: Utilities............................................................................................................ 413
Flight Log.......................................................................................................................... 413
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
v
Table of Contents
Track Log.......................................................................................................................... 415
Heading Line..................................................................................................................... 419
Weight & Balance............................................................................................................. 420
EPE Circle......................................................................................................................... 422
Proximity Waypoints.......................................................................................................... 423
Appendix C: SD Card Use and Databases........................................................................ 425
Installing and Removing SD Cards..................................................................................... 426
G3X Databases................................................................................................................. 427
Updating G3X Databases.................................................................................................. 430
Reloading G3X Databases:................................................................................................ 433
Exporting Track Logs and User Waypoints........................................................................... 433
Importing/Exporting Flight Plans........................................................................................ 434
Flight Data Logging........................................................................................................... 434
Appendix D: Map Datum and Location Formats............................................................ 435
Map Datums..................................................................................................................... 435
Location Formats............................................................................................................... 435
Appendix E: General TIS-A Information........................................................................... 437
TIS-A vs. TAS/TCAS............................................................................................................ 437
TIS-A Limitations............................................................................................................... 438
Appendix F: Abnormal Operation..................................................................................... 441
Loss of GPS Position.......................................................................................................... 441
Hazard Display with Loss of GPS Position........................................................................... 441
G3X System Failure Annunciations..................................................................................... 442
Unusual Attitudes.............................................................................................................. 443
Reversionary Mode (Full-Screen)........................................................................................ 444
AFCS Reversionary Mode................................................................................................... 444
Failure of the External GPS Navigation Source.................................................................... 444
Synthetic Vision Troubleshooting........................................................................................ 446
Appendix G: Display Symbols............................................................................................ 447
VFR Symbols..................................................................................................................... 447
IFR Symbols...................................................................................................................... 448
Airspace Symbols.............................................................................................................. 450
Appendix H: Glossary........................................................................................................... 453
Appendix I: License Agreement and Warranty............................................................... 459
Contact Garmin................................................................................................................ 459
Software License Agreement.............................................................................................. 459
Limited Warranty............................................................................................................... 459
AOPA Airport Directory Notice........................................................................................... 460
AC-U-KWIK LICENSE AGREEMENT..................................................................................... 461
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service Agreement........................................................................ 461
Weather Data Warranty..................................................................................................... 462
Index....................................................................................................................................Index-1
vi
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Flight
Instruments
The G3X System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot using Wide VGA (800x480)
flat-panel color display(s). The seven-inch diagonally measured display(s) provides
22 square-inches (each) of viewing area.
System
Overview
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS
CNS
Interface
The system consists of the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
GPS
Navigation
• Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 375 (with XM)
–– Single Display: Split Primary Flight Display (PFD) & Multi Function Display (MFD)
–– Multiple Displays: MFD (recommended)
Flight
Planning
• GDU 370 (without XM)
–– Single Display: Split Primary Flight Display (PFD) & Multi Function Display (MFD)
–– Multiple Displays: MFD, PFD, or split-screen
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
GDU 37X
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
1
• GSU 73
–– Garmin Sensor Unit sub-system for the G3X (Air Data Computer (ADC), Engine/
Airframe Unit, and the Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS))
–– ADC: Processes data from the pitot-static system and outside air temperature (OAT) sensor.
–– Engine/Airframe Unit: Receives and processes signals from the engine
and airframe sensors.
–– AHRS: Provides aircraft attitude and heading information to the PFD.
The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate
sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with the GDU to obtain
GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed later in this section.
–– ARINC 429 interface: Transmits and receives ARINC 429 signals for interface to panel-mount IFR GPS navigators.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
GSU 73
2
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
• GSU 25/25B/25C/25D
–– Garmin Sensor Unit sub-system for the G3X (Air Data Computer (ADC), and the
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS))
–– ADC: Processes data from the pitot-static system and outside air temperature (OAT) sensor.
–– AHRS: Provides aircraft attitude and heading information to the PFD.
The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate
sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field
information, with the ADC to obtain air data, and with the GDU to obtain
GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed later in this section.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
GSU 25/25B/25C/25D
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
3
• GMU 44/GMU 22/GMU 11
–– Magnetometer: Measures the local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS
for processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power
directly from the AHRS and communicates with it via an RS-485 digital interface.
GMU 44/GMU 22
GMU 11
• GTP 59
–– Temperature Probe: Provides raw air temperature data.
GTP 59
• GAP 26
–– Pitot Probe: Sends dynamic air pressure for airspeed, altitude, and angle of attack
(AOA), when paired with a GSU 25.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Index
GAP 26
4
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
• GSA 28
–– Auto Pilot Servo: Used for automatic control of pitch, roll, and yaw.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
GSA 28
Flight
Planning
• GEA 24
–– Engine and Airframe Unit: Receives and processes signals from the engine and
airframe sensors.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GEA 24
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
5
• GAD 29/29B
–– ARINC 429 interface: Transmits and receives ARINC 429 signals for interface to
panel-mount IFR GPS navigators.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
GAD 29B
6
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
G3X SINGLE DISPLAY (EXAMPLES)
GDU 370 or 375 (XM)
Split PFD/MFD
Flight
Instruments
In the single display, split-screen configuration, the Primary Flight Display (PFD)
and the Multi Function Display (MFD) are displayed in split-screen mode on a single
GDU.
GDU 370 or 375 (XM)
Split PFD/MFD
EIS
CNS
Interface
Garmin Sensor Unit
Heading
Engine/Airframe
Unit
AHRS
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
Heading
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
AFCS
G3X Standard Panel
(Split-Screen) (GSU 73)
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
Additional
Features
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
GSU 25
Garmin Sensor Unit
Hazard
Avoidance
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
Air Data
Computer
CAN BUS
Flight
Planning
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
GPS
Navigation
GSU 73
GEA 24
Engine/Airframe
Unit
G3X Standard Panel
(Split-Screen) (GSU 25)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
7
System Overview
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GDU 370 or 375 (XM)
Split PFD/MFD
CNS
Interface
GSU 73
GSU 25
Garmin Sensor Unit
Air Data
Computer
GPS
Navigation
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
Flight
Planning
Engine/Airframe
Unit
AHRS
Hazard
Avoidance
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
Garmin Sensor Unit
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
Heading
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
Additional
Features
G3X Dual ADAHRS Example Install
AFCS
NOTE: The G3X can support as many as three ADAHRS units. As many as two
standby flight instruments (such as a Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument)
can also be installed to provide additional sources of backup ADAHRS data.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
GEA 24
Engine/Airframe
Unit
8
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
G3X DUAL DISPLAY (EXAMPLES)
NOTE: The G3X System can be configured with more than two displays.
EIS
GDU 370 (PFD)
Flight
Instruments
A typical dual display panel would have the left GDU configured as a full-screen PFD
and the right GDU configured as a full-screen MFD. The following is an example of a
upgraded G3X panel using a GDU 370 and a GDU 375; however, two GDU 370s can
be used if SiriusXM is not needed.
GDU 375 (MFD)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
GSU 73
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
Heading
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
Engine/Airframe
Unit
AHRS
AFCS
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
Air Data
Computer
Additional
Features
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
Hazard
Avoidance
Garmin Sensor Unit
Annun/Alerts
Heading
Attitude
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
Appendix
G3X Upgraded Panel
(Full-Screen) (GSU 73)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
9
System Overview
GDU 375 (MFD)
GSU 25
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
Garmin Sensor Unit
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
V
Vertical
Speed
CAN BUS
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GDU 370 (PFD)
GEA 24
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Flight
Planning
AHRS
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
Hazard
Avoidance
Heading
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
G3X Upgraded Panel
(Full-Screen) (GSU 25)
10
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
GDU 375 (MFD)
System
Overview
GDU 370 (PFD)
Flight
Instruments
EIS
GSU 25
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
Air Data
Computer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
Heading
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
Hazard
Avoidance
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
Flight
Planning
Engine/Airframe
Unit
Garmin Sensor Unit
GPS
Navigation
Air Data
Computer
CNS
Interface
GSU 73
Garmin Sensor Unit
Additional
Features
G3X Upgraded Panel Dual ADAHRS
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
11
System Overview
GDU 375 (MFD)
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GDU 370 (PFD)
GSU 25
Garmin Sensor Unit
GPS
Navigation
Air Data
Computer
Flight
Planning
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
Hazard
Avoidance
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
GSU 25
Garmin Sensor Unit
Air Data
Computer
GAP 26
Pitot-AOA
Probe
GTP 59
Temperature
Probe
GMU 44/22
Magnetometer
OAT
Airspeed
Altitude
Vertical Speed
AHRS
Attitude
Heading
Rate of Turn
Slip/Skid
AOA
Additional
Features
Heading
G3X Dual GSU 25 ADAHRS
SPLIT-SCREEN VS. FULL-SCREEN CONFIGURATIONS
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
GAD 29
ARINC 429
interface
Various combinations of split and full-screen configurations are available in systems
with 2 or more GDUs. For example, a system with 2 GDUs (MFD and PFD1) can be
configured to have a split-screen layout on PFD1, and a system with 3 GDUs (PFD1,
MFD, PFD2) can be configured to have full-screen MFD pages displayed on PFD2 if
desired.
Index
Appendix
GEA 24
Engine/Airframe
Unit
12
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
EXTERNAL NAVIGATORS (OPTIONAL)
The G3X can also communicate with the following optional external navigators:
Flight
Instruments
• SL30 Nav/Comm Transceiver
• SL40 Comm Transceiver
• GTR series Comm Transceiver
EIS
• GNC series Nav/Comm Transceiver
• GTN or GNS Series Units
CNS
Interface
USING THE G3X WITH AN EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATOR
GPS
Navigation
In a configuration which includes one or more external GPS navigators (i.e., GTN or
GNS Series), the G3X displays the selected external GPS Navigator’s flight plan and
guidance information. When using an external GPS navigator with the G3X, press the
INTERNAL Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page or Direct-To Page to make changes
to the active flight plan from the G3X. Press the EXTERNAL Softkey to return to the
external GPS navigator’s flight plan. When an external navigator is configured the
internal GPS can still be used for VFR navigation.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: The G3X internal GPS flight plan is only for VFR use.
Flight
Planning
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present
only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure. These
waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
Changing the Navigation Source
Appendix
When an external navigator that supports both GPS and VOR/ILS capabilities (i.e.,
GTN or GNS Series) is selected, the external navigator’s CDI Key is used to switch the
G3X HSI between GPS and VOR/ILS navigation.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
13
Selection Between Multiple Navigators
The G3X CDI SRC Softkey (refer to Section 1.7) becomes available when more than
one source of navigation data is configured. The CDI SRC Softkey toggles between
the available navigation sources (e.g., between the internal G3X GPS and external
SL30 VLOC sources, between an SL30 and a GNS 430, or between two GNS 430s, etc).
Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information.
Using MapMX Serial Data Input Format
When using a WAAS enabled external GPS navigator (i.e., GNS 430W/530W,
GNS 480 or any GTN Series navigator), and configuring an RS-232 input for ‘MapMX’
instead of ‘Aviation In’, a more accurate depiction of the flight plan legs are displayed
on the moving map (i.e., holds, procedure turns, etc). Non-WAAS external navigators
do not support MapMX. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information.
EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATOR FAILURE
In the event that all configured external GPS navigators fail, the G3X reverts to its
internal VFR GPS for navigation and flight plan modifications.
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM (OPTIONAL)
The G3X can also communicate with Garmin GSA 28, Garmin GMC control unit and
various third-party autopilot units. With the AFCS configured, the G3X issues pitch
and roll steering commands to the autopilot unit. Refer to Section 9 (AFCS) for more
information.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
14
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
SD Card Slot
Flight
Instruments
7” WVGA (800x480)
Color Display
System
Overview
1.2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
EIS
Range (RNG) Key
FMS Joystick
CNS
Interface
Display Bezel
GPS
Navigation
Hardkeys
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Softkeys
Additional
Features
Display Overview (Split-Screen)
AFCS
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS
Appendix
T he G3X data card slot uses Secure Digital (SD) cards and is located on the upper
right side of the display bezel(s). The SD card can be used for software updates,
checklist files, flight data logging, exporting Track Logs/User Waypoints, and Importing/
Exporting Flight Plans.
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: Refer to Appendix C for more information on SD Card use and databases.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
15
System Overview
System
Overview
Installing an SD Card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot with the card contacts facing the
display (the card should be flush with the face of the bezel).
Flight
Instruments
2)
To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.
Display Bezel SD Card Slot
1.4 G3X CONTROLS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
SD Card Slot
1
AFCS
2
3
Annun/Alerts
4
5
6
Appendix
7
Index
8
9
16
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
RNG Key Press to increase or decrease the viewing range of the map
Press to increase or decrease the HSI Scale on the PFD or PFD Page
2
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Press to acknowledge messages
Press and hold to mark a waypoint
4
CLR Key Press to cancel an entry, revert to the previous value in a data entry field or
MENU
Key
6
FPL Key Press to display the Flight Plan Page
7
Direct-To Press to activate the Direct-To function, enter a destination waypoint and
establish a direct course to the selected destination
Key
8
NRST
Key
9
Softkey Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the display
Selection
Keys
Press once to view the Page Menu
Press twice to view the Main Menu
Press a third time to clear the Main Menu
Press and hold to capture screen shot
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Press to display the Nearest Page for viewing the nearest airports,
intersections, NDBs, VORs, waypoints, frequencies, and airspaces
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
remove menus
Press and hold to return to the default page
5
GPS
Navigation
ENT Key Press to confirm menu selection or data entry
CNS
Interface
3
EIS
Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to access a drop down menu within the
highlighted field
Turn the FMS Joystick to change the selected value within the highlighted field
Move the FMS Joystick (up, down, left, or right) to highlight a field
Move the FMS Joystick (up, down, left, right, or diagonally) to move the map
pointer
With the HDG or HDG/ROLL Softkey selected, press and hold the FMS
Joystick to sync to the current heading
With the appropriate autopilot mode selected, move the FMS Joystick (up/
down) to adjust the mode reference for Vertical Speed, Altitude Hold, Target
Airspeed for IAS mode (GMC control unit), and Pitch Hold modes, or move the
FMS Joystick (left/right) to decrease the mode reference for Roll Hold mode.
Flight
Instruments
P ress the FMS Joystick to toggle input focus between user interaction with the
FMS
Joystick current page and the page navigation bar
System
Overview
1
17
1.5 SYSTEM POWER-UP
During system initialization, the AHRS displays the message ‘AHRS ALIGN, KEEP
WINGS LEVEL’ over the attitude indicator. The AHRS should display valid attitude and
heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
System Initialization
Current database information is displayed during power-up including valid operating
dates, cycle number, and database type. When this information has been reviewed for
currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to continue.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Index
Database Information
Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information.
18
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
After acknowledgement of the database information, the pilot is prompted to
acknowledge a data link weather advisory.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Data link Weather Advisory
Flight
Planning
Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information.
1.6 SYSTEM OPERATION
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: In a reversionary situation where failure occurs with all the GDUs
configured to use their own internal GPS receivers, any remaining GDUs will
attempt to approximate their position using GPS data from an external GPS
navigator (if configured).
Additional
Features
DISPLAY OPERATION
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: The G3X display operation can be configured from the DSPL Page in
Config Mode (refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information).
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
19
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation
(attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight
instrument cluster.
• Split-Screen Only
–– The PFD occupies the top portion of the display at all times, and a full display
PFD can be accessed by navigating to the PFD Page (see Section 1.7, Accessing System Functionality).
–– The MFD occupies the bottom portion of the display.
G3X Split-Screen Only (Normal Mode)
• Full-Screen PFD/MFD Configuration (Normal Mode)
–– In normal mode the displays can be configured to have a dedicated PFD and
MFD or have an optional split-screen PFD.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
20
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
G3X Full-Screen (Normal Mode)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
G3X Normal Mode (Optional Split-Screen PFD)
If a display failure occurs with the GDU 375, the WX and XM Pages will no longer
be available since the XM receiver resides in the GDU 375.
Appendix
In the event of a display failure, the G3X System automatically switches to
reversionary (backup) mode. In reversionary mode, all flight information is presented
on the remaining display in the split-screen configuration.
Annun/Alerts
• Full-Screen PFD/MFD Configuration (Reversionary Mode)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
21
G3X Full-Screen Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
• Multi-Display (Normal Mode)
–– In normal mode an example Multi-Display system includes a pilot-side PFD
(PFD1), MFD, and co-pilot side PFD (PFD2). PFD1 can also be configured as a
split-screen. PFD2 can be configured as a split-screen or PFD/MFD (full-screen
PFD page and full-screen MFD pages without split-screen)
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
PFD1
MFD
PFD2
Index
Appendix
G3X Multi-display Normal Mode (example)
22
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
EIS
PFD DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
Additional
Features
AFCS
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the PFD2 Display Layout field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Auto’, ‘Split’, or ‘PFD/MFD’.
6)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Appendix
Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
Annun/Alerts
1)
23
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Hazard
Avoidance
If the system is configured for multiple GDUs, the pilot has the ability to change the
layout of PFD2 between full-screen PFD, split-screen, or full-screen PFD/MFD.
Flight
Planning
Changing the PFD2 Display Layout:
GPS
Navigation
Changing the PFD1 Display Layout:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the PFD Display Layout field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Auto’ or ‘Split’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
CNS
Interface
If the system is configured for multiple GDUs, the pilot has the ability to change the
layout of PFD1 between full-screen and split-screen in normal mode.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Instruments
If the system detects a failure in PFD1, the MFD enters reversionary mode. If the
MFD fails, PFD1 and PFD2 enter reversionary mode. A failure of PFD2 is not considered
an emergency and will not cause either of the remaining displays to enter reversionary
mode.
System
Overview
• Multi-Display (Reversionary Mode)
G3X SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over
the instrument(s) or data experiencing the failure (Refer to Appendix F, Abnormal
Operation). Upon G3X power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment
begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of powerup. If any instrument remains flagged, and it is not likely an installation related
problem, the G3X should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility .
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
AHRS OPERATION
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and
vertical acceleration calculations for the G3X System, utilizing GPS, magnetometer,
and air data in addition to information from its internal sensors. Attitude and heading
information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate combinations
of information from the external sensor inputs.
The AHRS (GSU 73 or GSU 25) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s
magnetic field by applying the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field
Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic Reference Field
(IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic
field and its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every 5
years. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information
being displayed to the pilot.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
PFD Initialization
24
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
available
le
e
Magnetometer Data
available
le
e
CNS
Interface
Attitude/Heading Invalid
GPS
Navigation
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
le
ab
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
ail
av
unavailable
ble
Air Data
un
available
le
e
unavailable
ble
le
available
le
e
available
le
e
EIS
unavailable
ble
bl
Magnetometer Data
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Flight
Instruments
unavailable
ble
bl
GPS Data
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by
message advisory alerts. Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss
of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ flags over the corresponding
flight instruments). If the G3X senses that the magnetic heading measurement is valid,
but possibly outside of the internal accuracy limits, the numeric heading value on the
PFD is displayed in yellow.
Appendix
Uncertain Heading
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
25
If GPS input fails, the AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information
to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude
information; however, the heading output on the PFD Page is flagged as invalid with
a red ‘X’.
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving
valid GPS information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure
results in loss of all attitude and heading information. Likewise, loss of magnetometer
(heading) data, in combination with loss of GPS data results in a loss of all attitude
and heading information.
In installations that include multiple AHRS units (G3X supports up to three AHRS
sources) if data from an AHRS source is lost the G3X will automatically switch sources,
when a failure is detected. Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window
on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected
on the PFD. Pressing the Menu Key while on the PFD page accesses the PFD Setup
page, select the Sensors Softkey, turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired ADAHRS
source (AUTO, ADAHRS1, ADAHRS2, or ADAHRS3) softkeys. This allows for
manual switching of the ADAHRS sensors being viewed on the PFD. The GPS sensor
cannot be switched manually.
If a standby flight display (such as a Garmin G5 Electronic Flight Instrument) is
installed, it will also provide a redundant source of attitude and air data in addition to
that provided by the dedicated ADAHRS units (GSU 25 or GSU 73). If the sensor source
selection is AUTO and attitude or air data is unavailable from any dedicated ADAHRS
unit, the PFD will automatically revert to displaying data from the standby display. This
will be annunciated on the PFD with an ‘AHRS REVERT’ or ‘ADC REVERT’ message (see
section 10.4).
In the example below a GSU 73 is configured as ADAHRS1 and a GSU 25 is
configured as ADAHRS2. ADAHRS1 has failed, the system has auto filled the AHRS
information from AHRS2 as annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window to the
right of the HSI. Since the GSU 73 also processes the engine and airframe data, engine
and airframe data is lost as indicated by the red ‘Xs’.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
26
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Additional
Features
AFCS
Appendix
Index
27
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Dual AHRS
Hazard
Avoidance
Reversionary
Sensor Window
1.7 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
MENUS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
EIS
The G3X has a dedicated MENU Key. Press once to display a context-sensitive list
of options for the page or the dedicated PFD. Press twice to display the Main Menu.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: Flight Log and Track Log must be accessed from the MFD in a Multiple
Display system.
The Page Menu allows the user to access additional features or make setting changes
which specifically relate to the currently displayed page. The menu will display ‘No
Options’ when there are no options for the page selected.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Navigating the page menu:
1) Press the MENU Key once to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to scroll through a list of available options
(a scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the
option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the FMS Joystick, CLR Key, or press the MENU Key twice to remove
the menu and cancel the operation.
Page Menu (No Options)
TER Page Menu
Index
Appendix
Navigating the main menu:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to scroll through a list of available options
(a scroll bar always appears to the right of the window/box when the
option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
28
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Press the FMS Joystick, CLR Key, EXIT Softkey, or press the MENU Key to
remove the menu and cancel the operation.
System
Overview
4)
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Main Menu (Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Main Menu (Full-Screen MFD)
Hazard
Avoidance
Main Menu (Split-Screen PFD)
DATA ENTRY
Index
29
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut
for entering waypoint identifiers. When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a
waypoint identifier, turning the FMS Joystick counter-clockwise accesses a menu
with three different lists of identifiers for quick selections: recent waypoints (RECENT
WPTS), nearest airports (NRST APTS), and flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS). The G3X
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the
selected waypoint.
Additional
Features
The FMS Joystick can be used for directly entering alphanumeric data into the G3X.
In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G3X tries to predict the
desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired
identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the entry without entering the rest of
the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from having to enter all the characters
of the identifier.
System Overview
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Using the FMS Joystick to enter data:
1) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.
a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the FMS Joystick counterclockwise to display a list of recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest
airports (NRST APTS) or flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS).
b) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired waypoint from the list
and press the ENT Key.
Waypoint Entry on Waypoint Page (Split-Screen)
Or:
AFCS
Additional
Features
a) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to select a character for the first
placeholder.
Annun/Alerts
Data Entry
Appendix
Turning the FMS Joystick clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where
appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in the middle at K (US only),
and the digits zero through nine. Turning the FMS Joystick counterclockwise scrolls in the opposite direction.
Index
b) Use the FMS Joystick to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the
field.
30
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.
Flight
Instruments
Or:
Press the FMS Joystick or the CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field
reverts back to its previous information).
EIS
PAGES
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
On the split-screen example below, the PFD occupies the top portion of the display
while the selected page occupies the bottom portion of the display.
GPS
Navigation
Press the FMS Joystick to toggle input focus between the Page Navigation Bar and
interaction with the current page (i.e., turning the page cursor on/off). When the Page
Navigation Bar is highlighted blue, the user can cycle through the pages using the
FMS Joystick. If the Page Navigation Bar is not highlighted blue, the user can interact
with the current page (if available).
CNS
Interface
The Main Pages, Flight Plan Pages, and Nearest Pages are linked together in a series
that you can cycle through using the FMS Joystick. A page navigation bar is displayed
on the lower portion of the display, directly above the softkey bar. The right side of the
page navigation bar shows a list of abbreviated names for each of the pages, and the
left side shows the name of the current page.
Additional
Features
Selected Page
Input Focus on Page Navigation Bar
(Page Cursor Off)
AFCS
Active Page Title
System
Overview
c) Repeat, turning the FMS Joystick to select a character and then moving
the FMS Joystick to move the cursor, until the fields are complete.
Annun/Alerts
Input Focus on Current Page
(Page Cursor On)
Appendix
Page Navigation (Split-Screen)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
31
System Overview
NOTE: Contact Vertical Power for more information regarding the VPX Page.
There are up to nine Main Pages that can be navigated using the FMS Joystick. The
Traffic (TRF) Page can be displayed or removed from the Display Setup menu.
Selecting a main page using the FMS Joystick:
1) If necessary, press the FMS Joystick to begin interaction with the Page
Navigation Bar.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick until the desired page is selected (PFD (split-screen
only), MAP, WPT, WX, TER, TRF (optional) XM, INFO, ENG).
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
MAIN PAGES
Traffic Page (TRF)
Map Page (MAP)
XM Audio Page (XM) (optional)
Waypoint Page (WPT)
Vertical Power (VP-X) (optional)
Weather Page (WX) (optional)
Info Page (INFO)
Terrain Page (TER)
Engine Page (ENG)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
• Main Pages
PFD Page (PFD) (split-screen)
32
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Main Pages (Split-Screen)
33
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Displaying/Removing the Traffic Page:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Traffic Page field.
System
Overview
System Overview
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Show’ or ‘Hide’.
6)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Flight
Instruments
FLIGHT PLAN AND NEAREST PAGES
EIS
The Flight Plan and Nearest Pages are selected by pressing the FPL Key or NRST
Key.
CNS
Interface
Selecting the FPL or NRST pages:
1) Press the FPL or NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick until the desired page is selected.
3) To return to the Main Pages, press the EXIT Softkey.
GPS
Navigation
The Nearest Pages contain the following information.
Flight
Planning
• APT (Airport)—identifier, bearing, distance, length of the longest runway, and
common traffic advisory (CTAF) or tower frequency.
Hazard
Avoidance
• WX (Airport Weather) (GDU 375 Only)—identifier, bearing, distance, METAR text,
and ATIS, AWOS, or ASOS frequency.
• VOR (VHF Omnidirectional Radio Beacon)—identifier, facility type (symbol),
bearing, distance, and frequency.
Additional
Features
• NDB (Non Directional Beacons)—identifier, facility, type (symbol), bearing,
distance, and frequency.
• INT (Intersection)—identifier, bearing, and distance.
AFCS
• VRP (Visual Reporting Point) (Atlantic)—identifier, bearing, and distance.
Annun/Alerts
• USR (User Waypoints)—name, bearing, and distance.
• CTY (City)—name, bearing, and distance.
• ATC (Air Route Traffic Control Center)—bearing, distance, and frequency.
Appendix
• FSS (Flight Service Station)—name, bearing, distance, frequency, and VOR (if
applicable).
Index
• ASPC (Airspace)—name, time to entry (when applicable), and status.
34
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Nearest User Waypoints (USR)
Nearest Airport Weather (WX) (GDU 375)
Nearest Cities (CTY)
Nearest VORs (VOR)
Nearest ARTCC (ATC)
Nearest NDBs (NDB)
Nearest FSS (FSS)
Nearest Intersections (INT)
Nearest Airspace (ASPC)
Flight
Instruments
Nearest Airports (APT)
System
Overview
• Nearest Pages (NRST)
EIS
Visual Reporting Point (VRP) (Atlantic)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Nearest Pages (Split-Screen)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
35
System Overview
System
Overview
• Flight Planning Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan (ACTV)
Vertical Navigation (VNAV)
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Flight Plan List (LIST) (only
available from the MFD in
two display system)
MAIN PAGE SOFTKEYS
The softkeys are located along the bottom of the display(s). The softkeys shown
depend on the softkey level or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys
can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When a softkey is selected, its color
undergoes a momentary change to black text on blue background then automatically
switches to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned off,
at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is
disabled, the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkey
On
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight Planning Pages (Split-Screen)
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
Bezel Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Softkeys (WPT Page)
36
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
PFD SOFTKEYS
OBS CRS
or
HDG
LOC CRS
or
CRS
Flight
Instruments
VOR CRS
or
CDI SRC
BARO
ALT
EIS
Allows the pilot to adjust the heading bug
CRS (subdued)
A navigation source is not selected
CNS
Interface
HDG
or
Allows the pilot to adjust the OBS course
GPS
Navigation
OBS CRS
or
Allows the pilot to adjust the VOR course
Flight
Planning
VOR CRS
or
CDI SRC
Toggles between available NAV sources (when configured)
BARO
Allows the pilot to change the barometric setting and
enables the second-level BARO Softkeys
Allows the pilot to adjust the selected altitude
ALT
Additional
Features
Allows the pilot to adjust the localizer course
Hazard
Avoidance
LOC CRS
BARO
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Allows the pilot to set or clear the barometric minimums
altitude reminder
Allows the pilot to change the barometric setting
Returns to top-level softkeys
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
37
Index
BARO
BACK
BACK
Appendix
MINIMUMS
BARO
XX
GAL
Annun/Alerts
MINIMUMS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Optional Transponder Softkey
With a remote transponder configured, the #2 PFD Softkey becomes XPDR (if
a navigation source is not selected) or XPDR/CRS (when the pilot can control the
navigation course).
XPDR
or
CNS
Interface
OBS CRS
or
GPS
Navigation
EIS
XPDR/CRS
LOC CRS
or
VOR CRS
or
CRS
CODE
MODE
BACK
STBY / GND
ON
ALT
SET ID
BACK
CODE
VFR
BACK
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
IDENT
Additional
Features
IDENT
AFCS
IDENT
CRS (subdued)
Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC).
A navigation source is not selected
Annun/Alerts
or
OBS CRS
Allows the pilot to adjust the OBS course
or
Appendix
VOR CRS
Allows the pilot to adjust the VOR course
Index
or
38
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
CODE
MODE
Allows the pilot to enter the transponder code and
displays the second-level CODE softkeys
Displays second-level MODE softkeys
BACK
Returns to top-level softkeys
Flight
Instruments
Allows the pilot to adjust the localizer course
System
Overview
LOC CRS
CODE Softkey selected
VFR
Flight
Planning
MODE Softkey selected
STBY
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
BACK
AFCS
SET ID
Additional
Features
ALT
Selects the standby mode. When in standby mode, the
remote transponder will not reply to any interrogations.
Press and hold to put the transponder in Ground
(GND) Mode. Ground Mode is normally selected
automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
Generates Mode A and Mode S replies, but Mode C
altitude reporting is inhibited.
Selects ALT Mode. All transponder replies requesting
altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
Allows the pilot to set the Flight ID. (The Flight ID must
be configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ for the SET ID softkey
to be displayed).
Returns to previous level softkeys
Hazard
Avoidance
ON
GPS
Navigation
BACK or DONE
The pre-programmed VFR code is automatically
displayed in the code field of the Transponder Data
Box. Pressing the VFR softkey again restores the
previous identification code.
Returns to top-level softkeys
CNS
Interface
CODE
Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC).
Returns to top-level softkeys
EIS
IDENT
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
39
Optional Integrated Autopilot Interface Softkeys
With an autopilot configured, the #1 PFD Softkey becomes HDG/ROLL and the #5
PFD Softkey becomes ALT/PTCH.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
HDG/ROLL
CNS
Interface
EIS
ALT/PTCH
GPS
Navigation
HDG/ROLL
AP HDG
AP NAV
ALT/PTCH
(AP APPR)
Flight
Planning
HDG/ROLL
AP VNAV
AP VS
AP ALT
ALT/PTCH
Hazard
Avoidance
HDG/ROLL Softkey selected
HDG/ROLL
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the heading/track* and
displays lateral mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to topor
level softkeys
TRK/ROLL*
Additional
Features
AP HDG
AFCS
AP NAV
Annun/Alerts
AP TRK *
Appendix
ALT/PTCH
Selects/deselects heading mode
Selects/deselects navigation mode. Cancels GS Mode if LOC
Mode is either active or armed. Cancels GP Mode if GPS Mode
is either active or armed. Cancels LOC Mode if GPS Mode is
active and LOC Mode is armed.
Activates track mode*
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the selected altitude and
displays the vertical mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to
top-level softkeys
ALT/PTCH Softkey selected
Index
HDG/ROLL
40
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the heading bug and
displays lateral mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to toplevel softkeys
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
or
Selects/deselects approach mode
Selects/deselects vertical speed mode
Selects/deselects altitude hold mode
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the selected altitude and
displays the vertical mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to
top-level softkeys
AP APPR
AP VS
AP ALT
ALT/PTCH
CNS
Interface
* GMC 507
MAP PAGE SOFTKEYS
WEATHER
GPS
Navigation
TERRAIN
MAP
EIS
or
Flight
Instruments
Selects/deselects vertical navigation
System
Overview
AP VNAV
TRAFFIC
TERRAIN
Displays/removes terrain awareness information
WEATHER
Displays/removes weather information
TRAFFIC
Displays/removes traffic information
Hazard
Avoidance
Enables second-level Map Page softkeys
Flight
Planning
MAP
Additional
Features
MAP
AFCS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
TOPO
SAT VIEW
BACK
VFR MAP
IFR MAP
LOW AWY
HIGH AWY
BACK
Appendix
IFR MAP
Annun/Alerts
VFR MAP
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
41
System Overview
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
VFR MAP Softkey selected
IFR MAP
Displays IFR map information and softkeys
TOPO
SAT VIEW
Displays/removes topographical terrain shading
Displays/removes satellite imagery (above 20nm scale)
BACK
Returns to top-level softkeys
VFR MAP
Displays VFR map information and softkeys
LOW AWY
Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
CNS
Interface
HIGH AWY
High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
BACK
Returns to top-level softkeys
GPS
Navigation
EIS
IFR MAP Softkey selected
WAYPOINT PAGE SOFTKEYS
(DIRECTORY)
Flight
Planning
INFO
RUNWAY
CHART
AOPA
WEATHER
Hazard
Avoidance
Waypoint (WPT) Page Softkeys
(Split-Screen)
(DIRECTORY)
Additional
Features
INFO
CHART
AOPA
WEATHER
INFO
Displays waypoint information
RUNWAY
Displays runway information (split-screen only)
CHART
Displays optional FliteCharts
AOPA or DIRECTORY
Displays airport directory information
WEATHER
Displays METAR and TAF text (optional)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Waypoint (WPT) Page Softkeys
(Full-Screen)
42
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
PAN MAP
SETUP
ANIMATE
INFO
System
Overview
WEATHER PAGE SOFTKEYS (OPTIONAL)
LEGEND
Flight
Instruments
Activates the map pointer for panning the map
SETUP
Select the weather source (XM or FIS-B).
ANIMATE
Animates NEXRAD Radar and Satellite Mosaic weather
INFO
Displays XM Information
LEGEND
Displays weather legends
EIS
PAN MAP
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
TERRAIN PAGE SOFTKEYS
PROFILE
SETTINGS
Flight
Planning
MAP
DISABLE
DISABLE
Additional
Features
SETTINGS
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain (TER) Page Softkeys
(Split-Screen)
Displays the Terrain Page Profile View.
SETTINGS
Displays the Terrain Setup Page
DISABLE
Toggles terrain alerts on/off.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
PROFILE
Appendix
Displays the Terrain Page Map View
Annun/Alerts
MAP
AFCS
Terrain (TER) Page Softkeys
(Full-Screen)
43
System Overview
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
VOL -
VOL +
MUTE
BACK
INFO
TREND
FLT ID
ALT MODE
DISABLE
BELOW
NORMAL
ABOVE
UNREST
BACK
INFO
STATIONS
SETUP
EXIT
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
TRAFFIC PAGE SOFTKEYS (OPTIONAL GDL OR GTS 800)
INFO
Select to view Data Link and Weather info
TREND
Displays TargetTrend™ traffic vectors.
FLT ID
ALT MODE
Displays FLT ID information.
Select to set altitude mode.
DISABLE
Temporally disables traffic alerts
Hazard
Avoidance
ALT MODE Softkey selected
Additional
Features
BELOW
AFCS
NORMAL
Annun/Alerts
ABOVE
UNREST
Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the aircraft.
Typically used during descent phase of flight.
Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft.
Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet above the aircraft.
Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
(Unrestricted): All traffic is displayed.
Appendix
INFO Softkey selected
Index
INFO
WEATHER
44
Displays Device, status, GPS position, pressure altitude,
ground uplink signal, TIS-B uplink signal, and air-to-air
traffic information.
Displays weather product status.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
INFO
CATEGORY CHANNEL
FAVORITE
System
Overview
XM AUDIO PAGE SOFTKEYS (OPTIONAL)
VOLUME
Flight
Instruments
Displays XM Information
CATEGORY
Highlights the Category field
CHANNEL
Highlights the Channels field
FAVORITE
Displays a list of favorite channels
VOLUME
Enables second-level VOLUME softkeys
Press and hold to toggle Mute on/off.
EIS
INFO
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
VOLUME
Flight
Planning
VOL -
VOL +
MUTE
Hazard
Avoidance
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
Additional
Features
VOL +
Increases XM audio volume
MUTE
Toggles XM audio on/off
BACK
Returns to top-level softkeys
Annun/Alerts
Decreases XM audio volume
AFCS
VOL -
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
45
System Overview
System
Overview
INFO PAGE SOFTKEY
Flight
Instruments
MESSAGES
MESSAGES
Displays system status messages
EIS
VP-X PAGE SOFTKEYS (OPTIONAL)
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
SYS VIEW
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
SYS VIEW
XXXX
XXXX
ON
OFF
AUTO
RESET
Vertical Power (VPX) Softkeys
(Split-Screen)
TRIM UP
XXXX
TRIM DN
XXXX
ON
TRIM L
OFF
TRIM R
AUTO
RESET
Additional
Features
Vertical Power (VPX) Softkeys
(Full-Screen)
AFCS
SYS VIEW
Annun/Alerts
XXXX
Appendix
XXXX
AUTO
Index
RESET
TRIM UP
TRIM DN
FLAPS DN
FLAPS UP
SYS VIEW is only available on a Split-Screen installation
and toggles between a list of configured devices
and the schematic showing the connected devices.
TRIM L
TRIM R
RESET
Device Sensitive Softkey (e.g., ‘ON’,FLAPS
‘TRIMDNUP’, ‘TRIM
L’, or ‘FLAPS UP’)
Device Sensitive Softkey (e.g., ‘OFF’, ‘TRIM DN’, ‘TRIM
FLAPS DN
FLAPS UP
AUTO
FLAPS DN
R’, or ‘FLAPS DN’)
Only appears when the landing light is selected and it
has been configured for ‘wig-wag’.
RESET
FLAPS
DN
Only available when the selected device is in a fault
condition. Select RESET to reset the device, similar
to resetting a circuit breaker.
AUTO
46
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
FLAPS DN
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
(optional) (optional)
XXXX
(optional) (optional)
XXXX
LEAN
FUEL
CNS
Interface
XXXX
EIS
If the Engine Page information configured exceeds one page, additional engine
gauges may be distributed among the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd softkeys as required.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The Engine (ENG) Page softkeys displayed are dependant on the
configuration. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for information on
configuring the Engine Page.
System
Overview
ENG PAGE SOFTKEYS (EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION)
AUX, AUX1, AUX2, ELEC,
TRIM, TEMPS
LEAN
Displays additional engine gauges as required
(optional)
Activates/deactivates Lean Assist (optional)
FUEL
Displays Fuel Calculator (optional)
Flight
Planning
Displays main engine gauges (optional)
GPS
Navigation
MAIN, TEMPS
Hazard
Avoidance
(optional)
FUEL
Additional
Features
XX GAL
(optional)
(optional)
XX GAL
XX GAL
AFCS
RESET
FUEL
Annun/Alerts
XX GAL
Resets fuel used to zero and fuel remaining to full
tanks
Sets fuel remaining to the full tank quantity where XX
is the airframe specific full fuel quantity
Appendix
RESET
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
47
System Overview
System
Overview
XX GAL
Sets fuel remaining to a partial tank quantity (i.e., filler
neck tab) where XX is an airframe specific partial
fuel quantity (optional)
Sets fuel remaining to a partial tank quantity (i.e., filler
neck tab) where XX is an airframe specific partial
fuel quantity (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Flight
Instruments
XX GAL
EIS
FUEL
CNS
Interface
FLIGHT PLANNING SOFTKEYS
GPS
Navigation
ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN PAGE SOFTKEYS
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
USE MAP
INTERNAL EXTERNAL
EXIT
USE MAP
Activates the Map Pointer
SEL APPR
Displays the Select Approach Window
INTERNAL
(Optional) Allows the pilot to select the internal GPS
flight plan source.
(Optional) Allows the pilot to select the external GPS
flight plan source.
Exits the Flight Plan Pages
EXTERNAL
Additional
Features
SEL APPR
EXIT
AFCS
FLIGHT PLAN LIST PAGE SOFTKEYS
NEW
IMPORT
EXPORT
EXIT
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
ACTIVATE
48
ACTIVATE
Displays the ‘Activate Flight Plan?’ Window
NEW
Displays the ‘New Flight Plan’ Window
IMPORT
Displays the available flight plans to import from the SD Card
EXPORT
Exports the selected flight plan
EXIT
Exits the Flight Plan Pages
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
CAPTURE
System
Overview
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) PAGE SOFTKEYS
EXIT
Flight
Instruments
Captures/cancels VNAV profile
EXIT
Exits the Flight Plan Pages
EIS
CAPTURE
CNS
Interface
NEAREST PAGE SOFTKEYS
NEAREST AIRPORT PAGE SOFTKEYS
HELIPORT
GPS
Navigation
PRIVATE
EXIT
HELIPORT
Displays/removes the nearest heliports
EXIT
Exits the Nearest Pages
Hazard
Avoidance
Displays/removes the nearest private airports
Flight
Planning
PRIVATE
Additional
Features
Various softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity (e.g.,
PAN MAP, VOLUME, etc), other softkeys require manual de-selection (e.g., TERRAIN,
WEATHER, PANEL, etc.).
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
49
1.8 ACCESSING THE INFORMATION (INFO) PAGE
NOTE: Refer to Section 10.2 for the INFO Page System Status Messages.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
VIEWING GPS RECEIVER STATUS
Internal system checking is performed to ensure the GPS receiver is providing
accurate data to the GDU(s).
The G3X GDUs can be configured to share GPS information (refer to the G3X
Installation Manual for configuration information). For example, a GDU can be
configured to share its GPS position, velocity, and time data with another GDU. If a
GDU is not using its own GPS receiver, the name of the GDU providing the data (i.e.,
‘3D GPS Location (PFD)’ or ‘3D GPS Location (MFD)’) is displayed following the GPS
Status text on the INFO Page.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
NOTE: A System Status Message and the word ‘External’ appearing next to
the GPS Status indicates that the display connected to the GPS antenna is
unavailable and the remaining display(s) are using the external GPS navigator
for 2D GPS position data. In this case, the data collected from the external
navigator is not considered a sufficient source of GPS data by the GSU 73
AHRS.
The GPS Status will display one of the following conditions:
AFCS
• Autolocate—Receiver is looking for any satellite whose almanac has been
collected, which can take up to 5 minutes
• Searching the Sky—Receiver is looking for satellites
Annun/Alerts
• Acquiring Satellites—Receiver is looking for and collecting data from satellites
visible at its last known or initialized location, but has not acquired a fix
Appendix
• 2D GPS Location—At least three satellites have been acquired and a twodimensional location fix has been calculated. “2D Differential” appears when
you are receiving DGPS corrections in 2D mode
Index
• 3D GPS Location—At least four satellites have been acquired and a threedimensional fix has been calculated. “3D Differential” appears when you are
receiving DGPS corrections in 3D mode
50
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Flight
Instruments
GPS Status, Position, and Data Fields (full-screen only) can be accessed from the
Information Page.
System
Overview
• Lost Satellite Reception—the receiver is no longer tracking enough satellites for a
2D or 3D fix
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
INFO Page (Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Data Fields
Receiver Status
PRN Number
Signal Strength Bars
Additional
Features
Constellation
Diagram
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
45° Above
Horizon
Horizon
Reference Waypoint
Appendix
INFO Page (Full Screen)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
51
System Overview
System
Overview
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
1) If necessary press the FMS Joystick to begin interaction with the Navigation
Bar.
The ‘New Location’ menu option on the INFO Page is used when the GPS Receiver
is having trouble finding the satellites it expects to be there.
Entering a new location:
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
1)
From the INFO Page, while the unit is searching for satellites, press the
MENU Key.
2)
With ‘New Location’ menu option highlighted, press the INFO Key.
3)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Use Map’ or ‘Use Identifier’, and press
the ENT Key.
4)
After selecting your approximate position using the map pointer or entering
an identifier, press the ENT Key.
5)
The GPS Receiver will begin a new search based on the location entered.
ACQUIRING SATELLITES
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for
navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected continuously from the
satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view.
“Acquiring Satellites” is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites
have been acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, “3D
GPS Location” is indicated as the solution until the 3D differential fix has finished
acquisition.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Turn the FMS Joystick until the Info Page is selected.
NEW LOCATION
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
2)
52
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
The Position box on the INFO Page displays latitude, longitude, accuracy (in feet),
reference waypoint, type, distance, direction, and bearing. The reference waypoint is
designed to display the current position in relation to a prominent landmark. The pilot
can change the reference waypoint ‘Nearest Type’ using the ‘Change Nearest Type’
page menu option. By default the Nearest Type is set to ‘Automatic’, which will display
the nearest large airport, enroute VOR, or city (in that order).
EIS
POSITION
Flight
Instruments
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite
constellation diagram. The outer circle of the constellation diagram represents the
horizon, the inner circle represents 45° above the horizon, and the center point shows
the position directly overhead. Each satellite is represented by a square containing the
Pseudo-Random Noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification number).
The INFO Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels
due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks
onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the
appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 33-64 for WAAS) below each bar. The
progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar
appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Gray bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can
be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
System
Overview
SATELLITE INFORMATION
Annun/Alerts
Reference
Waypoint
Appendix
Position Information on INFO Page (Split-Screen)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
53
System Overview
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Changing the Nearest Type:
1) From the Info Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Change Nearest Type’ and
press the ENT Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired nearest type option
(Automatic, Airport, VOR, NDB, Intersection, City, Waypoint), and press the
ENT Key.
Nearest Type Menu
SHOW/HIDE LAT/LON ON THE INFO PAGE
If the Location Format selected on the Position Setup Page (refer to Appendix D,
Map Datum and Location Formats) is not set to a Lat/Lon format, a new menu option
‘Show/Hide Lat/Lon’ will appear on the INFO Page. Selecting ‘Show Lat/Lon’ allows
simultaneous display of the current position in both the selected location format as
well as Lat/Lon format.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
INFO Page Menu
54
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Changing the Info Page Data Fields (Full-Screen):
1) From the Info Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Change Data Fields’ and press
the ENT Key. The cursor is displayed on the first Data Field.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Data Field.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of available Data Field options.
5) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Data Field, and
press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
The page layout and Data Fields of the full-screen Info Page can be independently
configured by the user. Refer to the Annunciations and Alerts Section for a list of
available Info Page Data Field options.
System
Overview
DATA FIELDS AND LAYOUT (FULL-SCREEN MFD)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
INFO Page Menu
Data Field Options
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Changing the Info Page layout:
1) From the Info Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Select Page Layout’ and press
the ENT Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired page layout option (1 Row,
2 Rows, 3 Rows), and press the ENT Key.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
55
1.9 SYSTEM SETTINGS
The System Setup option in the Main Menu allows management of the following
system parameters:
• Transponder (optional)
• Units
• Data Bar Fields
• Date & Time
• Display
• Position
• Sound
• Alarms
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
System Setup Menu (Split-Screen)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Restoring system setting defaults:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired menu option (Data
Bar Fields, Display, Date & Time, Position, or Alarms), and press the ENT
Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Restore Default’ highlighted press the ENT Key.
56
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
57
Hazard
Avoidance
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Transponder Ground Test:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Transponder’, and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Ground Maint Test’ Field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
CNS
Interface
Enabling/disabling ADS-B Transmit:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Transponder’, and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘ADS-B Transmit’ Field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
EIS
Setting the Flight ID:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Transponder’, and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Flight ID’ Field.
5) Use the FMS Joystick to enter the desired Flight ID and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
If configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ in configuration mode, (refer to the Installation Manual
for configuration information) the pilot can change the Flight ID and enable/disable
ADS-B Transmit from the Transponder Setup Page.
System
Overview
TRANSPONDER
DATA BAR FIELDS
The content of the four data bar fields are independently configured by the user.
The full-screen MFD and PFD Data Bar Fields are independently configured from each
display.
Data Bar
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
CNS
Interface
Data Bar (Split-Screen)
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Data Bar
Fields
By default, the split-screen PFD Page data bar fields and the full-screen PFD data bar
fields are set to display Next Waypoint (WPT), Bearing to Waypoint (BRG), Distance to
Waypoint (DIS), and Estimated Time Enroute (ETE). The full-screen MFD data bar fields
default to Ground Speed (GS), Ground Track (TRK), Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA), and
Vertical Speed Required (VSR). These four data fields can be changed to display any of
the Data Bar Field Options. Refer to the Annunciations and Alerts Section for a list of
available Data Bar Field options.
Changing the information shown in the data bar fields:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) With ‘Data Bar Fields’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Data Bar Setup Page (Split-Screen)
58
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Flight
Instruments
6)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired ‘Field’.
Turn the FMS Joystick to access the list of options, then turn or move the
FMS Joystick to highlight the desired option and press the ENT Key.
To restore defaults, press the MENU Key. With ‘Restore Default’
highlighted, press the ENT Key.
System
Overview
4)
5)
ADDITIONAL DATA BAR INFORMATION
CNS
Interface
Data Fields
Using External
Navigator 1
(GPS1)
EIS
If more than one GPS Navigator is configured, the active GPS Navigator is displayed
in magenta in the upper left corner of the Data Bar.
GPS
Navigation
Data Bar (GPS1)
Hazard
Avoidance
Using Internal
GPS Flight Plan
Flight
Planning
‘INT’ is displayed in cyan and ‘GPS’ is displayed in magenta in the upper left corner
of the Data Bar when one or more GPS Navigators are configured and the pilot elects
to use the internal GPS navigation source.
Additional
Features
Internal Flight Plan Indication
Annun/Alerts
External
GPS Failure.
Reverted to
Internal GPS
AFCS
‘REV’ is displayed in yellow and ‘GPS’ is displayed in magenta in the upper left
corner of the Data Bar when all external GPS navigation sources fail.
Appendix
External GPS Navigation Failure
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
59
DISPLAY
The Backlight Intensity (display brightness) can be set to ‘Auto’ or ‘Manual’. ‘Auto’
sets the Backlight Intensity based on the aircraft’s instrument lighting bus voltage.
With ‘Manual’ selected, the pilot can manually adjust the desired backlight intensity
(1-10). After each power cycle the Backlight Intensity is set to the default, which is
configurable. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
GPS
Navigation
‘EIS
Display
Location’
Menu
Option
Flight
Planning
Display Setup Page
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Adjusting backlight intensity:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Auto’.
Or:
a) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Manual’.
b) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Backlight Intensity
(1-10).
5) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
60
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
The Color Mode setting is used to adjust the color brightness used on the map and
synthetic vision display for day or night use.
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Setting the Startup Page
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Startup Page field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Startup Page.
Flight
Instruments
Adjusting the color mode:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Color Mode field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Day’, ‘Night’, or ‘Auto’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
System
Overview
COLOR MODE
EIS DISPLAY LOCATION (OPTIONAL)
• User Selected—Enables the user to choose between ‘AUTO’ and ‘PFD’ via the
Display Setup menu.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
61
Index
For more information on how to enable the ‘EIS Display Location’ setting in
Configuration Mode refer to the G3X Installation Manual.
Appendix
• PFD—Always displays the EIS Strip on PFD1 (and PFD2 if applicable).
Annun/Alerts
• AUTO—Displays the EIS Strip on the MFD, or on the PFD1 (and PFD2 if applicable)
if the MFD is not displayed.
AFCS
In Configuration Mode the ‘EIS Display Location’ setting can be set to one of the
following:
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
EIS
‘EIS
Display
Location’
Menu
Option
CNS
Interface
Display Setup Page
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Changing the EIS display location:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the EIS Display Location field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Auto’ or ‘PFD’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Additional
Features
SCREENSHOT
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Enabling/disabling screenshots:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Screenshot field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’.
Index
Saving a Screenshot:
1) With screenshots enabled (see above), navigate to the desired screen.
2) Press and hold the MENU Key until the screen flashes indicating the
screenshot was saved to the SD Card.
62
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
Flight
Instruments
The pilot can manually adjust the desired XM Volume (0-10), Message Volume (Off or
1-10), Altitude Alert (On/Off), and Minimums Alert (On/Off). Message Volume controls
the banner message tones (e.g., “Approaching Airspace” or “Arriving at Waypoint”).
Alert Volume (e.g., terrain, traffic, autopilot, etc.) is set in configuration mode (refer to
the G3X Installation Manual for more information).
System
Overview
SOUND
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
63
Index
2)
Appendix
Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
Annun/Alerts
1)
AFCS
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information regarding
the Altitude Alert Tone.
Additional
Features
Turning the altitude alert tone on/off:
Hazard
Avoidance
Adjusting XM and/or Message Volume:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field (XM Volume or
Message Volume), and select the desired volume by turning the FMS
Joystick.
5) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Flight
Planning
Sound Setup Page (Split-Screen)
System
Overview
System Overview
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Altitude Alert field, and select ‘On/
Off’ by turning the FMS Joystick.
Flight
Instruments
Turning the minimums alert tone on/off:
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information regarding
the Minimums Alert Tone.
1)
Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Minimums Alert field, and select
‘On/Off’ by turning the FMS Joystick.
Flight
Planning
Enable/disable the ‘Traffic Not Available’ audio alert:
Hazard
Avoidance
Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Traffic N/A Alert field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
1)
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section for more information regarding
the ‘Traffic Not Available’ audio alert.
UNITS
Index
Appendix
Changing unit settings:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Units’ and press the ENT Key.
64
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
5)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Flight
Instruments
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field, and select the desired
unit by turning the FMS Joystick.
System
Overview
4)
EIS
CNS
Interface
Units Setup Page (Split-Screen)
DATE & TIME
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Changing date & time settings:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Date & Time’ and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field, and select the desired
option by turning the FMS Joystick.
5) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Date & Time Setup Page (Split-Screen)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
65
System Overview
System
Overview
POSITION
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Refer to Appendix D for more information on Map Datums and Location Formats.
EIS
NOTE: ‘Heading’ and ‘Mag. Variation’ settings always display magnetic
heading and have no effect on the HSI or Heading Tape since they are driven
by the magnetometer data.
Position Setup Page (Split-Screen)
ALARMS
The Alarms Page allows the pilot to turn airspace alarms On/Off, set an Altitude
Buffer, Arrival Alarm, Next Waypoint Alarm, Proximity Alarm, and Fuel Tank Reminder
Alarm.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Changing position settings:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Position’ and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field, and select the desired
option by turning the FMS Joystick.
5) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
remove the menu.
66
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
The ‘Fuel Tank’ Reminder alarm is used a a reminder to switch fuel tanks. The
reminder message repeats at the specified interval after the beginning of each trip.
The Fuel Tank Timer (FUEL TIMER) data field option is the elapsed time since the ‘Fuel
Tank’ Reminder alarm was last issued (HH:MM).
CNS
Interface
FUEL TANK REMINDER ALARM AND FUEL TANK TIMER
EIS
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
remove the menu.
Flight
Instruments
5)
System
Overview
Changing alarm settings:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Alarms’ and press the ENT
Key. Pressing the AIRSPACE Softkey displays the Airspace Alarms Page.
Pressing the NAV Softkey displays the Arrival Alarm, Next Waypoint Alarm,
Proximity Alarm, and Fuel Tank Reminder (Split-Screen Only).
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field, and select the desired
option by turning the FMS Joystick.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Airspace Alarms (Split-Screen)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Index
Nav Alarms (Split-Screen)
Alarms (Full-Screen MFD)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
67
AIRPORT CRITERIA
The Page Menu on the Nearest Airports Page allows the pilot to filter out airports
that do not meet a defined criteria. Specific surface types and runway lengths can be
defined, as well as the option to include private airports and/or heliports.
• Runway Surface: Allows the pilot to set criteria for the type of surface on the
runway.
–– Any: Shows any runway, regardless of surface type, including water landing facilities.
–– Hard Only: Shows only runways with a concrete, asphalt, or similar sealed surface.
–– Hard or Soft: Shows all runways except water landing facilities.
–– Water Only: Shows only water landing facilities.
• Minimum Runway Length: Allows the pilot to enter a specific length for the
shortest runway allowed.
• Include Private Airports: Allows the pilot include Private Airports in the search
criteria.
Entering airport criteria:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest Airports Page.
3) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Airport Criteria’, and then
press the ENT Key. The Airport Criteria Window appears with the current
settings.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Nearest Airports Page Menu
Index
5)
68
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field and turn the FMS
Joystick to select the desired option from the menu. Press the ENT Key if
necessary to highlight the next field.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System Overview
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
6)
EIS
Airport Criteria Window
With ‘Done’ highlighted press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
Restoring airport criteria defaults:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest Airports Page.
3) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Airport Criteria’, and then
press the ENT Key. A window appears with the current settings.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) With ‘Restore Default’ highlighted press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
69
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
System Overview
Blank Page
70
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Flight
Instruments
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to Section 9 for Autopilot information.
EIS
GPS
Navigation
The split-screen display has a PFD that occupies the top portion of the display at all
times. Select the PFD Page in order to view the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI),
Outside Air Temperature (OAT), System Time, selected course, and selected heading.
CNS
Interface
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments
on the panel with an easy-to-scan Primary Flight Display (PFD) that features a horizon,
airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, heading, and course deviation information.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
PFD Page (Split-Screen)
PFD (Full Screen)
Selecting the PFD Page (split-screen):
Appendix
1) Press the FMS Joystick if necessary to begin interaction with the Page
Navigation Bar.
2)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select the PFD Page.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
71
Index
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the
PFD and/or PFD Page (split-screen).
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
1
36
Flight
Instruments
2
35
3
34
4
33
CNS
Interface
EIS
5
6
32
7
31
8
30
GPS
Navigation
9
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
10
11
29
12
28
13
27
14
26
15
16
Additional
Features
17
18
AFCS
19
20
25
Annun/Alerts
21
23
24
Index
Appendix
22
72
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Airspeed Indicator
25
Bearing 2 Information Window
4
Attitude Indicator
26
Bearing Pointer
5
Pathways
27
Selected Heading Bug (HSI)
6
Flight Path Marker
28
Selected Course
7
Angle of Attack (AOA)
29
Altimeter Barometric Setting
8
Pitch Scale
30
Current Vertical Speed
9
Vspeed Reference
31
Aircraft Symbol
10
Slip/Skid Indicator
32
Flight Director
11
True Airspeed (TAS)
33
Glideslope Indicator
12
Lateral Deviation Scale & Course Deviation
34
Current Vertical Speed
13
Selected Heading
35
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
14
Current Track Indicator
36
Reference Altitude
15
Wind Data (Speed & Direction)
37
Selected Altitude Bug
16
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
38
Turn Rate Indicator
17
Trim Indicator
39
Zero Pitch Line
18
Flap Indicator
40
Current Track Indicator (Heading Strip)
19
Navigation Source
41
Current Heading
20
Bearing 1 Information Window
42
Selected Heading Bug
21
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
43
Turn Rate Indicator
22
Transponder Code
44
Autopilot Status Box
AFCS
3
Additional
Features
System Time
Hazard
Avoidance
24
Flight
Planning
Ground Speed (GS)
GPS
Navigation
2
CNS
Interface
Transponder Mode
EIS
23
Flight
Instruments
Heading Strip
System
Overview
1
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
73
Flight Instruments
NOTE: The G3X Vspeed Reference values and Flaps Tick Mark values depend
upon the aircraft’s specific system configuration and may vary from the
examples discussed in this section.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a rolling number gauge using a moving
tape. The true airspeed (TAS) is displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The
numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of
10 knots. Speed indication starts at 20 mph (when mph is configured and connected
to a GSU 25), with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The actual airspeed
is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching neverexceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red.
A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow, and red/white “barber pole”) speed range
strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote flaps operating range, normal
operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
present for low speed awareness.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical, magenta line, extending up or down on the
airspeed scale, shown to the right of the color-coded speed range strip. The end of
the trend vector corresponds to the predicted airspeed in 6 seconds if the current rate
of acceleration is maintained. If the trend vector crosses VNE, the text of the actual
airspeed readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system
failure.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
74
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Ground Speed
Flight
Instruments
Airspeed Reference Bug
Airspeed Trend Vector
Actual Airspeed
Vspeed References
EIS
Airspeed Color Ranges
CNS
Interface
True Airspeed
GPS
Navigation
Airspeed Indicator
VNE ADJUSTED FOR TRUE AIRSPEED (OPTIONAL)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
VNE
Flight
Planning
The airspeed indicator can optionally be configured to display VNE adjusted for true
airspeed. This is useful in aircraft where true airspeed (instead of indicated airspeed)
must be kept below VNE. Using TAS instead of IAS causes VNE to be reduced at high
altitudes. If configured, the G3X can calculate and display this reduction in VNE. A solid
red band is used between the TAS adjusted VNE and the actual indicated value for VNE.
AFCS
IAS is below Vne
but TAS is above Vne
Annun/Alerts
Vne Adjusted for TAS
Appendix
Index
Vne Adjusted for True Airspeed
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
75
VSPEED REFERENCE
Vspeed references including VNE, Vno, Vso, Vs1, Vfe, Va, Vx, Vy, VYse, Vg, Vr, as well as several
custom Vspeeds can be configured from the Aircraft Configuration Page, refer to the
G3X Installation Manual for more information.
When airspeed is present, the Vspeeds configured are also displayed at their
respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale, otherwise the Vspeeds are
displayed at the bottom of the airspeed indicator.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
GPS
Navigation
Vspeed References
Vspeed References
Vspeed References
(without airspeed)
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a
white horizon line. The Attitude Indicator displays the pitch (indicated by the yellow
symbolic aircraft on the pitch scale), roll, and slip/skid information.
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Pitch markings occur at 2.5˚ intervals
through all pitch ranges.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚
and 60˚ and minor tick marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the
zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position of the pointer on the roll scale.
Slip/skid is indicated by the location of the ball.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Vspeed References
(with airspeed)
76
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
1
8
7
3
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Slip/Skid Indicator
6
Land Representation
7
Pitch Scale
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
1
Roll Pointer
GPS
Navigation
5
Roll Scale
CNS
Interface
6
2
EIS
4
Roll Pointer
Flight
Instruments
2
1
System
Overview
9
Attitude Indicator
2
7
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Slip/Skid Indicator
6
Land Representation
7
Pitch Scale
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
3
10
4
6
5
Attitude Indicator W/AFCS and SVX
Annun/Alerts
Roll Scale
AFCS
2
Additional
Features
8
Hazard
Avoidance
1
Flight
Planning
9
10 Flight Director
Command Bars
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
77
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 400 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a rolling
number gauge using a moving tape. Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown
at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20 feet. The current
altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a
selection bug symbol. A bug corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape; if
the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the tape, the bug appears at the
corresponding edge of the tape.
Setting the selected altitude:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the ALT (or
ALT/PTCH if the Integrated Autopilot Interface is configured) Softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Syncing to the current altitude:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the ALT (or
ALT/PTCH if the Integrated Autopilot Interface is configured) Softkey.
2) Press and hold the FMS Joystick. The current altitude is now displayed as
the Selected Altitude.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Bug
Index
Appendix
Vertical Speed Indicator
Barometric Setting
Altimeter
78
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury
(in Hg), hectopascals (hPa), or millibars.
System
Overview
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the BARO
Softkey to highlight the barometric pressure setting.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the desired barometric pressure setting
and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
Syncing to the local barometric pressure setting:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the BARO
Softkey.
2) While stationary on the ground, press and hold the FMS Joystick.
3) Verify indicated altitude matches local field elevation.
GPS
Navigation
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision
Height (DH) can be set by the user and is reset when the power is cycled. Once
the user-defined altitude is within the range of the tape, a cyan bug appears at the
reference altitude on the Altimeter. Once the aircraft reaches the user-defined MDA/
DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums Minimums”, is heard.
Flight
Planning
BAROMETRIC MINIMUM ALERT
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
79
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Light Blue Within Range
Yellow When Altitude Reached
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Flight
Planning
Barometric
Minimum Box
Barometric
Minimum Box
Barometric Minimum Visual Annunciations
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Setting the barometric minimum alert bug:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the BARO
Softkey.
2) Press the MINIMUMS Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the desired alert altitude and press the
ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Canceling the barometric minimum alert bug:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the BARO
Softkey.
2) Press the MINIMUMS Softkey.
3) Press the CLR Key.
80
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Deviation of ±200 ft
Flight
Planning
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band
(±200 Feet of the Selected Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text
on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
GPS
Navigation
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected
Altitude flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated to indicate that the
aircraft is approaching the selected altitude.
CNS
Interface
• Passing within 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown
above the Altimeter) flashes for 5 seconds and an aural tone is generated.
EIS
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when
approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the
Altitude Alerter is reset. The following will occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude:
Flight
Instruments
ALTITUDE ALERTING
System
Overview
Turning the minimums alert tone on/off:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Minimums Alert field, and select
‘On/Off’ by turning the FMS Joystick.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciation
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
81
Flight Instruments
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Turning the altitude alert tone on/off:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Altitude Alert field, and select ‘On/
Off’ by turning the FMS Joystick.
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays the aircraft vertical speed using a non-moving
tape labeled at 500, 1000 and 2000 fpm with minor tick marks every 100 feet up to
1000 fpm. The current vertical speed is displayed using a white arrow along the tape.
Selected Altitude
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
Hazard
Avoidance
Current Vertical Speed
Indicated Altitude
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
Appendix
VERTICAL DEVIATION INDICATOR AND VNAV INDICATOR
Index
NOTE: An external navigator (i.e., SL30 Nav/Comm Transceiver and/or the
GTN or GNS Series Units) must be configured to receive glideslope and/or
glidepath vertical deviation indications.
82
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Flight
Instruments
The Vertical Deviation (Glideslope) Indicator (VDI) appears to the left of the altimeter
whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active NAV field of an external navigator.
A green diamond acts as the VDI Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional
indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope signal, “NO GS”
is annunciated.
System
Overview
GLIDESLOPE - ILS SOURCE
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Source
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical Deviation Indicator
(Glideslope-ILS Source)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
The Vertical Deviation (Glidepath) Indicator (VDI) also appears to the left of the
altimeter during a GPS approach. The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for
GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV). The
Glidepath Indicator appears on the G3X as a magenta diamond. If the approach type
downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is annunciated.
Additional
Features
GLIDEPATH - GPS SOURCE
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
83
Flight Instruments
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Vertical
Deviation
Source
CNS
Interface
EIS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNAV INDICATOR
An external navigation source is not required to receive VNAV indications. When
the VNAV profile is defined, the pilot is informed of the progress by message alerts. A
magenta chevron (VNAV Indicator) to the left of the altimeter on the Vertical Deviation
Scale shows the VNAV profile, and a magenta chevron (Required Vertical Speed
Indicator (RVSI)) on the Vertical Speed Indicator indicates the required vertical speed
to reach the target altitude. Refer to section 2.3 for more information.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Vertical Deviation Indicator
(Glidepath-GPS Source)
Index
Appendix
VNAV
Indicator
VNAV Indicator
84
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Adjusting the selected heading:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the HDG (or
HDG/ROLL if the Integrated Autopilot Interface is configured) Softkey (if
necessary). The Heading Box is highlighted.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired heading, and press the FMS
Joystick. The Selected Course is shown to the right of the HSI.
EIS
The Selected Heading is shown to the left of the HSI The light blue bug on the
compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading.
Flight
Instruments
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a
heading-up orientation at the bottom of the page. Letters indicate the cardinal points
and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks at 5˚ intervals. The current track is represented on the HSI by a magenta triangle
and dashed line. The HSI also presents course deviation, bearing, and navigation
source information.
System
Overview
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Syncing to the current heading:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the HDG (or
HDG/ROLL if the Integrated Autopilot Interface is configured) Softkey (if
necessary).
2) Press and hold the FMS Joystick. The current heading is now displayed as
the Selected Heading.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
85
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
11
10
Flight
Instruments
1
2
9
3
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
4
5
8
6
7
1
Lubber Line
7
To/From Indicator
2
Current Track Indicator
8
Aircraft Symbol
3
Course Pointer
9
Lateral Deviation Scales
4
Navigation Source
10
Selected Heading Bug
5
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
11
Course Deviation & To/From
Indicator
Additional
Features
6
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
86
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Some or all HSI annunciations may appear in the four quadrants of
the G3X HSI depending on the external navigator(s) configured (i.e., SL30
Nav/Comm Transceiver and/or the GTN or GNS Series Units).
System
Overview
HSI ANNUNCIATIONS
EIS
Flight Phase
(IFR): APR, TERM,
ENR, OCN, LNAV,
L/VNAV, LNAV+V,
or LPV
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
LOI, VFR,
REV, MSG,
or INT
VFR CDI scale
Flight Phase
VFR CDI Scales:
0.25nm, 1.25nm,
5.00nm
GPS
Navigation
OBS
Additional
Features
LOI: Loss of GPS integrity.
VFR: An external GPS source is
configured but there is not enough
guidance data for IFR use.
REV: External Navigation Source
failed. Reverted to internal VFR
GPS for navigation.
MSG: External navigation source
has a pending message
INT: The pilot has elected to
use the internal GPS navigation
source instead of the external GPS
navigation source.
Navigation
Source: GPS
or NAV (VOR,
Localizer)
CNS
Interface
‘1’ or ‘2’ will appear
after the Navigation Source if more
than one external
navigation source is
configured.
HSI Annunciations
AFCS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
87
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for
NAV (VOR, Localizer) and GPS sources as well as nearest airports. The bearing pointers
are light blue and are single-line (Bearing Pointer 1) or double-line (Bearing Pointer
2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information windows to indicate the navigation
source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the
CDI by a white ring (shown when the bearing pointers are selected but not necessarily
visible due to data unavailability).
Annun/Alerts
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also
displayed. The Bearing Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the
HSI. The following information may be displayed in the Bearing Information Windows:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
• Pointer icon (single lined or
double lined)
• GPS-derived great circle distance
to bearing source
If an external NAV radio is the bearing source and it is tuned to an ILS frequency, the
bearing source and the bearing pointer are removed from the HSI and the frequency is
replaced with “ILS”. If VLOC1 or VLOC2 is the bearing source and it is tuned to a VOR
frequency, the frequency is replaced with the station identifier. If GPS is the bearing
source, the active waypoint identifier is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the
information window if:
• The NAV radio is not receiving
the tuned VOR station
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
• Frequency (NAV)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV,
GPS)
Bearing
Pointer 1
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Bearing
Pointer 2
• GPS is the bearing source and an
active waypoint is not selected
Index
Bearing 1 Information Window
-Identifier
-Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
-Identifier
-Distance
HSI with Bearing Pointers
88
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
EIS
Additional
Features
AFCS
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
Index
89
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
The CDI is capable of displaying two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR,
localizer) depending on the external navigator(s) configured (refer to the G3X
Installation Manual for more information). Color indicates the current navigation
source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC). The full-scale limits for the CDI
are defined by a GPS-derived distance when coupled to GPS. When coupled to a VOR
or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the
CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the
crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard
Avoidance
Lateral Deviation Scale
Flight
Planning
Another Lateral Deviation Scale and combination Course Deviation and To/From
Indicator is located below the slip/skid indicator.
GPS
Navigation
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer
along a lateral deviation scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the
course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not displayed.
CNS
Interface
The HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From
Indicator, and a sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line
arrow (GPS1, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line arrow (GPS2, VOR2, and LOC2) which
points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the course
pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
Course Deviation &
To/From Indicator
Flight
Instruments
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
System
Overview
Enabling/disabling the bearing pointer and changing sources:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Bearing Pointer.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired source (dependant on the
external navigators configured), or to remove the bearing pointer and
information window, highlight ‘Off’.
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Changing the External Navigator
Changing the Navigation Source
Changing the navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC, or VLOC):
Use the associated external navigator to toggle between GPS and VOR/LOC source types.
Refer to the appropriate external navigator Pilot’s Guide (e.g., SL30 Nav/Comm Transceiver
Pilot’s Guide, or the GTN or GNS Series Pilot’s Guides) for more information. When an
external navigator is configured the internal GPS can still be used for VFR navigation.
NOTE: The G3X internal GPS flight plan is only for VFR use.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Changing the external navigator:
1) If more than one navigator is configured, press the CDI SRC Softkey to
toggle between available navigation sources.
2) Verify the external navigation source by the indication in the upper left
quadrant of the HSI and on the external navigator.
90
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
GPS
Navigator 2
Toggle the
External
Navigator
LOC
Navigator 2
Flight
Planning
LOC
Navigator 1
GPS
Navigation
Toggle the
External
Navigator
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigator 1
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
(e.g., if the external navigator
is a GNS 430, press the CDI
Key on the GNS 430 to toggle
between GPS1 and LOC1 or
GPS2 and LOC2)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
CDI Source
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
91
G-METER
Whenever the G load on the airplane goes above +2.1G or below -0.5G, the HSI is
temporally replaced with a large graphical G-meter. To remove the G-meter, press the
CLR Key. Regardless of the current G load, the HSI can be replaced with a G-meter by
changing the ‘G METER’ setting on the PFD setup page. The G-meter will be displayed
until the setting is changed to auto or the power is cycled. Small white triangles are
used to indicate the minimum and maximum recorded G loads. When in the auto
display mode, the G-meter will automatically be displayed when an unusual attitude is
sensed (i.e., greater than +/- 65° roll or +30°/-20° pitch). Refer to the G3X installation
manual for more information on configuring the G-meter.
Manually displaying the G-meter:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight G METER.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘ON (NO HSI)’.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
Hazard
Avoidance
Resetting the G-meter minimum and maximum markers:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Press the RESET G Softkey to reset the minimum and maximum recorded G
loads.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Maximum
recorded
G load
Annun/Alerts
G-meter
pointer
Appendix
Minimum
recorded
G load
Index
G-meter
92
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Track up HSI
93
Index
The Pitch attitude offset function allows the yellow aircraft symbol on the attitude
indicator to be adjusted up or down much like the aircraft on a mechanical attitude
indicator. The pitch attitude can be adjusted as much as +/- 2.5°.
Appendix
PFD PITCH ATTITUDE OFFSET
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
Aircraft
Symbol
showing
wind
correction
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Heading
Pointer
CNS
Interface
Current
Ground
Track
EIS
Changing HSI orientation:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Press the MORE Softkey.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight HSI ORIENTATION.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Heading’ or ‘Auto Trk/Hdg’.
Flight
Instruments
The HSI may be configured to provide directional information in either ‘Heading’ or
‘Auto Trk/Hdg’ “Track-up” modes. Selecting Heading Mode orients the HSI to display
aircraft heading in a conventional manner with heading shown at the top of the
compass card as indicated by the lubber line. In ‘Auto Trk/Hdg’ “Track-up” mode,
the aircraft symbol and lubber line move to indicate heading and wind correction
while ground track in shown at the top of the compass card. While in ‘Auto Trk/Hdg’
the HSI will remain heading-based when the aircraft is on the ground or when the
autopilot is in HDG mode. Refer to the G3X installation manual for more information
on configuring the HSI Orientation.
System
Overview
HSI ORIENTATION
Flight Instruments
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Changing the PFD Pitch Attitude Offset:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Press the MORE Softkey.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight PITCH OFFSET.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired setting.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Aircraft Symbol
showing pitch
offset.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Pitch Attitude
offset angle
Index
Pitch Attitude Offset
94
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Manually Switching Between Internal and External Flight
Plan Sources
CNS
Interface
Using
Internal
GPS
Flight
Plan
EIS
When manually selecting the internal GPS flight plan, ‘INT’ is displayed in light blue
in the upper left corner of the Data Bar as well as the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
Flight
Instruments
Press the INTERNAL Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page or the Direct-to Page, to
temporarily allow flight planning through the G3X using the internal GPS flight plan
when an external GPS Navigator is configured. Press the EXTERNAL Softkey to return
to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
Internal Flight Plan Indication
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
INT: The pilot
has elected to
use the internal
GPS navigation
source instead of
the external GPS
navigation source.
95
Switching between internal and external flight plan sources:
From the Active Flight Plan Page or the Direct-to Page, touch the INTERNAL
or EXTERNAL Softkey to switch between the internal and external flight
plan sources when an external GPS Navigator is configured.
Failure of the External GPS Navigation Source
If the external GPS navigation source fails, the system reverts to the internal GPS
navigation source and ‘REV’ is shown in yellow in the upper left corner of the Data Bar
as well as the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
External
GPS
Failure.
Reverted
to Internal
GPS
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
Appendix
REV:
External
Navigation
Source failed.
Reverted
to internal
VFR GPS for
navigation.
Index
External GPS Navigation Failure
96
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Three factors determine the default distance from the center of the CDI to full left
or right limits:
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: When an external GPS navigator is in use, the pilot cannot change
the CDI scale.
System
Overview
Automatic CDI Scale Selection (Internal GPS Only)
EIS
• CDI scale = 1.25 nm - within 30 nm of any airport in the active route.
• CDI scale = 0.25 nm - on an approach leg or within 2 nm of the FAF or MAP.
CNS
Interface
• CDI scale = 5.0 nm - if the previous two conditions do not exist.
GPS
Navigation
Manual CDI Scale Selection (Internal GPS Only)
Adjusting the CDI scale:
Hazard
Avoidance
The current CDI scale appears in the upper right corner of the HSI.
Flight
Planning
From the full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page, press the RNG Key down
arrow to zoom in (decrease CDI scale), or the up arrow to zoom out (increase
CDI scale).
Additional
Features
Current
CDI Scale
AFCS
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
97
Index
The G3X will automatically slew the LOC course pointer to the correct final approach
course when an ILS, LOC, BC, LDA, or SDF approach is active in the external navigator
and the appropriate CDI and navigation source are selected on the G3X.
Appendix
Auto-Slewing
Annun/Alerts
The Automatic CDI Scale Selection will resume once the default determining factor
for the current phase of flight matches the user-selected CDI scale.
Flight Instruments
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Setting up Auto-Slew:
1) With the desired approach activated in the external navigator, verify the
appropriate CDI Source is selected (i.e., GPS1 or GPS2).
2) Once inside the FAF (Final Approach Fix), the course pointer will change
from magenta to green and the course pointer will move, or slew, to the
final approach course as received from the external GPS navigator.
When flying a localizer backcourse approach, verify that the selected course matches
the published front course. The course selected can be manually changed by pressing
the LOC CRS Softkey from the PFD or PFD Page (or press XPDR/CRS > LOC CRS
(from the PFD or PFD Page) if a transponder is configured). A ‘Set APPR CRS’ message
will appear if the course selection is not within 5° of either the front or back course
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
for the selected approach.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
‘SET APPR
CRS’ Message
Auto-Slewing Message
NOTE: If the aircraft is configured with a remote transponder rudder and
aileron trim indicators are not available on the PFD. All trim gauges are
available from the ENG page.
Elevator Trim, Aileron Trim, Rudder Trim, and Flap Position indicators can be configured
from the Engine/Airframe Input Configuration Page in Configuration Mode. Refer to the
G3X Installation Manual for more information.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
TRIM AND FLAP POSITION INDICATORS (OPTIONAL)
98
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
Elevator Trim
Indicator
Flap Position
Indicator
Flight
Instruments
Aileron Trim
Indicator
Rudder Trim
Indicator
EIS
Trim and Flap Position Indicators
Additional
Features
AFCS
Turn Rate Trend
Vector
Hazard
Avoidance
Turn Rate Indicator
(Standard Rate Tick Marks)
Flight
Planning
The Turn Rate Indicator is located above the Heading Strip. Tick marks to the left and
right of the displayed heading denote standard turn rates (3 deg/sec). A magenta Turn
Rate Trend Vector shows the current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the
heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present turn rate. A standard-rate turn
is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn rate tick
mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates
greater than 4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector
and the prediction is no longer valid.
GPS
Navigation
The Heading Strip displays the Current Heading, Selected Heading Bug, Current
Heading, and Current Track Indicator. Numeric labels occur every 10˚. Major tick marks
are at 5˚ intervals and minor tick marks at 1˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current
heading appears in the center of the Heading Strip.
CNS
Interface
HEADING STRIP AND TURN RATE INDICATOR
Heading Strip
Annun/Alerts
Current Heading
Current Track
Indicator
Appendix
Selected Heading
Bug
Heading Strip/Turn Rate Indicator
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
99
OBS MODE
NOTE: If configured, the selected external GPS navigator (i.e., GTN or GNS
Series Units) is used to set the OBS Mode.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing
of waypoints in a GPS flight plan, but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the left
of the aircraft symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint
on the moving map. If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted.
When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight plan returns to normal operation with
automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS Mode. The flight
path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
Extended Course Line
OBS Mode Annunciation OBS Mode Box
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
AFCS
Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode (Split-Screen)
OBS Course
Softkey
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (without external GPS navigator):
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page press the MENU Key while navigating a
flight plan or Direct-to.
2) With ‘Set OBS and Hold’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The OBS Mode
Box is highlighted.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired course to/from the waypoint.
4) To cancel OBS Mode and return to automatic waypoint sequencing, press
the MENU Key, with ‘Release Hold’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
100
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
System
Overview
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (with external GPS navigator
configured):
1) Press the OBS Key on the external navigator. The ‘Set OBS and Hold’ Active
Flight Plan Page menu option is now available.
2) Use the OBS CRS Softkey on the G3X to select the desired course to/from
the waypoint.
Syncing to the current aircraft location (without external GPS
navigator):
1) With OBS Mode enabled, press the OBS CRS Softkey or press XPDR/CRS
> OBS CRS (if necessary).
2) Press and hold the FMS Joystick.
Outside Air Temperature
Additional
Features
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees
Celsius (°C) in the lower left of the PFD or PFD Page.
Hazard
Avoidance
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
Flight
Planning
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD or PFD Page also displays various
supplemental information, including the Outside Air Temperature (OAT), wind data,
and Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Outside Air Temperature on PFD Page (Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
101
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Changing the outside air temperature setting:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Units’ and press the ENT Key.
4)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired unit (Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C)).
5)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Wind direction/speed or headwind/Crosswind information can be displayed in a
window to the upper left of the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but
wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window displays “No Wind Data”.
Showing/hiding wind data:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Wind Vector field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Speed/Dir’ or ‘Head/X-wind’.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
WIND DATA
Headwind
and
Crosswind
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Wind
Speed and
Direction
Wind Data
ANGLE OF ATTACK (AOA)
G3X installations that include a GAP 26 and a GSU 25, Angle of Attack information
can be displayed on the PFD. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for the Angle of
Attack Calibration procedure. During Angle of Attack Calibration Stall Warning AOA,
Caution Alert AOA, Minimum Visible AOA, and Approach Target AOA are defined.
102
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Flight
Instruments
When AOA is below the calibrated Minimum Visible AOA threshold, the angle of
attack gauge is not displayed.
System
Overview
When AOA exceeds the calibrated Caution Alert threshold (AOA gauge , an
intermittent audible tone will be heard. The tone will increase in frequency until the
Stall Warning AOA, when it will play continuously.
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Angle of
Attack
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Angle of Attack (AOA)
Additional
Features
Stall Warning
AOA (Flashes)
AFCS
Caution Alert
AOA
Annun/Alerts
Approach
Target AOA
Appendix
Minimum
Visible AOA
Angle of Attack Display (AOA)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
103
2.3 VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV)
CAUTION: VNAV is only a VFR navigation aid and is not intended for instrument approaches.
The Vertical Navigation Page provides settings for the vertical navigation feature.
These settings create a three-dimensional profile from the present location and altitude
to a final (target) altitude at a specified location.
When the VNAV profile is defined, the pilot is informed of the progress by message
alerts. A magenta chevron (VNAV Indicator) to the left of the altimeter on the Vertical
Deviation Scale shows the VNAV profile, and a magenta chevron (Required Vertical
Speed Indicator (RVSI)) on the Vertical Speed Indicator indicates the required vertical
speed to reach the target altitude.
The Vertical Navigation feature is only available when navigating a Direct-to or flight
plan, and the ground speed is greater than 35 knots.
NOTE: The Vertical Navigation feature is not available when using the
VNAV autopilot in HDG mode.
One minute prior to the initial descent point the “Approaching VNAV Profile”
message appears and the ‘Estimated Time to VNAV’ (on Active Flight Plan Page) goes
blank. The descent angle locks to prevent changes in speed from altering the profile.
The VNAV feature does not take into account any changes in ground speed that occur
during the transition from level flight to descent.
At 200 ft above the target altitude, the “Approaching Target Altitude” message
appears, and the VNAV indicator disappears from the PFD.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
104
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
System
Overview
AV
VN
o
Pr
file
Flight
Instruments
Distance to Profile
Glid
eR
atio
to T
arg
et
EIS
Target Altitude
Distance to Target
Airport
CNS
Interface
Visual Representation of VNAV
Vertical Deviation Scale
Hazard
Avoidance
VNAV Indicator
Flight
Planning
Use the VNAV (Vertical Navigation) feature to ensure the aircraft is at the proper
altitude. The magenta VNAV Indicator appears on the PFD. A message appears when
approaching the VNAV Profile. When the VNAV Indicator is in the vertical center of
the Vertical Deviation Scale, the aircraft is at the proper altitude for the VNAV Profile.
GPS
Navigation
USING THE VNAV FEATURE
Additional
Features
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
VNAV Indications (PFD)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
105
Flight Instruments
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Configuring a VNAV profile:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Vertical Navigation Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Enter the desired profile into the fields, and press the EXIT Softkey.
Vertical Navigation Page (Split-Screen)
Hazard
Avoidance
• Waypoint—Enter any waypoint along the currently active route as the
reference waypoint. The reference waypoint defines the target location.
Additional
Features
• Profile—Enter the descent rate.
• Altitude—Enter the desired reference waypoint altitude. Select ‘Above
AFCS
Waypoint’ to use field elevation for airports in the navigation database or
‘MSL’ to specify an exact MSL altitude target.
• By—Enter the target location with settings of distance ‘Before’ or ‘After’ a
Annun/Alerts
reference waypoint. To set a target location at a reference waypoint, enter a
distance of zero.
• VNAV Messages—Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ to enable/disable VNAV alert messages.
Index
Appendix
Enabling/disabling the VNAV indicator:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
106
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Instruments
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the VNAV Indicator field.
3)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
System
Overview
2)
Flight
Instruments
Forcing capture of the VNAV profile:
1) Enter a valid VNAV profile and begin navigation.
2) Press the FPL Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the Vertical Navigation Page.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Capture VNAV Profile’ and
press the ENT Key. Selecting ‘Capture VNAV Profile’ centers the VNAV
indicator (must be navigating a Flight Plan or Direct-to).
Or:
1) Enter a valid VNAV profile and begin navigation.
2) From the VNAV Page, press (select) the CAPTURE Softkey.
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Canceling the VNAV profile:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the Vertical Navigation Page.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Cancel VNAV Capture’ and
press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Enter a valid VNAV profile and begin navigation.
2) From the VNAV Page, press (deselect) the CAPTURE Softkey.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
VNAV PAIRED WITH GTN
107
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Vertical Navigation may also be used on the G3X in concert with a GTN (when
equipped). With the G3X and GTN combination, the VNAV flight director mode is
designed to be used with vertical guidance for a descent from cruise into an approach
or on an arrival. The G3X flight director will typically be in ALT mode prior to intercepting
the glideslope or glidepath. You may arm APPR any time after you have captured your
last VNAV descent leg, if you are unsure of the timing of the last VNAV descent, you
can always arm GP or GS mode after you cross the waypoint prior to the FAF.
The GTN’s VNAV guidance will end prior to the FAF waypoint. Typically, this will
result in the flight director capturing the final VNAV target altitude, with the aircraft in
a position to subsequently intercept the glidepath. GP mode should be armed prior to
intercepting the glidepath. Flight director GPS mode must be active before VNAV mode
can be activated. If another lateral mode such as HDG is active, VNAV mode will not
be available. VNAV will descend away from the altitude preselector if you are in ALT
mode and have VNAV armed.
An altitude constraint in the GTN flight plan is necessary to utilize GTN VNAV.
Altitude constraints are set and changed only on the GTN by pressing the altitude
constraint field next to the waypoint on the flight plan page. This can be verified by
looking at the map on the GTN and see the TOD (Top of Descent) indicated on the map.
As you approach this point, the magenta arrow on the vertical deviation indicator on
the PFD will start to come down and the VNAV altitude constraint should be displayed.
As you reach TOD, the magenta arrow will center up on the vertical deviation indicator.
Refer to the GTN Pilot’s Guide for more information.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Instruments
108
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
System
Overview
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
5
7
6
Flight
Planning
4
GPS
Navigation
1
CNS
Interface
The G3X Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, and other
system parameters on the top portion of the display (split-screen and/or full-screen
MFD). Additional EIS information can be viewed by selecting the ENG Page.
EIS
NOTE: The display of the G3X Engine Indication System depends upon the
current configuration and may vary from the examples discussed in this section.
Flight
Instruments
3.1 EIS DISPLAY & ENG PAGE
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Engine Instrument Display
(Split-Screen)
Fuel Quantity
Indicator
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
109
Index
If the Engine Page information configured exceeds one page, additional engine
gauges may be distributed among the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd softkeys as required.
Appendix
Engine Instrument Display on Full-Screen MFD (Except ENG Page)
Carburetor
Temperature
Indicator
Annun/Alerts
Fuel Flow
Indicator
(GPH)
AFCS
Exhaust Gas
Temperature
Indicator
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
10
EIS
9
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
8
Flight
Planning
Example Engine (ENG) Page Configuration - TEMPS Softkey
Selected (Split-Screen)
13
14
15
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
12
16
Appendix
11
Index
Example Engine (ENG) Page Configuration- AUX Softkey
Selected (Split-Screen)
110
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
2
24
Percent Power
Displays engine power as a percentage
3
25
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm)
4
26
Oil Pressure Indicator
Displays oil pressure
9
22
Cylinder Head
Temperature Indicator
Displays the head temperature of the
hottest cylinder
6
19
Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays the fuel quantity
7
27
Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature
8
21
Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator
EIS
Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure to indicate
engine power
GPS
Navigation
Engine Hours (Tach) (ENG Counted whenever a valid RPM is
HOURS)
detected. Refer to G3X Installation
Manual for more information.
12 20
Fuel Flow Indicator
Displays fuel flow.
13 18
Fuel Pressure Indicator
Displays fuel pressure
14 29
Voltmeter
Displays the main bus voltage
15 30
Ammeter
Displays the battery load in amperes
16 31
Total Hours (HOURS)
Refer to G3X Installation Manual for
more information.
Hazard
Avoidance
11 17
Displays carburetor temperature;
the yellow range indicates where
carburetor icing is most likely to occur
Flight
Planning
Carburetor Temperature
Indicator
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Index
111
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
CNS
Interface
10 28
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Instruments
23
System
Overview
5
1
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
24
25
26
27
23
EIS
28
CNS
Interface
22
GPS
Navigation
21
29
30
Flight
Planning
20
Hazard
Avoidance
19
Additional
Features
18
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Example Engine (ENG) Page Configuration
(Full-Screen MFD)
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red
bands indicate caution and warning, respectively. When unsafe operating conditions
occur, the corresponding caution readout will display solid yellow and the warning
readout will flash red. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable,
a red “X” is displayed across the instrument.
Index
Appendix
31
17
112
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
(optional) (optional)
XXXX
(optional) (optional)
XXXX
LEAN
FUEL
CNS
Interface
XXXX
EIS
If the Engine Page information configured exceeds one page, additional engine
gauges may be distributed among the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd softkeys as required.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The Engine (ENG) Page softkeys displayed are dependant on the
configuration. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for information on
configuring the Engine Page.
System
Overview
ENG PAGE SOFTKEYS (EXAMPLE CONFIGURATION)
AUX, AUX1, AUX2, ELEC,
TRIM, TEMPS
LEAN
Displays additional engine gauges as required
(optional)
Activates/deactivates Lean Assist (optional)
FUEL
Displays Fuel Calculator (optional)
Flight
Planning
Displays engine gauges as required (optional)
GPS
Navigation
MAIN, TEMPS
Hazard
Avoidance
3.2 LEAN ASSIST MODE (OPTIONAL)
Appendix
From the ENG Page, press the LEAN Softkey. As the mixture is leaned, one of
the cylinders’ exhaust temperature will peak. Continuing to lean the mixture
will cause each additional cylinder to peak (if applicable) until the last of the
cylinders peaks. To cancel Lean Assist Mode, press the LEAN Softkey again.
Annun/Alerts
Using Lean Assist Mode:
AFCS
A LEAN Softkey is displayed on the ENG Page if Lean Assist Mode is enabled and
at least one Exhaust Gas Temperature (EGT) or Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) input is
configured (refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information).
Additional
Features
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended
leaning procedures as described in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH).
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
113
When the LEAN Softkey is selected, the Lean Assist Mode waits for a cylinder’s EGT
to reach a peak temperature and decrease by at least 7°F. The peak EGT for each
cylinder is displayed as a small grey number above each bar on the graph. To prevent
detection of false peaks, the system waits for a cylinder’s EGT to increase by at least
15°F before detecting a peak. In addition, if the cylinder temperature rises above a
previously detected peak by more than 100°F, the previous peak is considered false.
A cylinder temperature bar graph appears if CHT/EGT data is configured on 4 or
more cylinders. A readout showing the temperature deviation from peak (DEGT) is
displayed in place of the normal EGT temperature number. The temperature deviation
of the first cylinder to peak is highlighted light blue. A light blue outline appears
around the temperature deviation of the last cylinder to peak. A light blue hollow box
appears above the cylinder’s bar to represent the peak EGT for that cylinder.
Cylinder Peak
Temperature
CHT
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
EIS
Indicates Difference Between Present
and Peak Temperature
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
1st
Cylinder
to Peak
Leaning to First Peak (ENG Page - Full-Screen MFD)
Index
Appendix
NOTE: A ‘+’ (∆EGT) value indicates that the current temperature is greater
than the previously detected peak.
114
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Fuel Flow
Corresponding
to Peak EGT
EIS
CNS
Interface
Last
Cylinder
to Peak
Leaning to Last Peak (ENG Page - Full-Screen MFD)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Difference
Between
Present
and Peak
Temperature
Cylinder Peak
Temperature
Appendix
Cylinder with the
Temperature Closest to
Its Peak Value
Flight
Planning
The EIS Display (see section 3.1) and the split-screen ENG Page will display the
cylinder whose temperature is currently closest to its own peak value (when Lean Assist
Mode is active) as a white pointer with the cylinder number. The peak temperature is
depicted by a hollow blue pointer, and the temperature deviation from peak (DEGT or
DTIT) is displayed in place of the normal temperature number in light blue text.
GPS
Navigation
If a fuel flow sensor is configured, the fuel flow value detected as the first cylinder
peaks is saved (see above). The fuel flow corresponding to peak EGT is drawn on the
fuel flow gauge as a hollow blue pointer. This can be used to determine if you are on
the rich side of peak (ROP) or the lean side of peak (LOP). Rich of Peak (ROP) if the fuel
flow pointer is above the blue triangle, or Lean of Peak (LOP) if the fuel flow pointer is
below the blue triangle.
Engine Instrument Display
(Split-Screen)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
115
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Difference
Between
Present and
Peak Temperature
Cylinder Peak
Temperature
Lean Assist Mode - ENG Page
(Split-Screen)
If Turbine Inlet Temperature (TIT) inputs are configured, the first and last TIT to peak
are not identified.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
1st Cylinder to
Peak
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Lean Assist Mode - Turbine Inlet Temperature (ENG Page)
116
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
Flight
Instruments
WARNING: The G3X Fuel Calculator and/or Fuel Range Rings are NOT
intended to be relied upon as the primary fuel indicator(s), and does not
relieve the pilot from the responsibility of proper flight planning. G3X fuel
calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated
from the last time the fuel was reset.
System
Overview
3.3 FUEL CALCULATOR (OPTIONAL)
EIS
Flight
Planning
Adjusting the Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used quantity:
1) From the ENG Page, press the FUEL Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to the Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used Field (if
necessary).
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to adjust the desired quantity.
Hazard
Avoidance
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Resetting Fuel Remaining to partial fuel quantities (optional):
1) From the ENG Page, press the FUEL Softkey.
2) Press Softkey #3 or #4 (XX GAL); this resets fuel remaining to a partial
tank quantity (i.e., filler neck tab). XX is the airframe specific partial fuel
quantity (if configured).
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
Resetting Fuel Remaining only:
1) From the ENG Page, press the FUEL Softkey.
2) Press Softkey #2 (XX GAL); this resets only Fuel Remaining to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft. XX is the airframe specific full fuel
quantity.
Additional
Features
Resetting the Fuel Used to zero and Fuel Remaining to full tanks:
1) From the ENG Page, press the FUEL Softkey.
2) Press the RESET Softkey; this resets Fuel Used to zero and Fuel Remaining
to the maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Refer to the Section 5.2, Using Map Displays, for information on displaying fuel
range rings on the Navigation Map.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: An optional Fuel Flow Sensor must be configured for the FUEL Softkey
to appear on the ENG Page. Refer to the Installation Manual for more information.
117
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
EIS
Fuel Calculator (Split-Screen)
Fuel Calculator (Full-Screen MFD)
118
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
System
Overview
FUEL CALCULATOR SOFTKEYS
(optional)
Flight
Instruments
FUEL
EIS
RESET
XX GAL
(optional)
(optional)
XX GAL
XX GAL
FUEL
CNS
Interface
XX GAL
Additional
Features
FUEL
Hazard
Avoidance
XX GAL
Flight
Planning
XX GAL
Resets fuel used to zero and fuel remaining to full
tanks
Sets fuel remaining to the full tank quantity where XX
is the airframe specific full fuel quantity
Sets fuel remaining to a partial tank quantity (i.e., filler
neck tab) where XX is an airframe specific partial
fuel quantity (optional)
Sets fuel remaining to a partial tank quantity (i.e., filler
neck tab) where XX is an airframe specific partial
fuel quantity (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
GPS
Navigation
RESET
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: Fuel Used values can be configured to automatically reset in Config
Mode. This automatic reset can happen on first engine start or takeoff, after
the G3X system has been unpowered and powered on again. Refer to the
G3X Installation Manual for more information.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
119
CONFIRMING FUEL QUANTITY
When the system detects that fuel has been added, a ‘Confirm Fuel Quantity’
Reminder Page appears when the system is powered on.
CONFIRM FUEL QUANTITY SOFTKEYS
RESET
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
EIS
GPS
Navigation
RESET
XX GAL
Flight
Planning
XX GAL
XX GAL
DONE
Resets fuel used to zero and fuel remaining to full
tanks
Sets fuel remaining to the full tank quantity where XX
is the airframe specific full fuel quantity
Sets fuel remaining to a partial tank quantity (i.e., filler
neck tab) where XX is an airframe specific partial
fuel quantity (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
DONE
XX GAL
‘Confirm Fuel Quantity’ Reminder Page
120
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
System
Overview
Adjusting the Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used quantity:
1) Move the FMS Joystick to the Fuel Remaining or Fuel Used Field (if
necessary).
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to adjust the desired quantity.
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Resetting Fuel Remaining to partial fuel quantities (optional):
Press Softkey #3 or #4 (XX GAL); this resets fuel remaining to a partial
tank quantity (i.e., filler neck tab). XX is the airframe specific partial fuel
quantity (if configured).
EIS
Resetting Fuel Remaining only:
Press Softkey #2 (XX GAL); this resets only Fuel Remaining to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft. XX is the airframe specific full fuel
quantity.
Flight
Instruments
Resetting the Fuel Used to zero and Fuel Remaining to full tanks:
Press the RESET Softkey; this resets Fuel Used to zero and Fuel Remaining
to the maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft
Flight
Planning
3.4 CAS MESSAGES (OPTIONAL)
Appendix
• ADVISORY (white): Provides general information.
Annun/Alerts
• CAUTION (yellow): Requires pilot awareness and possible future corrective
action.
AFCS
• WARNING (red): Requires immediate attention. Warning messages will flash
until acknowledged by pressing the ENT Key.
Additional
Features
CAS Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory). The color of
the message is based on its urgency and on required action:
Hazard
Avoidance
The CAS messages displayed depend upon the current configuration, and will
vary from the examples listed below. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more
information on configuring CAS messages (if applicable).
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
121
Warning annunciation text is shown in red in the CAS Annunciation Window on
the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page (dependent on number of CAS
messages configured). The CAS Annunciation Window is located to the right of the
Horizontal Situation Indicator.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
EIS
Important CAS Messages may not be visible at all times (e.g., the split-screen PFD
Page is not displayed, or FPL/NRST Pages are displayed on the full-screen PFD). In
that case a Check Alerts Triangle is displayed to the right of the Airspeed Indicator as
a reminder to check the CAS Messages.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
CAS Warning Example
Index
Appendix
CAS Warning Example (Check Alerts Triangle)
122
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
System
Overview
If less than four CAS Messages are configured for the system, the CAS Messages
are displayed to the right of the Airspeed Indicator and the Check Alerts Triangle is not
displayed.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
CAS Warning Example
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
123
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
EIS
Blank Page
124
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS Interface
System
Overview
SECTION 4 CNS INTERFACE
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information on the G3X
optional communication interfaces.
• Waypoint Page
• Nearest FSS Page
• Nearest Airports Page
• Nearest Airspace Page
GPS
Navigation
• Nearest ARTCC Page
CNS
Interface
• Weather Page
EIS
Frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Map Page
• Nearest Airport Weather Page
Flight
Instruments
4.1 AUTO-TUNING FREQUENCIES (OPTIONAL)
Flight
Planning
Auto-tuning a frequency from the Nearest Pages:
1) Press the NRST Key to display the Nearest Pages.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest (Airports, Airport Weather,
ARTCC, FSS, or Airspace) Page.
3) From the Nearest ARTCC or Nearest FSS, move the FMS Joystick to
highlight the desired frequency.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Nearest ARTCC (Split-Screen)
Nearest FSS (Split-Screen)
Appendix
Or:
a) From the Nearest Airport Weather Page, highlight the desired airport
weather, and press the ENT Key.
c) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired frequency.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
125
Index
b) With the Weather Information Page displayed, press the INFO Softkey.
CNS Interface
System
Overview
Or:
a) From the Nearest Airspace Page, highlight the desired airspace, and
press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
b) Press the FREQS Softkey.
c) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired frequency.
Or:
EIS
a) From the Nearest Airport Page, highlight the desired airport and press
the ENT Key. The Airport Information Page is displayed.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
b) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired frequency.
Hazard
Avoidance
Airport Information Page (Split-Screen)
Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the standby field of the SL40.
If the frequency has an * (additional information available) next to it, press
the ENT Key a second time with ‘Tune’ highlighted.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
4)
Index
Frequency with Additional Information
(Split-Screen)
126
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS Interface
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Auto-tuning a frequency from the Waypoint Page:
1) From the Waypoint Page, enter the desired waypoint using the FMS
Joystick.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired frequency.
3) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the standby field of the SL40.
If the frequency has an * (additional information available) next to it, press
the ENT Key a second time with ‘Tune’ highlighted.
System
Overview
Auto-tuning a frequency from the Map Page and Weather Page:
1) Press the FMS Joystick on the Map Page (or PAN MAP Softkey on the
Weather (WX) Page) to display the Map Pointer.
2) Place the Map Pointer on a map feature (airport, METAR Flag, etc). If
multiple map features are present at the Map Pointer position (green arrow
in the information box), turn the FMS Joystick to cycle through the list.
3) Press the ENT Key to display the review page for the highlighted feature.
4) If necessary, press the INFO Softkey to access the Airport Information Page.
5) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired frequency.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the frequency into the standby field of the SL40.
If the frequency has an * (additional information available) next to it, press
the ENT Key a second time with ‘Tune’ highlighted.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
127
4.2 REMOTE TRANSPONDER INTERFACE
(OPTIONAL)
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
CNS Interface
NOTE: If the aircraft is configured with a remote transponder rudder and
aileron trim indicators are not available on the PFD. All trim gauges are
available from the ENG page.
The G3X is capable of interfacing with several remote transponders providing
Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select
(Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft
and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting - The Mode S Transponder reports
identification as either the aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
Hazard
Avoidance
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
• Airborne status determination
Additional
Features
• Altitude Reporting
• Transponder capability reporting
• Acquisition squitter - Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder
24 bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless
of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of the acquisition squitter is to
enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance
System (TAS) to recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective
interrogation.
When configured the transponder interface is displayed on three levels of softkeys
on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR
Softkey is pressed, the associated transponder softkeys appear: IDENT, CODE, and
MODE.
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the pilot can enter the desired code using the
FMS Joystick.
128
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS Interface
Transponder
Code
Mode
Reply
Status
System
Overview
Pressing the IDENT Softkey initiates the ident function and reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Transponder Data Box (Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
XPDR/CRS
GPS
Navigation
XPDR
or
CNS
Interface
With a remote transponder configured, the #2 PFD Softkey becomes XPDR (if
a navigation source is not selected) or XPDR/CRS (when the pilot can control the
navigation course).
Hazard
Avoidance
OBS CRS
or
Additional
Features
VOR CRS
or
LOC CRS
or
CRS
CODE
MODE
BACK
STBY / GND
ON
ALT
SET ID
BACK
CODE
VFR
BACK
AFCS
IDENT
or
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
129
Index
CRS (subdued)
Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC).
A navigation source is not selected
Appendix
IDENT
Annun/Alerts
IDENT
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
CNS Interface
OBS CRS
Allows the pilot to adjust the OBS course
or
VOR CRS
Allows the pilot to adjust the VOR course
or
LOC CRS
Allows the pilot to adjust the localizer course
MODE
Allows the pilot to enter the transponder code and
displays the second-level CODE softkeys
Displays second-level MODE softkeys
BACK
Returns to top-level softkeys
CNS
Interface
EIS
CODE
CODE Softkey selected
GPS
Navigation
IDENT
CODE
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
VFR
BACK or DONE
Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC).
Returns to top-level softkeys
The pre-programmed VFR code is automatically
displayed in the code field of the Transponder Data
Box. Pressing the VFR softkey again restores the
previous identification code.
Returns to top-level softkeys
Additional
Features
MODE Softkey selected
AFCS
STBY
Annun/Alerts
ON
Appendix
ALT
Index
SET ID
BACK
130
Selects the standby mode. When in standby mode, the
remote transponder will not reply to any interrogations.
Press and hold to put the transponder in Ground
(GND) Mode. Ground Mode is normally selected
automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
Generates Mode A and Mode S replies, but Mode C
altitude reporting is inhibited.
Selects ALT Mode. All transponder replies requesting
altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
Allows the pilot to set the Flight ID. (The Flight ID must
be configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ for the SET ID softkey
to be displayed).
Returns to previous level softkeys
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS Interface
Additional
Features
Index
131
Appendix
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode
generates Mode A and Mode S replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In
ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box.
Annun/Alerts
MANUAL ON MODE
AFCS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby,
the transponder does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When
Standby Mode is selected, a white STBY indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Hazard
Avoidance
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Planning
Deselect (press) the GND Softkey to return to Standby Mode.
GPS
Navigation
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground.
The transponder powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. To manually
select Ground Mode, press and hold the STBY Softkey. A green GND indication and
transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box and the STBY
Softkey becomes the GND Softkey. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow
Mode A and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to
discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
CNS
Interface
GROUND MODE
EIS
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the XPDR
Softkey.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
3) Press the desired mode softkey (STBY / GND, ON, or ALT). Pressing and
holding the STBY Softkey activates Ground (GND) Mode and the STBY
Softkey becomes the GND Softkey.
Flight
Instruments
The transponder mode will automatically switch between GND Mode and ALT Mode.
The mode can also be manually set using the softkeys.
System
Overview
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude
Mode may also be selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear
in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting
altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information.
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears
momentarily in the Transponder Data Box.
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page, press the XPDR
Softkey.
2) Press the CODE Softkey. A Transponder Code Box appears with the cursor
on the first digit in the code.
3) Enter the desired code using the FMS Joystick and press the ENT Key.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
CNS Interface
Transponder
Code Entry
CODE
Softkey
Index
Appendix
Transponder Code Entry (Split-Screen PFD Page)
132
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS Interface
EIS
IDENT FUNCTION
Flight
Instruments
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey,
the CODE Softkey, then the VFR Softkey. When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the preprogrammed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field of the Transponder
Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
System
Overview
VFR CODE
Flight
Planning
When configured with an ADS-B Out capable transponder, ‘NO ADSB’ is displayed
in yellow, in the Transponder Data Box, if the ADS-B Out broadcast has been manually
disabled or if the transponder does not have the required GPS data.
GPS
Navigation
ADS-B OUT
CNS
Interface
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control
(ATC). The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on
the air traffic controller’s screen. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a white IDENT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of
18 seconds.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Transponder is
not broadcasting
ADS-B Out data
Annun/Alerts
NO ADS-B (Split-Screen PFD Page)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
133
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: The Flight ID must be configured to ‘Set By Pilot’ in Configuration Mode
for the SET ID Softkey to appear. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for
more information.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
CNS Interface
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Entering a Flight ID:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the XPDR
Softkey.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
3) Press the SET ID Softkey. The ‘SET FLIGHT ID’ Window appears.
4) Enter the desired Flight ID using the FMS Joystick and press the ENT Key.
Flight ID
Entry
Flight ID Entry (Split-Screen PFD Page)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Transponder
134
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
SECTION 5 GPS NAVIGATION
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
NOTE: The compass arc is not available in ‘North Up’ map orientation.
AFCS
A compass arc representing the aircraft’s ground track, appears by default on the
Map Page. The route line represents the course.
Annun/Alerts
Compass Arc
Appendix
Route Line
Index
Compass Arc (Map Page)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Planning
COMPASS ARC
GPS
Navigation
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Pages, and the Nearest Airports Pages can be
displayed by pressing the corresponding hardkeys.
CNS
Interface
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding
to the calculated present position. The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are
accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which these are placed are
from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map
features is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as
a magenta line on the navigation map. The other legs are shown in white.
EIS
The Map Page displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces),
geographic data (e.g., cities, lakes, highways, borders), and topographic data (map
shading indicating elevation) to be used for situational awareness only. The Navigation
Map can be oriented three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP) or
Desired Track Up (DTK UP).
Flight
Instruments
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
135
GPS Navigation
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Removing the Compass Arc from the Map Page:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘General’ Menu.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Compass Arc’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access the ‘On/Off’ drop down list.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
6)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
WARNING: The G3X map displays are to be used for situational awareness
only.
Map displays are used extensively in the G3X to provide situational awareness in
flight. Most G3X maps can display the following information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers,
borders, etc.) with names
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to pointer, location of pointer,
name, and other pertinent information)
• Map range
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise
noted:
• All Map Pages (MAP)
• Waypoint Page (WPT)
- Split-Screen: The Waypoint Page when the RUNWAY Softkey is pressed.
136
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
- Full-Screen: The Waypoint Page when the INFO Softkey is pressed.
• All Nearest Pages (NRST) (Full-Screen)
Flight
Instruments
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL) (Full-Screen)
• Direct-to Window (Full-Screen)
MAP PAGE SETUP
EIS
MAP ORIENTATION
• Desired Track (DTK) Up aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘General’ Menu.
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Orientation’ field.
b) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of available options.
c) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘North Up’, ‘Track Up’, or
‘DTK Up’, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘North Up Above’ field.
b) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of available range options.
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Map Page. Any other
pages that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Map
Page.
Flight
Planning
• Track Up aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
GPS
Navigation
• North Up aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
CNS
Interface
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility
in determining aircraft position relative to other items on the map (North Up) or for
determining where map items are relative to where the aircraft is going (Track Up), or
desired track up (DTK UP).
137
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
c) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired range above
which to display North Up orientation.
Or:
Flight
Instruments
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘North Up On GRND’ field.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
b) Using the FMS Joystick highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
When ‘North Up On GRND’ is ‘ON’ (default), the map orientation will
change to North Up when the aircraft is on the ground.
General Menu (Map Setup Page)
AIRPORTS & NAVAIDS
Airport and NAVAID information can be customized to display a variety of information
including: runway extension lines, runway numbers and visual reporting points (VRP). Runway
extension lines show runway orientation relative to other landmarks and terrain features and
are intended to aid in planning traffic pattern entry and/or departure routing.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Map Page Menu
Runway
Extension
line
Index
Appendix
Runway
Number
Runway Extensions and Numbers (Map Page)
138
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Setting up and customizing airports and NAVAIDs for the map
page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Airport’ or ‘NAVAID’ Category from the
horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired feature.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each feature (On/Off,
Auto, range settings, text size, etc).
6) Using the FMS Joystick select the desired option and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Map Setup Page (Airport Category)
Map Setup Page (NAVAID Category)
CITIES & ROADS
AFCS
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Setting up and customizing cities and roads for the map page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘City’ or ‘Road’ Category from the
horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired feature.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each feature (On/Off,
Auto, range settings, or text size).
6) Using the FMS Joystick select the desired option and press the ENT Key.
139
GPS Navigation
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
7)
CNS
Interface
Map Setup Page (City Category)
Map Setup Page (Road Category)
GPS
Navigation
AIRSPACE
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Setting up and customizing airspace for the map page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Airspace’ or ‘SUA’ (Special Use
Airspace) Category from the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired feature.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each feature (On/Off,
Auto, range settings, All (Atlantic), or Below (Atlantic)).
6) Using the FMS Joystick select the desired option and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
Map Setup Page (Airspace Category)
140
Map Setup Page (Airspace Category - Atlantic)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
GPS
Navigation
Scale Bar Representing a Map
Scale of 3 nm Per
Scale Width.
Flight
Planning
Map Range/Overzoom
(Split-Screen)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
Enabling/disabling Auto Zoom:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘General’ Menu.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Autozoom’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access the ‘On/Off’ drop down list.
6) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired option, and press
the ENT Key.
Additional
Features
Auto Zoom allows the G3X to change the map display range to the smallest range
clearly showing the active waypoint. Auto Zoom can be overridden by adjusting the
range and remains that way until the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert
occurs, or the aircraft takes off.
Hazard
Avoidance
AUTO ZOOM
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS
Interface
When the selected range exceeds the resolution of the map data, ‘overzoom’
appears below the map range scale.
EIS
There are 23 different map ranges available, from 200 feet to 800 nm. The current
range is indicated in the lower right corner of the map. The scale bar represents the
map scale. To change the map range on any map, use the down arrow on the RNG
Key to zoom in (decreasing), or the up arrow to zoom out (increasing).
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Refer to the Additional Features section for information on changing
the FliteCharts® or ChartView range.
System
Overview
MAP RANGE
141
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map
range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• View airspace and airway information
When the panning function is selected by pressing the FMS Joystick (PAN MAP
Softkey on the Weather Page) the Map Pointer flashes on the map display. A window
also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of
the pointer, the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position,
the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer, or the object’s (airports,
obstacles, etc) elevation, if known.
When the Map Pointer is placed on a map feature, the map feature is highlighted
and an information box appears (even if the name was not originally displayed on the
map).
Pressing the ENT Key displays a review page for the highlighted map feature. If
multiple features are present at the Map Pointer position, a green arrow will appear
in the information box. Turning the FMS Joystick will cycle through the list of map
features present at that position.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
142
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Bearing and Distance
to the Pointer from
the Aircraft’s Present
Position
Elevation and ETE
to the Pointer
Flight
Instruments
Latitude/
Longitude
Position of
the Pointer
Pointer Location
(Name)
Map Pointer
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Reviewing information for a map feature:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a map feature. If multiple map features are
present at the Map Pointer position (green arrow in the information box),
turn the FMS Joystick to cycle through the list.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the review page for the highlighted feature.
3) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the review
page and return to the Map Page showing the selected waypoint.
Flight
Planning
Panning the map:
1) Press the FMS Joystick (or PAN MAP Softkey on the Weather (WX) Page)
to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and re-center the map
on the aircraft’s current position.
GPS
Navigation
Map Panning (Map Page)
CNS
Interface
Information Box
EIS
Green Arrow
Indicating
Multiple
Features are
Present at the
Map Pointer
Location.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
143
FUEL RANGE RING
WARNING: The G3X Fuel Calculator and/or Fuel Range Rings are NOT
intended to be relied upon as the primary fuel indicator(s), and does not
relieve the pilot from the responsibility of proper flight planning. G3X fuel
calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated
from the last time the fuel was reset.
The Navigation Map can display fuel range rings which show the remaining flight
distance. If current fuel endurance is greater than reserve, range-to-empty is shown as
a solid green circle and range-to-reserve is a dashed green circle. If current endurance
is less than reserve, range-to-empty is shown as a solid yellow circle. Fuel range
rings are offset to show the effects of the wind at the current location (e.g., does not
account for wind variations throughout the range).
Displaying/removing the fuel range rings and selecting a fuel
reserve time:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Fuel Range (RSV)’ field.
5) Using the FMS Joystick select (On/Off) or set the fuel reserve time and press
the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Range to
Reserve
Range to
Empty
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Fuel Reserve
Time
Map Menu (Map Setup Page)
144
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Navigation Map
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
The Glide Range Ring is displayed as a cyan ring around the estimated area that can
be reached by the aircraft in the best glide range configuration. The Glide Range Ring
fades into view on the map as the aircraft climbs through 500 feet AGL. The range is
based on the Best Glide Speed (VG) and Sink Rate (at VG) entered by the pilot. Best
Glide and Sink Rate are combined with the aircraft’s height (AGL), wind, and bank
angle to determine the distance the aircraft can travel.
EIS
NOTE: Many factors, such as winds at various altitudes, terrain, and even
pilot actions affect the ability to accurately estimate the gliding range of an
aircraft. The displayed Glide Range Ring should not be considered a replacement for in-flight emergency pilot training.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: In order for the Glide Range Ring to display on the map, Best Glide
Speed (VG) and Sink Rate (at VG) must be configured on the Aircraft Configuration Page in Configuration Mode. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for
more information.
System
Overview
GLIDE RANGE RING
Glide Range Ring
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Navigation Map - Glide Range Ring
(Ideal Descent Profile - No Wind)
Navigation Map - Glide Range Ring
(Ideal Descent Profile - Wind 245˚ at 25 kts)
Appendix
When the aircraft is not being flown in an ideal best glide descent, the range of the
cyan circle decreases and arrows are displayed depicting how far the aircraft is from
an ideal descent profile.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
145
GPS Navigation
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Glide Range Ring
CNS
Interface
Navigation Map - Glide Range Ring
(NOT Ideal Descent)
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Enabling/disabling the Glide Range Ring:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Glide Range’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select (On/Off) and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
Index
Map Setup Page
146
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
The airport must be within glide range as determined by the following:
GPS
Navigation
1)
CNS
Interface
The Best Airport Bearing Pointer points to the airport within the Glide Range Ring
that is considered the best option for a landing based on the following criteria:
EIS
NOTE: Many factors such as winds at various altitudes, terrain, and even
pilot actions affect the ability to accurately estimate the gliding range of an
aircraft. The displayed Glide Range Ring should not be considered a replacement for normal pilot training to deal with in-flight emergencies.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: In order to display the Best Airport Bearing Pointer, Best Glide Speed
and Sink Rate (at VG) must be configured on the Aircraft Configuration Page
in Configuration Mode. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information.
System
Overview
BEST AIRPORT BEARING POINTER
a) User entered glide performance (Sink Rate and Best Glide Speed).
Flight
Planning
b) Aircraft altitude and direction of flight.
c) Airport elevation.
3)
Hard surface runways (i.e., paved runways take precedence over grass
runways).
4)
Runway lengths.
5)
Runway alignment with the wind (if known).
AFCS
The expected flyover altitude (i.e., airports with 1000’ or greater margin
take precedence).
Additional
Features
2)
Hazard
Avoidance
d) Wind velocity.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Enabling/disabling the Best Airport Bearing Pointer:
1) From the full screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired Bearing Pointer.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Best Airport’.
4) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
PFD with the changed settings.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
147
GPS Navigation
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Best Airport
Bearing
Pointer
PFD Options
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Bearing
Pointer 2 Bearing Pointer 1
(Best Airport) (Nearest Airport)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Bearing 1 Information Window
-Identifier
-Bearing Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
-Identifier
-Distance
HSI with Bearing Pointers
BEST AIRPORT LINE
The Best Airport Line points the same airport that the Best Airport Bearing Pointer
points to, but available on MFD instead of the HSI. The line appears as a series of cyan
chevrons between the aircraft marker and the recommended glide-to airport.
148
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Displaying/removing the Best Airport Line:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Line’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Best Airport Line’ field.
5) Using the FMS Joystick select (On/Off) and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
Glide
Range
Ring
GPS
Navigation
Best
Airport
Line
Selected
Altitude
Intercept
Arc
Flight
Planning
Navigation Map
Navigation Map
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Sel Alt Arc’ field.
5) Using the FMS Joystick select (On/Off) and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
Additional
Features
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will
intercept the selected altitude. The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the
aircraft is climbing or descending.
Hazard
Avoidance
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
149
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable
navigation map may be calculated using the ‘Measure Distance’ selection from Map
Page menu. The distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Map Pointer
to aid in graphically identifying points to measure. Lat/Long, bearing, distance, and
elevation data for the Map Pointer is provided in a window at the top of the Map Page.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Measure Distance’ and press
the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s
present position.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired
location. The bearing and distance are displayed at the top of the map.
Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT
Key changes the starting point for measuring.
4) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the FMS Joystick; or
select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page Menu and press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Measurement Line
Map Page Menu
Map Pointer
Map Page (Measure Distance)
TOPOGRAPHY
Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Reference Point
150
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Displaying/removing topographic data:
1) Press the MAP Softkey on the Map Page. Press the VFR MAP Softkey (if
necessary).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey. Topographic data is displayed.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the
Navigation Map.
Or:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Topo Shading’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
TOPO Softkey
VFR MAP Softkey
AFCS
Topographic Data (Map Page)
(Split-Screen)
Annun/Alerts
SATELLITE VIEW
The Satellite View displays satellite imagery above 20nm.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
151
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Displaying/removing satellite imagery on the map page:
1) Press the MAP Softkey on the Map Page. Press the VFR MAP Softkey (if
necessary).
2) Press the SAT VIEW Softkey. Satellite imagery is displayed on the map.
3) Press the SAT VIEW Softkey again to remove satellite imagery from the
Navigation Map.
GPS Navigation
1)
From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Satellite View’ field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
SAT VIEW Softkey
VFR MAP Softkey
Satellite View (Map Page)
(Split-Screen)
MAP PAGE TRAFFIC
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) If necessary, turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the
horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Traffic Data’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
MAP SYMBOLS
Refer to Appendix G for a list of map symbols.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Or:
152
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
The pilot can remove (declutter) unwanted items, such as highways from the map.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Decluttering the Map Page:
1) From any Map Page, press the CLR Key. ‘CLEAR-1’ appears below the
map range. The background symbols (such as highways, cities, rivers, and
smaller lakes) are removed from the map.
2) Press the CLR Key again. ‘CLEAR-2’ appears below the map range and
airspace boundary detail is removed from the map.
3) Press the CLR Key again. ‘CLEAR-3’ appears below the map range. Only
the waypoints and navaids that are part of the current flight plan appear on
the map.
4) Press the CLR Key again to return ‘ALL’ detail to the map.
System
Overview
MAP DECLUTTER
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Map Declutter (Split-Screen)
The map detail can also be adjusted. Map detail changes the amount of detail with
respect to the zoom scale.
Appendix
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Adjusting the map detail:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘General’ Category from the
horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Detail Level’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired detail level (‘Most’, ‘More’,
‘Normal’, ‘Less’, or ‘Least’), and press the ENT Key.
Additional
Features
MAP DETAIL
153
5.3 AIRWAYS
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
Low Altitude Airways (or Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine,
propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways are eight
nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to but not including 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are
designated with a “V” before the airway number (hence the name “Victor Airways”)
since they run primarily between VORs.
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and
turbocharged piston aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at
18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet
are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet Routes
are designated with a “J” before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray. High Altitude Airways are drawn in green.
When both types of airways are displayed, high altitude airways are drawn on top of
Low Altitude Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs,
NDBs, and Intersections) are also displayed.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Index
IFR Map - Low Airways (Victor Airways)
(Split-Screen)
154
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
IFR Map - High Airways (Jet Routes)
(Split-Screen)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Calculated
Radial
EIS
Reviewing information for an airway:
1) From the Map Page, press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the IFR MAP Softkey (if necessary).
3) With the LOW AWY and/or HIGH AWY Softkeys selected, press the FMS
Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
4) Place the Map Pointer on an airway. The MEA, name of airway, endpoints,
distance, and calculated radials are displayed.
Flight
Instruments
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey on the Map Page.
2) Press the IFR MAP Softkey to display the IFR Map and related softkeys.
3) Press the LOW AWY Softkey to display/remove the Low Altitude Airways.
4) Press the HIGH AWY Softkey to display/remove the High Altitude Airways.
5) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
System
Overview
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using the MAP Softkey
on the Map Page.
Additional
Features
-MEA
-Airway Name
-Endpoints
-Distance
Calculated Radial
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Reviewing Airway Information (Map Page)
(Split-Screen)
Appendix
5)
Press the ENT Key to display the review page for the airway.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
155
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
6)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the review
page and return to the Map Page.
5.4 WAYPOINTS
The Waypoint (WPT) Page provides airport and waypoint information.
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilotentered positions, and are used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Waypoints can be changed by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of
the facility, or by entering the city name. As a waypoint identifier, facility name, or
location is entered, the G3X’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database,
displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered up to
that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by
pressing the Direct-to Key from the Waypoint Page.
The Waypoint Page allows the pilot to review airport information, runway
information, frequencies, instrument procedures, airport directory information, and
weather information. The pilot can manually enter the identifier or the G3X will
choose the most appropriate identifier based on the current position and phase of
flight.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Low Altitude Airway Review Page
(Split-Screen)
156
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used:
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for
pilot-controlled lighting)
GPS
Navigation
COM/NAV
Freq. Info.
CNS
Interface
-Waypoint Identifier/Symbol/Type
-Facility Name
-City/Region
Airport
Information
-Identification
-Frequency
-Availability
-Additional
Information
Flight
Planning
-Elevation
-Fuel Available
-Time Zone
(UTC Offset)
-Lat/Long (Full)
-Bearing/Distance
Hazard
Avoidance
INFO Softkey
Selected
Additional
Features
Waypoint Page (INFO Softkey Selected)
(Split-Screen)
Runway
Information
Appendix
Waypoint Page (RUNWAY Softkey Selected)
(Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Map
Showing
Selected
Waypoint
Annun/Alerts
RUNWAY
Softkey
Selected
AFCS
-Designation
-Length/Width
-Surface
-Lighting
-Traffic Pattern
-Wind (Full)
EIS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), * (additional
information available)
Flight
Instruments
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
157
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Additional
Features
Waypoint Page (INFO Softkey Selected)
(Full-Screen MFD)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Waypoint (WPT) Page, press the INFO Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier
(turning it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu
- press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it), or move the FMS
Joystick to select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key.
158
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Duplicate
Waypoints
Window
System
Overview
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries
may be viewed by continuing to turn the FMS Joystick during the selection process.
If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate Waypoints Window is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to move the cursor to the Duplicate Waypoints Window.
CNS
Interface
Waypoint Information Window-Duplicate Identifier
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Waypoint (WPT) Page displayed, press the INFO Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier for
the desired runway (turning it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint
selection submenu - press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it),
or move the FMS Joystick to select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key. Full-Screen: continue to Step 7.
5) Press the RUNWAY Softkey (split-screen only).
6) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor (split-screen only).
7) Move the FMS Joystick to place the cursor in the ‘Runway’ Box, on the
runway designator.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Runways Box (Waypoint Page)
Turn the FMS Joystick to display the desired runway (if more than one) for
the selected airport.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
159
Index
8)
Viewing additional information for a frequency:
The Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Communication Frequencies
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Approach *
Arrival *
ASOS
ATIS
AWOS
Center
Class B *
Class C *
Clearance
Control
CTA *
Departure *
Gate
Ground
Helicopter
Multicom
Other
Navigation
Frequencies
Pre-Taxi ILS
Radar
LOC
Ramp
Terminal*
TMA *
Tower
TRSA *
Unicom
* May include Additional Information
1)
With the Waypoint (WPT) Page displayed, press the INFO Softkey.
2)
Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3)
Move the FMS Joystick to place the cursor in the ‘Frequencies’ Box, on the
frequency denoted with an *.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Frequency Abbreviations
Index
Additional Frequency Information
(Waypoint Page)
160
4)
Press the ENT Key to view the Additional Information Window.
5)
To remove the window, press the FMS Joystick, ENT Key, or CLR Key.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
Flight
Instruments
EIS
NEAREST INFORMATION
System
Overview
To quickly view the departure or destination airport information:
1) From the Waypoint (WPT) Page, press the INFO, RUNWAY, CHART, AOPA
/ DIRECTORY, or WEATHER Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘View Destination Airport’ or
‘View Departure Airport’, and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Viewing nearest information:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired Nearest Page (APT, WX, VOR,
NDB, INT, USR, CTY, ATC, FSS, or ASPC). If none are available, “None Within
200 NM” is displayed.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to highlight the first selection in the list. Turn or
move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired nearest option.
4) Press the ENT Key to display the associated ‘Information Page’ (except for
the Nearest ARTCC and Nearest FSS pages). From the Airport Information
Page, press the INFO, CHART, AOPA / DIRECTORY, or WEATHER
Softkeys for additional information. From the User Waypoint Information
Page, press the DELETE, or EDIT softkeys to make changes to the selected
user waypoint.
5) To return to the Nearest Page, press the FMS Joystick, the ENT Key, or the
CLR Key.
GPS
Navigation
Pressing the ENT Key displays the associated ‘Information Page’ for the highlighted
selection (except for the Nearest ARTCC, and Nearest FSS pages), similar to the
Waypoint Page. Pressing the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Page.
CNS
Interface
The G3X provides a NRST Key which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport,
weather, VOR, NDB, intersection, user waypoint, city, ARTCC, FSS, and airspace
information. If none are available, “None Within 200 NM” is displayed.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
161
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Airport Information Page
(Split-Screen)
NEAREST AIRPORT CRITERIA
From the Menu on the Nearest Airports Page the pilot can define the minimum
runway length and surface type used when determining the 15 nearest airports to
display on the Nearest Airports Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface
type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not
appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters)
for runway length and “Any” for runway surface type. Private airports and Heliports
can also be included.
The Page Menu also allows the pilot to choose between displaying the facility names,
city names, bearing, or direction arrows.
To quickly show/hide private airport and heliports from the Nearest Airports Page,
press the PRIVATE or HELIPORT Softkeys.
Setting nearest airport criteria:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Airport Criteria’ from the Page
Menu.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Criteria Window is displayed.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired criteria to be defined.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired option.
6) Press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Nearest Airports Page
(Split-Screen)
162
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Airport Criteria Window
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Textual weather information can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest
WX Page. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance section for information on SiriusXM Weather.
and FIS-B
GPS
Navigation
WEATHER INFORMATION
CNS
Interface
Restoring nearest airport criteria defaults:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Airport Criteria’ from the Page
Menu.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Airport Criteria Window is displayed.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired criteria to be restored.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) With ‘Restore Default’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
EIS
Nearest Airports Page Menu
Additional
Features
AFCS
Selecting airport weather information:
1) From the Waypoint Page, press the WEATHER Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering an airport identifier
(turning it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it).
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest Airport WX Page. If Nearest
Airport Weather is not available, “None Within 200 NM” is displayed.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
163
3)
Press the FMS Joystick to highlight the first airport in the nearest airport
weather list. Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired airport
weather.
4)
Press the ENT Key to display the Weather Information Page.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to scroll up or down on the page.
6)
To return to the Nearest Airport Weather Page, press the FMS Joystick, the
ENT Key, or the CLR Key.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
Flight
Planning
Nearest Airport Weather Page
(Split-Screen)
Weather Information Page
(Split-Screen)
Intersections can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest Intersections
Page. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected intersection and
surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays the region, bearing,
distance, latitude, and longitude.
Selecting an intersection:
1) From the Waypoint Page, press the INFO Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering an intersection identifier
(turning it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu
- press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it), or move the FMS
Joystick to select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest Intersections Page.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
INTERSECTIONS
164
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired intersection.
5)
Press the ENT Key to display the Intersection Information Page.
System
Overview
3)
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Selecting a NDB:
1) From the Waypoint Page, press the INFO Softkey if necessary.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering the identifier (turning
it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu - press the
CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it), or move the FMS Joystick to
select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest NDBs Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired NDB.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the NDB Information Page.
CNS
Interface
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path.
The list only includes NDBs that are within 200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are no nearest NDBs in
the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
EIS
NDBs can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest NDBs Page. In addition
to displaying a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page
displays the region, bearing, distance, latitude, longitude, and frequency.
Flight
Instruments
NDBS
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
165
VORS
VORs can be viewed from the Waypoint Page or the Nearest VORs Page. In addition
to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the page
displays the region, city, state, bearing, distance, latitude, longitude, frequency, and
class (High, Low, or Terminal VOR).
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR close to the flight path.
The list only includes VORs that are within 200nm. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in
the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Localizer information cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station
is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information
Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
Selecting a VOR:
1) From the Waypoint Page, press the INFO Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering identifier (turning it
counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu - press the
CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it), or move the FMS Joystick to
select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest VOR Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired VOR.
5) Press the ENT Key to display the VOR Information Page.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
166
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Creating user waypoints:
1) To create a user waypoint at the current location, using the Map Pointer, or
from the Main Menu:
a) To create a user waypoint at the current location, press and hold the
ENT Key from any page.
b) The ‘Mark a New User Waypoint?’ Window appears.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
b) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’ and press the
ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
The G3X can create and store up to 3,000 user-defined waypoints. Once a waypoint
has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved.
System
Overview
USER WAYPOINTS
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Main Menu (User Waypoints Selected)
(Split-Screen)
Or:
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
167
Index
b) Find an empty area without any map features and press the ENT Key.
The message “Create a New User Waypoint?” is displayed.
Appendix
a) From a map page, press the FMS Joystick to activate the Map Pointer
(on the WX Page, press the PAN MAP Softkey).
Annun/Alerts
d) Enter a user waypoint name (up to 10 characters). The current aircraft
position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
c) Press the NEW Softkey. The message “Create a New User Waypoint?”
is displayed.
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Or:
a) From a map page, press the FMS Joystick to activate the Map Pointer
(on the WX Page, press the PAN MAP Softkey).
Flight
Instruments
b) Select a map feature using the Map Pointer and press the MENU Key.
CNS
Interface
EIS
c) With ‘Create User Waypoint’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The
message “Create a New User Waypoint?” is displayed.
2)
With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The New Waypoint Window is
displayed.
3)
Move the FMS Joystick to the User Waypoint Name Field and enter the
waypoint name, if desired.
4)
If desired, select the waypoint symbol:
GPS
Navigation
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Symbol.
b) Turn the FMS Joystick to access the ‘Select Symbol’ Menu.
Flight
Planning
c) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired symbol from the
menu, and press the ENT Key.
User Waypoint Name Field
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Symbol Field (Selected)
Annun/Alerts
New Waypoint Window (Symbol Selected)
If desired, press the POSITION Softkey and enter the latitude, longitude,
name, or altitude for the waypoint or press the REF WPTS Softkey to enter
a bearing and distance from another waypoint or the bearing from two
other waypoints to define the new waypoint location.
Index
Appendix
5)
168
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
New Waypoint Window
(REF WPTS Softkey Selected)
(Split-Screen)
CNS
Interface
6)
EIS
New Waypoint Window
(POSITION Softkey Selected)
(Split-Screen)
With ‘Done’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
Press the ENT Key to display the User Waypoint Information Window.
Index
169
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Deleting user waypoints:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
2) Turn or Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’ and press the
ENT Key. If deleting all user waypoints, go to Step 4.
3) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in
the User Waypoint field.
Additional
Features
Editing or renaming a user waypoint:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’ and press the ENT
Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the appropriate waypoint and press the
EDIT Softkey. The Edit Waypoint Window is displayed.
4) Move the cursor to the desired field(s) and make any necessary changes (to
edit the Reference Waypoints, press the REF WPTS Softkey).
5) With ‘Done’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
5)
GPS
Navigation
Selecting and viewing nearest user waypoints:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest USR Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired user waypoint.
GPS Navigation
Press the MENU Key.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
4)
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
User Waypoints Page Menu
Select ‘Delete Waypoint’ or ‘Delete All’.
6)
Press the ENT Key. ‘No’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
7)
With ‘Yes’ highlighted in the confirmation window, press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
Or:
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
5)
1)
Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
2)
Turn or Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in
the User Waypoint field.
4)
Press the ENT Key.
5)
Press the DELETE Softkey. ‘No’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
6)
Highlight ‘Yes’ and press the ENT Key.
User Waypoints can also be deleted by ‘Symbol’ or ‘Distance’ from the User
Waypoints Page Menu.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AUTOMATIC WAYPOINT SELECTION
Automatic waypoint selection is the system’s attempt to deduce what Waypoint
to display based on the aircraft’s location in relation to the departure airport and/or
the waypoints in the Flight Plan.
The pilot can override Automatic Waypoint Selection by manually entering a
waypoint. The automatic selection will not resume until such time that the manually
entered waypoint and the automatically selected waypoint coincide (does not apply if
the CHART Softkey is selected). To manually return to Automatic Waypoint Selection,
highlight the identifier and press the CLR Key.
170
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Selecting and viewing nearest airspaces:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Nearest Airspace Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to highlight the nearest airspace. Turn or move the
FMS Joystick to highlight the desired airspace.
4) Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace Information Page.
5) Press the FREQS Softkey (if available) to display frequency and additional
airport information similar to the Waypoint Information Page.
EIS
The Nearest Airspace Page displays the class of airspace, controlling agency, vertical
boundaries, and status.
Flight
Instruments
The Nearest Airspace Page and Airspace Alerts provide information about airspaces
and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them. The Nearest Airspace Page can
be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path.
System
Overview
5.5 AIRSPACE
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Airspace Information Page
(Split-Screen)
The Full-Screen Display will also show a map with the nearest airspace highlighted.
Annun/Alerts
Nearest Airspace Page
(Split-Screen)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
171
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
AIRSPACE ALERT MESSAGES
When an airspace alert appears, press the NRST Key to automatically show nearby
airspace information on the Nearest Airspace Page. This information includes name,
time to entry (if applicable), and status.
There are four types of status information:
• Ahead—Projected to enter the airspace within the next 10 minutes or less
• Near—Within two nautical miles of an airspace but not projected to enter it
• Near & Ahead—Projected to enter the airspace within two nautical miles
• Inside Airspace—Within the boundaries of the airspace
SMART AIRSPACE™
Smart Airspace™ shows airspace at and immediately surrounding the aircraft’s
current altitude in bold. Airspaces at all other altitudes are de-emphasized.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Nearest Airspace Page Map
De-emphasized
Airspace
Index
Appendix
Bold Airspace
Smart Airspace™
172
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
5.6 DIRECT-TO NAVIGATION USING THE G3X
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to
destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active
flight plan waypoint as the default selection or a blank waypoint field if no
flight plan is active).
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier
(turning it counter-clockwise brings up the waypoint selection submenu press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick to remove it), press the RECENT
Softkey to display a list of recent waypoints, or move the FMS Joystick to
select the facility name, or city field.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
Once a direct-to is activated, the G3X establishes a point-to-point course line from
the present position to the selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided
until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such
as a nearby airport.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The G3X Direct-to Key is disabled while using an external GPS navigator. Press the INTERNAL Softkey on the Direct-to Page to make changes to
the active flight plan from the G3X. Press the EXTERNAL Softkey to return
to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
173
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
GPS
Navigation
Direct-to Window (Split-Screen)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Selecting RECENT WPTS, NRST APTS, or FPL WPTS as a direct-to
destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active
flight plan destination as the default selection or a blank destination if no
flight plan is active).
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the RECENT Softkey to display a list of recent waypoints (RECENT
WPTS) only or turn the FMS Joystick counter-clockwise to display a list of
recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest airports (NRST APTS), and flight
plan waypoints (FPL WPTS).
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
174
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS Navigation
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Direct-to Window (Flight Plan Waypoints Selected)
(Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
Hazard
Avoidance
6)
Flight
Planning
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the NRST Key.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
5) Press the ENT Key.
With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Index
175
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From a navigation map page, press the FMS Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination
location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the
waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected
point entered as the direct-to destination.
5) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
Additional
Features
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation
map pages. If no airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a
temporary waypoint named ‘MAP POINTER’ is automatically created at the location of
the map arrow.
System
Overview
GPS Navigation
6)
Press the ENT Key.
7)
With ‘Activate’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Cancelling or resuming a direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Stop Navigation’ or ‘Resume Flight
Plan’ if a flight plan was active.
4) Press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G3X resumes
navigating the flight plan.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the Menu Key.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Stop Navigation’ or ‘Resume
Flight Plan’ if a flight plan was active.
5) Press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan.
176
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
SECTION 6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight
Instruments
6.1 INTRODUCTION
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
NOTE: While navigating using an external GPS navigation source, the ability
to edit/invert/delete the Active Flight Plan or activate a Saved Flight Plan is
disabled.
EIS
NOTE: In order to add, delete, or change flight plan waypoints from the G3X
when an external GPS navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey
from the Active Flight Plan Page or Direct-to Page. Press the EXTERNAL
Softkey to return to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
NOTE: The Saved Flight Plan Page is not available from the full-screen PFD.
Appendix
Index
177
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Whenever an approach is loaded into the active flight plan it replaces the destination
airport with a sequence of waypoints for the selected approach. The airport must have
a published instrument approach and only the final course segment (usually from final
approach fix to missed approach point) of the published approach is available if an
external navigator (i.e., GTN or GNS Series) is not configured.
Hazard
Avoidance
Up to 50 flight plans with up to 300 waypoints each can be created and stored
in memory. One flight plan can be activated at a time and becomes the active flight
plan. The active flight plan is erased when the destination is reached and the system
is turned off. When storing flight plans with an approach, the G3X uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is
changed or updated, the G3X automatically updates the information if the procedure
has not been modified. If an approach is no longer available, the procedure is deleted
from the affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed.
Flight
Planning
Flight planning on the G3X consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints
one at a time and inserting approaches as needed. The flight plan is displayed on
maps using different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the
segment of the flight plan currently being flown.
FLIGHT PLAN DATA FIELDS
By default, the Data Fields on the Active and Saved Flight Plan Pages are set to
display Leg Desired Track (DTK), Leg Distance (DIST), and Leg Estimated Time En Route
(ETE). The first two Data Fields can be changed using the Page Menu. The last Data
Field can be changed using the FMS Joystick.
Changing the information shown in the flight plan data fields:
From the Active Flight Plan Page or the Saved Flight Plan Page, move the
FMS Joystick (right or left) to quickly change the third data field.
Or:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page or the Saved Flight Plan Page, press the
MENU Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Change Data Fields’ and press
the ENT Key. The cursor is displayed on the first Data Field.
4) If desired, move the FMS Joystick to highlight the second Data Field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access the list of available Data Fields.
6) Turn or Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired option from the list
and press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
178
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
First Data Second Data Third Data
Field
Field
Field
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Data Field Selection (Active Flight Plan Page)
Flight
Planning
Viewing fuel remaining at each waypoint:
From the Active Flight Plan Page, move the FMS Joystick (right or left) to
quickly change the third data field to Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM).
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
179
MANUALLY SWITCHING BETWEEN INTERNAL AND
EXTERNAL FLIGHT PLAN SOURCES
NOTE: The selection of the internal GPS navigation source to persist through
power cycles or reset to the external GPS navigation source is dependant on
the configuration. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more information.
Press the INTERNAL Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page or the Direct-to Page, to
temporarily allow flight planning through the G3X using the internal GPS flight plan
when an external GPS Navigator is configured. Press the EXTERNAL Softkey to return
to the external GPS navigator’s flight plan.
When manually selecting the internal GPS flight plan, ‘INT’ is displayed in light blue
in the upper left corner of the Data Bar as well as the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
Using Internal
GPS Flight Plan
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
INT: The pilot has
elected to use the
internal GPS navigation source instead
of the external GPS
navigation source.
180
Internal Flight Plan Indication
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
FAILURE OF THE EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATION SOURCE
EIS
If the external GPS navigation source fails, the system reverts to the internal GPS
navigation source and ‘REV’ is shown in yellow in the upper left corner of the Data Bar
as well as the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
Flight
Instruments
From the Active Flight Plan Page or the Direct-to Page, touch the INTERNAL
or EXTERNAL Softkey to switch between the internal and external flight
plan sources when an external GPS Navigator is configured.
System
Overview
Switching between internal and external flight plan sources:
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
External
GPS Failure.
Reverted to
Internal GPS
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
REV: External
Navigation Source
failed. Reverted to
internal VFR GPS
for navigation.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
External GPS Navigation Failure
181
6.2 FLIGHT PLAN CREATION USING THE G3X
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Page. It is the flight plan
to which the G3X is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the navigation
maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan List Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
Data
Fields
NonActive
Leg
Active
Leg
Active
Leg
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
Active Flight Plan Page (Split-Screen)
Map Page (Split-Screen)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Creating an active flight plan using the G3X:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Insert Waypoint Window. (Turning
it clockwise displays a blank Insert Waypoint Window, turning it counterclockwise displays a list of recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest
airports (NRST APTS), or flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS)).
182
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Insert Waypoint Window (Split-Screen)
6)
Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
7)
When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Joystick to remove
the cursor.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
183
AFCS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Additional
Features
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard
Avoidance
Creating a stored flight plan using the G3X:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List Page.
4) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘New Flight
Plan’, and press the ENT Key to display a blank flight plan for the first
empty storage location.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Insert Waypoint Window (Turning it
clockwise displays a blank Insert Waypoint Window, turning it counterclockwise displays the a list of recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest
airports (NRST APTS), or flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS)).
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select
a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key.
7) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
8) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Joystick to return to
the Flight Plan List Page. The new flight plan is now in the list.
Flight
Planning
Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select
a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The
active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
GPS
Navigation
5)
6.3 FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE USING THE G3X
The G3X can store up to 50 flight plans. The active flight plan is erased when
another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be viewed
on the Flight Plan List Page
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List Page.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) Press the ENT Key. The Saved Flight Plan Page is displayed showing
departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information
for the selected Flight Plan.
5) Press the FMS Joystick or DONE Softkey to exit the Saved Flight Plan Page.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
AFCS
Flight Plan List Page (Split-Screen)
Saved Flight Plan Page (Split-Screen)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the Active Flight Plan Page.
3) Press the MENU Key. The Active Flight Plan Page Menu is displayed.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to Highlight ‘Save Flight Plan’.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. A copy of the flight plan is
stored in the next available position in the flight plan list on the Flight Plan
List Page.
184
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Activating a Flight Plan Leg:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
4) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor and move the FMS Joystick to
highlight the waypoint leg to be activated.
5) Press the Direct-to Key twice. The “Activate Leg XXXXX - XXXXX?”
window is displayed.
EIS
Activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) Press the ACTIVATE Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate
Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate XXXXX-XXXXX’
confirmation window appears (only if already navigating a flight plan).
5) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with a copy
of the flight plan being activated. Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint
order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the flight plan being activated
(the stored flight plan is not changed).
System
Overview
6.4 FLIGHT PLAN ACTIVATION USING THE G3X
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Activate Leg Window
With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
185
Index
6)
6.5 FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose
the flight plan, select the desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added
in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans are limited to 300 waypoints (including
approach waypoints).
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan List Page, press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick select the point in the flight plan to add the new
waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the highlighted
waypoint.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Insert Waypoint Window. Turning it
clockwise displays a blank Insert Waypoint Window, turning it counterclockwise displays the a list of recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest
airports (NRST APTS), or flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS).
Or:
Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Insert Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select
a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints.
7) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
4) Using the FMS Joystick select the point in the flight plan before which to
add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
186
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Insert Waypoint Window. Turning it
clockwise displays a blank Insert Waypoint Window, turning it counterclockwise displays the a list of recent waypoints (RECENT WPTS), nearest
airports (NRST APTS), or flight plan waypoints (FPL WPTS).
System
Overview
5)
Flight
Instruments
Or:
Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Insert Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key.
6)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Adding a waypoint to the active or saved flight plan using the
map:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) From the Active Flight Plan Page or from the Saved Flight Plan Page, press
the USE MAP Softkey to activate the map pointer.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan leg to be
modified.
EIS
Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select
a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints and press the ENT Key. The
active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Page (Flight Plan Leg Highlighted with Map Pointer)
6)
Using the FMS Joystick, drag the flight plan leg to highlight the desired
waypoint to be added.
Appendix
With the desired flight plan leg highlighted (blue), press the ENT Key (the
flight plan leg turns magenta). This will split the flight plan leg.
Annun/Alerts
5)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
187
Flight Planning
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Selected Waypoint
7)
With the desired waypoint highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan
is now modified to include the added waypoint.
8)
Press the DONE Softkey (from the Flight Plan List Page only).
EDITING FLIGHT PLAN SPEED, FUEL, AND/OR NAME
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Active Flight Plan Page (Waypoint Selected with Map Pointer)
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: If a fuel flow sensor is configured, the user-entered ‘Plan Fuel’ value
is used while on the ground. In the air, the ‘Plan Fuel’ field is hidden and the
fuel calculations are based on the actual measured fuel flow.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Adjusting the Active Flight Plan fuel:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Active Flight
Plan Page.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and move the FMS Joystick to
highlight the ‘Plan Fuel’ field.
4) Using the FMS Joystick, enter the desired plan flow, and press the ENT Key.
188
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
Plan Fuel Field
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Adjusting the Saved Flight Plan speed and fuel:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan, and press the ENT Key. The
Saved Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to the ‘Plan Speed’ field.
4) Using the FMS Joystick, enter the desired speed, and press the ENT Key.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 for ‘Plan Fuel’, and press the DONE Softkey.
GPS
Navigation
Plan Fuel (Active Flight Plan Page)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
189
Flight Planning
Plan Speed Field
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Plan Fuel Field
Plan Speed and Plan Fuel (Saved Flight Plan Page)
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Editing the Saved Flight Plan name:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan, and press the ENT Key. The
Saved Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Flight Plan Name field.
4) Using the FMS Joystick, enter the flight plan name, and press the ENT Key.
Index
Editing the Saved Flight Plan Name
190
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
191
AFCS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Additional
Features
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard
Avoidance
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete All’, and press the ENT Key.
3) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all saved flight plans.
To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight
‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To
cancel the request, press the CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’
and press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G3X memory.
CNS
Interface
DELETING FLIGHT PLANS
EIS
Copying a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the MENU Key, using the FMS Joystick highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
The G3X allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing
editing, etc., without affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an
existing stored flight plan for use in creating a modified version of the original stored
flight plan.
System
Overview
COPYING FLIGHT PLANS
System
Overview
Flight Planning
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The changes made to the active flight plan affect navigation as soon
as they are entered. Editing the active flight plan does not affect any saved
flight plans. Waypoints in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or
MAP) can not be deleted individually.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Deleting the Active Flight Plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the MENU Key.
4) With ‘Stop Navigation’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Active Flight Plan Page Menu
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
4) Press the CLR Key or press the MENU Key and highlight ‘Remove
Waypoint’. The ‘Remove XXXXX From Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Index
Remove Waypoint Window
5)
192
With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
193
Hazard
Avoidance
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Inverting a saved flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan, and press the
ENT Key. The Saved Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan?’, and press the ENT Key.
5) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) If an external navigator is configured, press the INTERNAL Softkey.
3) Press the MENU Key, turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Invert
Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An “Invert the Active Flight Plan?”
confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to invert the active flight plan. To
cancel, press the CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the
ENT Key.
EIS
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original
departure point.
Flight
Instruments
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
System
Overview
Deleting an individual waypoint from a saved flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List Page if necessary.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the flight plan to be edited and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
5) Press the CLR Key or press the MENU Key and highlight ‘Remove
Waypoint’. The ‘Remove XXXXX From Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
6) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the
CLR Key, the FMS Joystick, or highlight ‘No’ and press the ENT Key.
IMPORTING/EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
Importing flight plans:
1) With a flight plan saved to the SD Card, press the FPL Key and turn the
FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List Page.
2) Press the IMPORT Softkey.
3) Using the FMS Joystick highlight the desired flight plan to import.
4) Press the IMPORT Softkey again and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
3)
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
AFCS
NOTE: This section is not applicable if an external GPS navigator is configured.
Approach configuration is handled via the external GPS navigator’s controls
only. Refer to the external GPS navigator’s Pilot’s Guide for more information.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Press the EXPORT Softkey and press the ENT Key.
6.6 APPROACHES (WITHOUT EXTERNAL
NAVIGATOR CONFIGURED)
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Exporting flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
An approach can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides
situational awareness for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with
published instrument approach procedures. Only one approach can be loaded at a
time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the
active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach.
194
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load Approach” or “Activate
Approach” is given. “Load Approach” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan
without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows continued navigation
via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activate
Approach” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately
begins to navigate to the first waypoint in the approach.
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Select Approach Window (Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
195
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Loading an approach from the active or saved flight plan page:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Active Flight Plan Page or Saved Flight
Plan Page.
Annun/Alerts
An approach can be selected from the Direct-to Window, Waypoint (WPT) Page,
Active Flight Plan Page, and the Saved Flight Plan Page.
AFCS
When selecting an approach, it replaces the destination airport with the sequence
of waypoints for the selected approach. Keep in mind that the airport must have a
published approach (GPS, RNAV, VOR, NDB, localizer, or ILS) and only the final course
segment (final approach fix to missed approach point) of the published approach is
available (unless an external navigator is configured).
Additional
Features
SELECTING AN APPROACH
3)
Press the SEL APPR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Approach’ by turning or moving the FMS Joystick, and press the ENT Key.
The Select Approach Window is displayed.
4)
Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of available approaches. Turn or
move FMS Joystick to highlight the desired approach and press the ENT
Key.
5)
With ‘Load Approach’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Viewing a chart for the selected approach:
1) With an approach selected in the Select Approach Window, press the
MENU Key. The Show Chart Menu is displayed.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Select Approach Menu
2)
Press the ENT Key. A chart displaying the selected approach is displayed.
3)
Press the EXIT Softkey to return to the Select Approach Window.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Activating an approach on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Active Flight Plan Page (if necessary).
3) Press the SEL APPR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Approach’ by turning or moving the FMS Joystick, and press the ENT Key.
The Select Approach Window is displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of available approaches. Turn or
move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired approach and press the
ENT Key.
5) With ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the
request, press the CLR Key or the FMS Joystick.
Or:
1) With an approach loaded on the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Activate Approach’, and press
the ENT Key.
196
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Active Flight Plan Page Menu
CNS
Interface
Or:
2)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the approach, and press the ENT Key.
“Activate XXXXX Approach?” window is displayed.
3)
With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Removing an approach:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to display the Active Flight Plan Page or Saved Flight
Plan Page.
3) Press the RMV APPR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Remove
Approach’ by turning or moving the FMS Joystick, and press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
Loading/Activating an approach from the Direct-to Window or
Waypoint Page:
1) Press the Direct-to Key or select the Waypoint Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Select Approach’, and press
the ENT Key. If an approach is not already loaded or activated, the cursor
is displayed in the Approach Field. If an approach is already loaded or
activated, ‘Activate’ is highlighted.
4) With ‘Activate’ highlighted press the ENT Key, or select an approach,
highlight ‘Load Approach’ or ‘Activate Approach’, and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Planning
With an approach loaded on the Active Flight Plan Page, press the FMS
Joystick to activate the cursor.
GPS
Navigation
1)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
197
ACTIVATING VECTORS-TO-FINAL
After an approach has been activated, the VECTORS Softkey is used when being
vectored to the final approach course by Air Traffic Control (ATC).
If the VECTORS Softkey is pressed, the G3X creates an extension of the final course,
beyond the final approach waypoint in the database (final approach fix [FAF]). On
the Active Flight Plan Page, a Vector to Final symbol appears beside the first approach
waypoint.
Vectors-to-Final
Symbol
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Vectors-to-Final (Active Flight Plan Page)
(Split-Screen)
VECTORS Softkey
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Final Course
Extension
Vectors-to-Final (Map Page)
(Split-Screen)
The G3X does not provide guidance to the inbound course. The course deviation
needle on the graphic HSI remains off-center until established on the final approach
course. The map shows an extension of the final approach course using a bold
magenta line.
198
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight Planning
Loading the approach cancels the Direct-to and initiates a route to the FAF.
System
Overview
If the VECTORS Softkey is not pressed, the G3X creates a straight-line course directly
to the first waypoint in the approach.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Cancelling Vectors-to-Final:
From the Active Flight Plan Page (with an approach activated), press the
VECTORS Softkey.
Or:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Cancel Vectors-to-Final’ and
press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
199
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Flight Planning
Blank Page
200
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
SECTION 7 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Flight
Instruments
7.1 WEATHER INFORMATION
WEATHER SOURCE
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Switching Weather Sources:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘WEATHER.’
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page.
Or
EIS
On installations that include the capability to receive both SiriusXM and FIS-B weather
information, there are three options available for selection through the Main Menu or
Weather Page; AUTO, XM (SiriusXM), and GDL FIS-B. The default selection is ‘AUTO.’
With AUTO selected, and a SiriusXM subscription, SiriusXM weather information
is displayed. If SiriusXM service is unavailable with AUTO selected, FIS-B weather
information is displayed, if available. If either SiriusXM or GDL FIS-B source is selected,
only the selected source is used to display weather information and no automatic
source-switching will occur. When more than one source is available, the name of the
current weather source will be displayed in the title bar of the Weather Page (WX) and
on the Waypoint Page when the Weather Softkey is selected. Data from the selected
weather source will apply to all weather shown on the Map Page, Waypoint Page,
Weather Page, Nearest Page, and configurable data fields. The weather source can
also be changed manually through the Main Menu or on the Weather Page (WX).
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
201
1)
From the Weather Page press SETUP Softkey.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
3)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page.
SiriusXM Weather
(products vary by
subscription)
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
Weather Product
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
NEXRAD Radar (CONUS
high resolution)
NEXRAD Radar (CONUS
low resolution)
NEXRAD Radar (Regional
high resolution)
202
FIS-B Weather
(subscription-free)
+
+
+
NEXRAD Radar (Canada)
+
Satellite Mosaic
Surface Precipitation
Surface Analysis
Sea Surface Temperatures
Echo Tops
Surface Pressure
Lightning
Storm Cells
METAR (US)
METAR (Canada)
TAF (US)
TAF (Canada)
AIRMET
SIGMET
PIREP
Winds Aloft
Temperatures Aloft
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
+
+
Flight
Instruments
+
+
+
+
+
EIS
CNS
Interface
NOTAMs
Temporary Flight
Restrictions
Freezing Level
Turbulence Forecast
Icing Forecast
City Forecast
FIS-B Weather
(subscription-free)
System
Overview
Weather Product
SiriusXM Weather
(products vary by
subscription)
Supported Weather Products by Source
GPS
Navigation
SiriusXM WEATHER (OPTIONAL)
Flight
Planning
NOTE: See the G3X Installation Manual for SiriusXM activation instructions.
NOTE: SiriusXM Weather is only available with the optional GDU 375.
Hazard
Avoidance
SiriusXM DATA LINK WEATHER ADVISORY
Additional
Features
Each time the system powers-up, the pilot is prompted to acknowledge a SiriusXM
data link weather advisory.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Data link Weather Advisory
Press the ENT Key to acknowledge this information.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
203
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather can be used, the service must be activated. Service is
activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a Radio ID.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses the Radio ID to send an activation signal that allows
the G3X to display weather data and/or entertainment programming.
XM Weather Information
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
• Service Level—SiriusXM Weather subscription plan purchased.
• Weather Products—List of weather features and age of weather data in minutes.
Accessing SiriusXM Weather information:
From the Weather (WX) Page press the INFO Softkey.
Or:
From the (XM) Audio Page press the INFO Softkey.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
• Radio ID—Eight-digit ID number used for activation.
NEXRAD
NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of multiple high-resolution Doppler
radar sites that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data
provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250
nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network provides important
information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and
dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current
radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data, it should
be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD data or any radar
data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of
pre-departure and enroute evaluation.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
SiriusXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
204
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
EIS
The display of radar coverage is always active when NEXRAD is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active
or is off-line.
System
Overview
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This
data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level.
NEXRAD Abnormalities
GPS
Navigation
• Ground clutter
CNS
Interface
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some, but
not all, of those include:
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
Hazard
Avoidance
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
Flight
Planning
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust (chaff) which can cause alterations in radar
scans
NEXRAD Limitations
AFCS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine
cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain). For example, it is not
possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
Additional
Features
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but not all, are
listed for the user’s awareness:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An
individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges, and
has no information about storms directly over the site.
Annun/Alerts
• Radar coverage only extends to 55°N.
Appendix
• Any precipitation displayed between 52°N and 55°N is unknown.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
205
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” (designated by the letter Z) is the
amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. The dBZ values increase
as returned signal strength increases. Precipitation intensity is displayed using colors
corresponding to the dBZ values.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Data
Satellite Mosaic
Satellite Mosaic displays infrared composite images of cloud cover taken by
geostationary weather satellites. The Satellite Mosaic provides up to seven levels of
cloud cover.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
RADAR Legend
Satellite Mosaic/Cloud Tops Data
Index
Appendix
RADAR Legend
206
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
Echo Tops are derived from NEXRAD radar and indicate the highest altitude at which
precipitation is falling. Echo Tops at or above the altitude you select are displayed, in
5,000 foot increments up to 70,000 ft. Echo Tops can be helpful in determining the
severity of thunderstorms.
System
Overview
Echo Tops
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Echo Tops Data (Split-Screen)
Winds Aloft
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
The wind barbs always point in the direction that the wind is coming from. The wind
speed is depicted using flags at the end of the wind barb. A short wind flag is 5 knots,
a long wind flag is 10 knots, and a triangle flag is 50 knots.
Additional
Features
Winds Aloft are displayed using wind barbs or a wind streamline depending on
the selected range. The wind barbs indicate wind speed and direction. The wind
streamline indicates wind direction with arrows.
Hazard
Avoidance
Winds Aloft data shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
207
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
Winds Aloft Data (Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
Wind Direction
Calm
15 Knots
5 Knots
20 Knots
10 Knots
50 Knots
Flight
Planning
Wind Flag
Surface Pressure
This feature displays pressure isobars and pressure centers. The isobars connect
points of equal pressure. Pressure readings can help determine weather and wind
conditions. High pressure areas are generally associated with fair weather. Low
pressure areas are generally associated with clouds and the chance of precipitation.
Isobars that are packed closely together show a strong pressure gradient. Strong
gradients are associated with areas of stronger winds. Pressure units can be displayed
in Millibars (mb) and Inches of Mercury (in).
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Winds Barbs
Other Legend
208
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Surface Pressure Data
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes.
A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region and
within the last seven minutes. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
System
Overview
XM Lightning
EIS
CNS
Interface
Lightning Data (Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
Storm Cells
Hazard
Avoidance
The direction of the storm is displays by an arrow (at a range of 20 nm or less). The
tip of the arrow indicates where the storm should be in 15 minutes. Critical information
about the storm cell (tops and intensity) can be viewed by selecting the storm cell with
the map pointer. Pressing the ENT Key will display additional information.
Flight
Planning
The Storm Cells feature displays storms as well as the storm’s projected path in the
immediate future.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Storm Cell Data (Split-Screen)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
209
Hazard Avoidance
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report) is an international code used for
reporting weather observations. METARs are updated hourly or as needed. METARs
typically contain information about the temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain
information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. If METAR data
is available for an airport, a color-coded flag is shown next to the airport.
TAF (Terminal Area Forecast) is the standard format for 24-hour weather forecasts.
TAFs may contain some of the same code as METAR data. It typically forecasts
significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected
changes in weather conditions.
METAR and TAF text data is displayed on the Map Page and the Weather (WX) Page.
An abbreviated version can be viewed by panning over the METAR flag. Pressing the
ENT Key will display additional information. METAR and TAF data can be displayed as
raw or decoded text.
Changing METAR and TAF text:
1) Using the Map Pointer, select the desired METAR and press the ENT Key; or
from the Waypoint (WPT) Page press the WEATHER Softkey. The Weather
Information Page is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key.
a) Select ‘Show Decoded Text’ or ‘Show Raw Text’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Select ‘Change Text Size’ and press the ENT Key.
b) Select ‘Small’, ‘Medium’, or ‘Large’ and press the ENT Key.
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
METARs and TAFs
210
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 feet AGL and visibility greater than 5
miles)
Flight
Instruments
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000-3000 feet AGL and/or visibility 3-5 miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 feet AGL and/or visibility 1 mile to less
than 3 miles)
EIS
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 feet AGL or visibility less than 1 mile)
CNS
Interface
METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine
flight conditions
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
METAR Legend
Additional
Features
METAR Selected With Map
Pointer
AIRMETS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
211
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
A SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) advises of weather that is
potentially hazardous to all aircraft. In the contiguous United States, the following
items are covered: severe icing, severe or extreme turbulence, volcanic ash, dust storms,
and sandstorms that lower visibility to less than three statute miles.
Annun/Alerts
SIGMETs
AFCS
An AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) can be especially helpful for
pilots of light aircraft that have limited flight capability or instrumentation. An AIRMET
must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least 3,000 square miles at any one
time. AIRMETs are routinely issued for six-hour periods and are amended as necessary
due to changing weather conditions. AIRMETs are displayed as colored, dashed lines.
A Convective SIGMET is issued for the following conditions: thunderstorms, isolated
severe thunderstorms, embedded thunderstorms, hail at the surface, and tornadoes.
A SIGMET is widespread and must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least
3,000 square miles. SIGMETs are displayed as a yellow-dashed line.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through official
sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
Temporary Flight Restrictions, or TFRs, temporarily restrict all aircraft from entering
the selected airspace unless a waiver has been issued. TFRs are routinely issued for
activities such as sporting events, dignitary visits, military depots, and forest fires. TFRs
are represented as an area highlighted by red (active) or yellow (not yet active).
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
AIRMET Selected With Map
Pointer
AIRMET/SIGMET Legend
TFR Data
212
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular
route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic
Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) (blue) or Urgent (UUA)
(yellow).
System
Overview
PIREPs
Urgent (UUA)
PIREP
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Routine (UA)
PIREP Selected
PIREP Data
Flight
Planning
Freezing Levels
Hazard
Avoidance
Freezing Level shows contours for the lowest forecast altitude where icing conditions
are likely to occur.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Freezing Level Data
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
213
Turbulence Forecast
Turbulence data identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air
mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe, or extreme.
Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Severe Turbulence Selected With Map
Pointer (Split-Screen)
Icing Forecast (CIP & SLD)
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing
environment. Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe,
and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a
representation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence
of relatively large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and
freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Turbulence Forecast Legend
Index
Icing Forecast Legend
214
Moderate Icing Selected With Map Pointer
(Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
System
Overview
Forecast
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Forecast Data (Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
Windy
Partly Cloudy
Rain
Haze
Mostly Cloudy
Freezing Rain
Foggy
Cloudy
Snow
Very Cold
Very Hot
Additional
Features
Thunderstorms
Hazard
Avoidance
Fronts Legend
Sunny
Forecast Legend
AFCS
Water Temperature
Annun/Alerts
The surface temperatures of coastal and large inland bodies of water are displayed.
Appendix
Index
Other Legend
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Water Temperature Data (Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
215
USING SiriusXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
USING SiriusXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
EIS
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather
product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather
data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data
link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather
product age.
SiriusXM Weather Products can be displayed on the Map Page and individually on the
Weather (WX) Page.
The setup menu for the Map Page controls the map range settings above which weather
products are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather product
map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. For
weather products such as Lightning, and Storm Cells, the weather product is displayed
when a map range “smaller” than the weather product map range setting is selected
(Satellite Mosaic works inversely). The menu also provides a means for enabling/disabling
display of ‘Airmets’, ‘Sigmets’, ‘Weather Data’, ‘NEXRAD’, and/or ‘Fronts’ on the Map Page.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display
on the Weather Page or the Map Page:
• Storm Cells
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
Additional information is also available for the following weather products on the
Weather Page (not displayed on the Map Page):
• Forecast
216
• PIREPs
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Viewing SiriusXM Weather products on the Map Page:
1) Select the Map Page.
2) Select the WEATHER Softkey to display the XM weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Show Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the Map Pointer.
4) Use the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired weather product with the
Map Pointer.
5) With the desired weather product highlighted, press the ENT Key to get
detailed information (if available).
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Viewing SiriusXM Weather products on the Weather (WX) Page:
1) From the WX Page press the FMS Joystick to highlight the weather product
field.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select and automatically display the desired
weather product.
3) If necessary, move the FMS Joystick to highlight the type field and turn the
FMS Joystick to scroll through a list of available options.
4) Press the PAN MAP Softkey to get abbreviated information about the
selected weather product or map feature (if available).
5) With the desired weather product selected press the ENT Key to get
detailed information (if available).
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Abbreviated Weather Product Information
(Split-Screen)
Detailed Weather Product Information
(Split-Screen)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
217
Index
NOTE: The Map Setup Menu may display the weather category as: ‘Weather’
and ‘WX Reports’ or ‘XM Weather’ and ‘XM WX Reports’ or ‘FIS-B Weather’
depending on the currently configured weather source(s).
Hazard Avoidance
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Weather’ or ‘WX Reports’ Category
from the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather product.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each product (On/Off,
Auto, range settings).
6) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
Additional
Features
Map Setup Page (Weather Category)
Map Setup Page (WX Report Category)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Restoring default weather data for the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘Weather’ or ‘WX Reports’ ’.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather product.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) With ‘Restore Default’ or ‘Restore All Map Defaults’ selected, press the ENT
Key.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the restored settings.
218
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Viewing legends for displayed weather products:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key to access the Map Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the
ENT Key to display the Weather Legend Window.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to view the desired weather legend (Radar, Fronts,
METAR, AIRMET, Turbulence Forecast, Icing Forecast, or Other).
4) With ‘DONE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to return to the Map Page.
Or:
1) From the Weather (WX) Page press the LEGEND Softkey to display the
Weather Legend Window.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to view the desired weather legend (Radar, Fronts,
METAR, AIRMET, Turbulence Forecast, Icing Forecast, or Other).
3) Press the FMS Joystick, CLR Key, or LEGEND Softkey to return to the
Weather (WX) Page.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
219
Additional
Features
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Planning
Animating SiriusXM weather:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key to access the Map Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Animate Weather’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) To stop animation, press the MENU Key again, turn or move the FMS
Joystick to select ‘Stop Animation’, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Select the Weather (WX) Page.
2) Using the FMS Joystick select either the ‘NEXRAD Radar’ or ‘Satellite
Mosaic’ weather product.
3) Select the ANIMATE Softkey to begin animation.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Animate Weather’ and press the ENT Key to begin animation.
4) To stop animation, deselect the ANIMATE Softkey.
Or:
Press the MENU Key, turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Stop
Animation’, and press the ENT Key.
DATA LINK WEATHER (FIS-B)
The supported GDL radios are designed to receive, process, and output traffic (ADS-B
air-to-air, and TIS-B traffic information), and weather (Flight Information Service-Broadcast
(FIS-B)) information to the G3X system through an RS-232 serial connection. As a UAT
receiver, the FIS-B radios can receive and, when connected to the G3X, display Flight
Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) weather products as well as traffic.
FIS-B is a subscription-free weather service that is broadcast by Ground Based Transceivers
(GBTs) over the 978 MHz UAT frequency band as part of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Transportation System (NextGen). To receive FIS-B weather information, the FIS-B radio
must be within range and line-of-sight of an operating GBT. Reception may be affected
by altitude, terrain, and other factors. Supported FIS-B weather products include METARs,
TAFs, NEXRAD (Regional and CONUS (Combined)), AIRMETs, SIGMETs, PIREPs, and Winds
and Temperatures Aloft. Other products include NOTAMs and TFRs. Only one display in a
multiply-display installation may be configured to show FIS-B weather information. It is
recommended that the FIS-B radio be connected to the MFD in a multiple-display system.
Switching Weather Sources:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘WEATHER’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page.
Or
1) From the Weather Page press SETUP Softkey.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
3) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
220
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Viewing FIS-B Weather product Status:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Data Link Information’ and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the WEATHER Softkey, to view the age in hours:minutes of each
weather product.
Or:
1) From the Weather Page, press the INFO Softkey.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
When a FIS-B weather product is active on a map, the age of the data is displayed
on the screen in the lower left corner. The age of the product is based on the time
difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS
time. Weather products are broadcast at specific intervals (see broadcast interval in
the table below).
Flight
Planning
FIS-B weather broadcasts are updated regularly and may take approximately
ten minutes to transmit all available weather data. Therefore, weather data is not
immediately available. No pilot action is required to receive FIS-B weather information.
Weather product status can be viewed on the dedicated Weather Page,or the Data Link
Page from the Tools menu.
GPS
Navigation
FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
CNS
Interface
Viewing Ground Station Status:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Data Link Information’ and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the STATIONS Softkey, to view ground station(s) status (Active/
Inactive), bearing, and distance.
Or:
1) From the Weather Page, press the INFO Softkey.
2) Press the STATIONS Softkey, to view ground station(s) status bearing and
distance.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
221
If, for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the Expiration Time
intervals (see table), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display.
This ensures that only data that is consistent with FIS-B broadcast data is displayed.
If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
displayed changes to yellow. The system displays dashes instead of a product age
when a product has expired. If a weather product is not available or has not been
received, the system displays ‘N/A’ instead of a product age.
The table below shows the FIS-B weather expiration time and the broadcast interval.
The broadcast interval represents the interval at which FIS-B GBTs broadcast new
signals that may or may not contain new weather data. It does not represent the rate
at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the FIS-B radio.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
FIS-B Products
Expiration
Time
Update Interval
(Minutes)
Broadcast
Interval
(Minutes)
15
NEXRAD Composite
Reflectivity (CONUS)
60 minutes
~5 minutes precipitation
mode
10 minutes for clear air
NEXRAD Composite
Reflectivity (Regional)
60 minutes
As Available
2.5
METAR
8 hours
1 minute (where available),
As Available otherwise
5
TAF
12 hours
8 hours
10
AIRMET
12 hours
As Available
5
SIGMET
12 hours
As Available, then at 15
minute intervals for 1 hour
5
PIREP
8 hours
As Available
10
12 hours
12 hours
10
12 hours
As Available
10
Winds and
Temperatures Aloft
NOTAM (D)/FDC
(Including TFRs)
Weather Product Timing
222
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
The display of radar coverage is always active when NEXRAD is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are
indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability may exists in these areas, but it is not
active or is off-line. When Regional Radar is selected, areas outside the current region
are also shown in grayish-purple shading.
CNS
Interface
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This
data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The
display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level.
EIS
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and
dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current
radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data, it should
be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD data or any radar
data to maneuver in or near areas of hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an earlywarning capacity of pre-departure and enroute evaluation.
Flight
Instruments
NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of multiple high-resolution Doppler
radar sites that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data
provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and
selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250
nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network provides important
information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
System
Overview
NEXRAD
NEXRAD Abnormalities
AFCS
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some, but
not all, of those include:
Annun/Alerts
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust (chaff) which can cause alterations in radar
scans
Appendix
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
223
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Poor reception from Ground Based Transceivers (GBTs) can cause portions of the
received radar imagery to not be displayed
NEXRAD Limitations
Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but not all, are
listed for the user’s awareness:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine
cloud layers or precipitation characteristics (hail vs. rain). For example, it is not
possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An
individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges, and
has no information about storms directly over the site.
NEXRAD Intensity
Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reflectivity)
measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). “Reflectivity” (designated by the letter Z) is the
amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. The dBZ values increase
as returned signal strength increases. Precipitation intensity is displayed using colors
corresponding to the dBZ values.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Data
Index
Appendix
RADAR Legend
224
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
EIS
FIS-B weather provides two different Radar products, CONUS and Regional. The
system can display each individually or a composite (COMBINED). When Regional
Radar is displayed, only precipitation for your current region is displayed. The subdued
(grayish-purple colored) area represents the area not covered by the regional radar
product. When Combined radar data is viewed, Regional Radar data is displayed on
top of CONUS data and the time shown in the lower left corner is associated with
Regional Radar data only.
System
Overview
FIS-B Radar Products
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
FIS-B Radar (Regional) (Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
FIS-B Radar (CONUS) (Split-Screen)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
FIS-B Radar (Combined) (Split-Screen)
AFCS
Winds Aloft
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
225
Index
The wind barbs always point in the direction that the wind is coming from. The wind
speed is depicted using flags at the end of the wind barb. A short wind flag is 5 knots,
a long wind flag is 10 knots, and a triangle flag is 50 knots.
Appendix
Winds Aloft are displayed using wind barbs or a wind streamline depending on
the selected range. The wind barbs indicate wind speed and direction. The wind
streamline indicates wind direction with arrows.
Annun/Alerts
Winds Aloft data shows the forecasted wind speed and direction in 3,000-foot
increments up to 39,000 feet MSL.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
Winds Aloft Data (Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
Wind Direction
Calm
15 Knots
5 Knots
20 Knots
Wind Flag
Flight
Planning
10 Knots
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Winds Barbs
Temperatures Aloft
Temperature Aloft data shows the forecasted temperatures aloft in 3,000-foot
increments up to 39,000 feet MSL. For altitudes 18,000 feet and above the relative
ISA temperature is also shown. Temperatures are color coded with temperatures near
and below freezing are shown as shades of blue, green for temperatures just above
freezing and shades of orange are used for warmer temperatures.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
50 Knots
Index
Temperatures Aloft
226
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
METARs and TAFs
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text.
Flight
Planning
Changing METAR and TAF text:
1) Using the Map Pointer, select the desired METAR and press the ENT Key; or
from the Waypoint (WPT) Page press the WEATHER Softkey. The Weather
Information Page is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key.
a) Select ‘Show Decoded Text’ or ‘Show Raw Text’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) Select ‘Change Text Size’ and press the ENT Key.
b) Select ‘Small’, ‘Medium’, or ‘Large’ and press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
METAR and TAF text data is displayed on the Map Page and the Weather (WX) Page.
An abbreviated version can be viewed by panning over the METAR flag. Pressing the
ENT Key will display additional information. METAR and TAF data can be displayed as
raw or decoded text.
CNS
Interface
TAF (Terminal Area Forecast) is the standard format for 24-hour weather forecasts.
TAFs may contain some of the same code as METAR data. It typically forecasts
significant weather changes, temporary changes, probable changes, and expected
changes in weather conditions.
EIS
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report) is an international code used for
reporting weather observations. METARs are updated hourly or as needed. METARs
typically contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain
information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. If METAR data
is available for an airport, a color-coded flag is shown next to the airport.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation
database service area.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
227
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 feet AGL and visibility greater than 5
miles)
Flight
Instruments
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1000-3000 feet AGL and/or visibility 3-5 miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 feet AGL and/or visibility 1 mile to less
than 3 miles)
EIS
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 feet AGL or visibility less than 1 mile)
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine
flight conditions
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
METAR Legend
METAR Selected With Map
Pointer
AIRMETS
An AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) can be especially helpful for
pilots of light aircraft that have limited flight capability or instrumentation. An AIRMET
must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least 3,000 square miles at any one
time. AIRMETs are routinely issued for six-hour periods and are amended as necessary
due to changing weather conditions. AIRMETs are displayed as colored, dashed lines.
SIGMETs
A SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) advises of weather that is
potentially hazardous to all aircraft. In the contiguous United States, the following
items are covered: severe icing, severe or extreme turbulence, volcanic ash, dust storms,
and sandstorms that lower visibility to less than three statute miles.
228
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
A SIGMET is widespread and must affect or be forecast to affect an area of at least
3,000 square miles. SIGMETs are displayed as a yellow-dashed line.
System
Overview
A Convective SIGMET is issued for the following conditions: thunderstorms, isolated
severe thunderstorms, embedded thunderstorms, hail at the surface, and tornadoes.
EIS
CNS
Interface
AIRMET Selected With Map
Pointer
GPS
Navigation
AIRMET/SIGMET Legend
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFR)
Flight
Planning
CAUTION: The Graphical Depiction of TFR data is approximated.
Hazard
Avoidance
Temporary Flight Restrictions, or TFRs, temporarily restrict all aircraft from entering
the selected airspace unless a waiver has been issued. TFRs are routinely issued for
activities such as sporting events, dignitary visits, military depots, and forest fires. TFRs
are represented as an area highlighted by red (active) or yellow (not yet active).
Additional
Features
AFCS
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction TFR information. Always confirm TFR information through official
sources such as Flight Service Stations of Air Traffic Control.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
TFR Data
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
229
PIREPs
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular
route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic
Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain unforecast
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) (blue) or Urgent (UUA)
(yellow).
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
Urgent (UUA)
PIREP
Flight
Planning
Routine (UA)
PIREP Selected
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
PIREP Data
230
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
231
Hazard
Avoidance
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Switching Weather Sources:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘WEATHER’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page.
Or
1) From the Weather Page press SETUP Softkey.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather source (AUTO,
XM, or GDL FIS-B). The default is ‘AUTO’ which will use XM over GDL FIS-B
if both are available.
3) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
previous page
CNS
Interface
FIS-B Weather Products can be displayed on the Map Page and individually on the
Weather (WX) Page.
EIS
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather
product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather
data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data
link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated weather
product age.
Flight
Instruments
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained with in
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions.
System
Overview
USING FIS-B WEATHER PRODUCTS
The setup menu for the Map Page controls the map range settings above which
weather products are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed
from the map. The menu also provides a means for enabling/disabling display of
‘Airmets’, ‘Sigmets’, ‘Weather Data’, and/or ‘NEXRAD’ on the Map Page.
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the
display on the Weather Page or the Map Page:
• SIGMETs
• METARs
• AIRMETs
• TFRs
Additional information is also available for PIREPs on the Weather Page (not
displayed on the Map Page):
Viewing FIS-B Weather products on the Map Page:
1) Select the Map Page.
2) Select the WEATHER Softkey to display the FIS-B weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Show Weather’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the Map Pointer.
4) Use the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired weather product with the
Map Pointer.
5) With the desired weather product highlighted, press the ENT Key to get
detailed information (if available).
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Viewing FIS-B Weather products on the Weather (WX) Page:
1) From the WX Page press the FMS Joystick to highlight the weather product
field.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select and automatically display the desired
weather product.
3) If necessary, move the FMS Joystick to highlight the type field and turn the
FMS Joystick to scroll through a list of available options.
4) Press the PAN MAP Softkey to get abbreviated information about the
selected weather product or map feature (if available).
232
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
With the desired weather product selected press the ENT Key to get
detailed information (if available).
System
Overview
5)
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Detailed Weather Product Information
(Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Setting up and customizing FIS-B weather data for the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Weather’ from the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather product.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each product (On/Off,
Auto, range settings).
6) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the changed settings.
GPS
Navigation
NOTE: The Map Setup Menu may display the weather category as: ‘Weather’
and ‘WX Reports’ or ‘XM Weather’ and ‘XM WX Reports’ or ‘FIS-B Weather’
depending on the currently configured weather source(s).
CNS
Interface
Abbreviated Weather Product Information
(Split-Screen)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Map Setup Page (FIS-B Weather)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
233
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Restoring default weather data for the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘Weather’.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired weather product.
5) Press the MENU Key.
6) With ‘Restore Default’ or ‘Restore All Map Defaults’ selected, press the ENT
Key.
7) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page with the restored settings.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Viewing legends for displayed weather products:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key to access the Map Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the
ENT Key to display the Weather Legend Window.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to view the desired weather legend (Radar, METAR,
or AIRMET).
4) With ‘DONE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to return to the Map Page.
Or:
1) From the Weather (WX) Page press the LEGEND Softkey to display the
Weather Legend Window.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to view the desired weather legend (Radar, METAR,
or AIRMET).
3) Press the FMS Joystick, CLR Key, or LEGEND Softkey to return to the
Weather (WX) Page.
Index
Appendix
Animating FIS-B weather:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key to access the Map Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Animate Weather’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) To stop animation, press the MENU Key again, turn or move the FMS
Joystick to select ‘Stop Animation’, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
234
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
2)
Using the FMS Joystick select either the ‘NEXRAD Radar Combined’ or
‘NEXRAD Radar Regional Only’ weather product.
3)
Select the ANIMATE Softkey to begin animation.
Flight
Instruments
Select the Weather (WX) Page.
System
Overview
1)
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
4)
EIS
b) Select ‘Animate Weather’ and press the ENT Key to begin animation.
To stop animation, deselect the ANIMATE Softkey.
CNS
Interface
Or:
Press the MENU Key, turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Stop
Animation’, and press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
Viewing FIS-B NOTAMs:
1) From the Waypoints Page press NOTAMS Softkey.
2) If needed, scroll up or down using the FMS Joystick.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
FIS-B WX/NOTAM
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
235
7.2 TERRAIN
WARNING: Do not use Terrain information for primary terrain avoidance.
Terrain information is intended only to enhance situational awareness.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
EIS
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside the installed
terrain database coverage area.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
NOTE: Terrain depicted in the Profile View is always “ahead” of the aircraft,
and will change as ground track changes.
The Terrain Page displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft
position and altitude with reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies.
Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the database. Terrain and
obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should
never be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database.
No terrain and obstacle information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
The G3X GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude of the aircraft.
Aircraft GPS altitude is derived from satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted
to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine
terrain and obstacle proximity. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite
geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter
settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position
and altitude, the Terrain feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and
obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. GPS position and GPSMSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the
surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous
terrain and obstacle conditions.
Alert windows appear on all pages (except the Terrain (TER) Page) to inform the
pilot of proximity to the terrain and obstacles, as well as an unsafe descent rate. These
alerts depend on user-defined parameters in the Terrain Page setup.
236
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Terrain is integrated within Synthetic Vision (when active) to provide land contours
(colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display), large water
features, towers, obstacles over 200’ AGL, as well as visual and auditory alerts to
indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight
path. Synthetic Vision terrain information is displayed in red and yellow shading on the
PFD. Refer to section 8.1 (Synthetic Vision) for more information.
System
Overview
SYNTHETIC VISION
TERRAIN INFORMATION
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Enabling/Disabling Terrain Shading on the Map Page:
From the Map Page with the VFR Map displayed, press the TERRAIN
Softkey.
Or:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Terrain Shading’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
The areas of the terrain shaded red are predicted to be within 100 feet below or
above the aircraft. The yellow terrain areas are between the user-defined Caution
Elevation and 100 feet below the aircraft. By default, the Caution Elevation is 1,000
feet; therefore, the areas in yellow are between 1,000 feet and 100 feet below the
aircraft. The black areas are further than the Caution Elevation. A projected point of
impact is marked with an “X” symbol.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
237
TERRAIN VIEWS
Two views are displayed on the Terrain (TER) Page: the Map View, and the Profile
View.
Press the MAP or PROFILE Softkeys to toggle between views (split-screen only).
Yellow Terrain is
Between the Userdefined Caution
Elevation and
100 ft Below the
Aircraft
Red Terrain is above
the aircraft, or
within 100 ft below
the aircraft.
Obstacle
Potential Impact Point
Terrain Legend
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain (TER) Page (Map View) (Split-Screen)
Index
Appendix
Terrain (TER) Page (Profile View) (Split-Screen)
238
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Potential
Impact
Points
GPS
Navigation
Obstacle Location
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
WARNING: Red
obstacle is above or
within 100’ below
current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow
obstacle is between
100’ and 1000’
(default) below current
aircraft altitude
Flight
Planning
Unlighted
Lighted Obstacle
Obstacle
< 1000’ > 1000’ < 1000’ > 1000’
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
CNS
Interface
Each obstacle is labeled with the altitude of the top of the obstacle, or Mean Sea
Level (MSL). Each obstacle also lists, in parentheses, the actual height of the obstacle,
or Above Ground Level (AGL).
EIS
Standard aeronautical chart symbols are used for lighted or unlighted obstacles
taller than 200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL). Refer to the Obstacle Icons legend
below.
Flight
Instruments
Obstacles are shown on the Terrain Page at or below the map range of 12 nm.
Obstacles are also shown on the Map Page when the map range is set to 3 nm or
below.
System
Overview
OBSTACLE INFORMATION
Terrain Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
239
TERRAIN SETTINGS
Use the terrain settings to set levels for terrain alerts as well as obstacles in or
near your flight path.
• Caution Elevation—The G3X will provide an alert if the terrain or obstacle is
within the default Caution Elevation or user-defined Caution Elevation.
• Look Ahead Time—Determines the maximum time when an alert annunciation
occurs. For example, if 120 seconds is selected, the G3X provides an alert up to
120 seconds before you reach the terrain or obstacle.
• Alert Sensitivity—The three Alert Sensitivity settings (Terrain, Obstacle, and
Descent Rate) determine what level of alerts are annunciated. The G3X defaults
to ‘High’ sensitivity, which annunciates all red and yellow alerts at the time set in
Look Ahead Time. ‘Medium’ sensitivity annunciates all of the red and the highest
priority of yellow alerts. ‘Low’ only annunciates red alerts. ‘Off’ disables the alert.
Accessing the terrain settings:
1) On the Terrain Page, press the SETTINGS Softkey.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to make changes to the highlighted field.
4) With ‘Done’ highlighted press the ENT Key, or press the CLR Key to accept
the changes and exit the Terrain Setup window.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Terrain Setup
240
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Arrows indicate the terrain is
outside the Synthetic Vision
field of view.
CNS
Interface
Terrain and obstacle annunciations appear on the PFD and PFD Page in the upper
left corner of the Attitude Indicator. Arrows are depicted on the terrain and obstacle
annunciations if terrain is outside the Synthetic Vision field of view.
EIS
If the Terrain Page is not displayed, a pop-up alert appears in the lower left corner of
the page. The Range Rings on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/
nautical mile. Press the CLR Key to acknowledge the pop-up and/or aural alert.
Flight
Instruments
Terrain, Obstacle, and Descent Rate Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
parameters that are set within the software algorithms. Terrain alerts typically employ
a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is issued, visual
annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. When the
aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destination airport an audible “Five
Hundred” altitude reminder occurs.
System
Overview
TERRAIN ALERTS
Hazard
Avoidance
Terrain Annunciation on PFD
Additional
Features
AFCS
Enabling/Disabling terrain alerts:
From the Terrain Page, press the DISABLE Softkey.
Or:
1) From the Terrain Page, press the MENU Key to access the Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Disable Alerts’ or ‘Enable
Alerts’ and press the ENT Key. Disabling terrain alerts is only temporary.
Terrain alerts are automatically enabled when the unit is powered on.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
241
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Terrain Page - Alerts Disabled
(Split-Screen)
AURAL ALERTS
• “Five Hundred”—when the aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destination airport.
The following aural terrain alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
parameters that are set within the software algorithms, and are dependent on
the sensitivity level set in the Terrain Setup Menu.
Alert Severity
Terrain
Obstacle
Descent Rate
Caution
“caution, terrain”
“caution, terrain
ahead”
“caution, obstacle”
“caution, obstacle
ahead”
“caution, sink
rate”
Warning
“terrain ahead! pull
up!”
“terrain! terrain! pull
up! pull up!”
“obstacle ahead! pull
up!”
“obstacle! obstacle!
pull up! pull up!”
“sink rate, pull
up!”
“pull up!”
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Terrain Page - Alerts Enabled
(Split-Screen)
Aural Alerts Summary
242
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
243
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Pop-up Alert
PFD Page Terrain Alerts
7.3 TRAFFIC SYSTEMS
TRAFFIC SOURCE
The G3X is compatible with three different traffic sources; TIS-A traffic via a Garmin
Mode S Transponder, TAS via a GTS 800, or ADS-B/TIS-B traffic via a compatible ADS-B
device. When the G3X Touch system is configured with both a Mode S transponder
capable of receiving TIS-A traffic and a compatible device capable of receiving ADS-B/
TIS-B traffic the G3X will automatically switch between traffic sources. The following
conditions describe the traffic display logic.
• If the GTX is not receiving TIS-A traffic data, GDL ADS-B traffic will be displayed.
• If the GDL is receiving both air-to-air ADS-B traffic data and ground uplink TIS-B
traffic, then the GDL ADS-B traffic will be displayed.
• If the GTX is receiving TIS-A traffic, and the GDL is not receiving ground uplink
TIS-B traffic, then GTX TIS-A traffic will be displayed.
The current traffic source is annunciated in the upper left hand corner of the Traffic
Page (TRF).
Description
Displaying TIS-A traffic from a Mode
S transponder.
Displaying ADS-B traffic from a GTX
Annun/Alerts
Additional
Features
Traffic Source
AFCS
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Appendix
Displaying ADS-B/TIS-B traffic from
a GDL
Index
Displaying TAS traffic from a GTS 800
Traffic Source Annunciation
244
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
The following are the traffic receivers in order of priority:
- GTS 800 device
EIS
- GTX 335/335R/345/345R/35R/45R device
Flight
Instruments
The G3X supports multiple traffic receivers and automatically prioritizes these
devices.
System
Overview
TRAFFIC PRIORITIZATION
- GDL device receiving both air-to-air and TIS-B
CNS
Interface
- GTX 23ES/GTX 330ES device receiving TIS-A
- GDL device receiving only air-to-air
Flight
Planning
TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS-A) (OPTIONAL)
GPS
Navigation
The G3X Touch is capable of device switching in the event that a device becomes
unavailable.
The G3X supports Traffic input from a compatible Garmin Mode S transponder.
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Refer to Appendix E for general information regarding Traffic Information Service (TIS-A).
Additional
Features
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic system status is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Map Page.
AFCS
System Status
Traffic Icon
Annun/Alerts
Operating
No Traffic Data Available
Appendix
If a Traffic Icon is not displayed, check the Map Page range and/or
theTraffic Display Range on the Map Set Up menu.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
Traffic Modes
245
TRAFFIC SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is shown on the G3X according to TCAS symbology, graphically shown on the
Traffic Page (Optional), Map Page, and in the Traffic Warning Window.
A Proximity Advisory (PA) indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet
and is within a 5 nm range, but is still not considered a threat.±
A Traffic Advisory (TA) symbol appears as a solid yellow circle. All other traffic within
range is shown as a hollow white diamond. Altitude deviation from own aircraft
altitude is shown above the target symbol if traffic is above own aircraft altitude, and
below the symbol if they are below own aircraft altitude. Altitude trend is shown as an
up arrow (>+500 ft/min), down arrow (<-500 ft/min), or no symbol if less than 500 ft/
min rate in either direction.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
TIS-A Symbol
Description
Flight
Planning
Non-Threat Traffic
Hazard
Avoidance
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Additional
Features
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Traffic Symbols
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
The G3X displays traffic symbolically on the Map Page, and the Traffic Warning
Window (Inset Map) in the lower left corner of the display(s).
When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically occur:
• The Traffic Warning Window (Inset Map) is enabled and displays traffic.
• A flashing black-on-yellow ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation will appear in the upper right
corner of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs
are detected in the area.
246
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Inset Map (Traffic
Warning Window)
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic Alerts
Additional
Features
Arrows are depicted on the traffic message if traffic is outside the Synthetic Vision
field of view. The arrow points in the direction of the traffic.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Traffic Outside the Synthetic Vision Field of View
(PFD)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
247
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Voice Alerts
A traffic voice alert is generated whenever the number of Traffic Advisories on the
G3X screen increases from one scan to the next. Limiting Traffic Advisories only reduces
the “nuisance” alerting due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the first Traffic
Advisories appear on the TIS-A display, the user is alerted audibly. So long as a single
aircraft remains on the traffic display, no further voice alert is generated. If a second
(or more) aircraft appears on the screen, a new voice alert is sounded.
If the number of Traffic Advisories on the traffic display decreases and then increases,
a new voice alert is sounded. The traffic voice alert is also generated whenever traffic
becomes available. The following traffic voice alerts are available:
• “Traffic Not Available”—Traffic service is not available or out of range.
Enable/disable ‘Traffic Not Available’ voice alert:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Traffic N/A Alert field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Traffic Warning Window
When a traffic threat is imminent, the Traffic Warning Window is shown. The Traffic
Warning Window shows a small pop-up map in the lower left corner. The Range Rings
on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/nautical mile. Press the
CLR Key to remove the Traffic Warning Window.
NOTE: The Traffic Warning Window is disabled when the aircraft ground speed
is less than 30 knots or when on the approach leg of a route.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
• “Traffic”— Traffic alert received.
248
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic ground track is indicated on the G3X screen by a “target track vector,” a short
line shown in 45-degree increments, extending in the direction of target movement.
System
Overview
Traffic Ground Track
Flight
Instruments
Displaying Traffic Data
Traffic is displayed by default on the Map Page and the Traffic Warning Window.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Traffic Range
and Altitude
Separation using
Map Pointer
Traffic
Ground
Track
CNS
Interface
Displaying Traffic information using the map pointer:
1) With traffic displayed on the Map Page, press the FMS Joystick. The Map
Pointer is activated.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired traffic.
EIS
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when Synthetic Vision is enabled.
See the ‘Additional Features’ Section for more information.
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic
Warning
Window
Additional
Features
Traffic (Map Page)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
249
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Enabling/disabling traffic data on the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) If necessary, turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Map’ Category from the
horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Traffic Data’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ from the menu, and press the
ENT Key.
Or:
1) From the Map Page, press the TRAFFIC Softkey to enable or disable traffic.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Synthetic Vision display:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Hazard
Avoidance
DEDICATED TRAFFIC PAGE (TRF)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Displaying/Removing the Traffic Page:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Traffic Page field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Show’ or ‘Hide’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
250
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Disabling/Enabling the traffic alerts:
NOTE: Traffic alerts are reset to ‘enabled’ on the next power cycle.
2)
From the Traffic (TRF) Page touch the DISABLE Softkey to enable/disable
traffic alerts.
EIS
Display the dedicated Traffic (TRF) Page as described in the procedure
above.
Flight
Instruments
1)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Traffic Page
Full-Screen MFD
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
251
GARMIN GTS 800 TRAFFIC (OPTIONAL)
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for
traffic avoidance maneuvering. The GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is
intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No
avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS traffic information.
It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid
traffic.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems
require transponders of other aircraft to respond to system interrogations.
If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may
be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: TIS-A is disabled when TAS installed.
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight
crew situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped
aircraft. The system also provides visual and aural traffic alerts including voice
announcements to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with
Mode A or C transponders, and up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S
transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential can be
displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the GTS 800 is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of
intruding aircraft while monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information
to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend
for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The GTS 800 then calculates a closure
rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the
closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and aural alerting
is provided.
252
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Instruments
EIS
The GTS 800 surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own
altitude. Under ideal conditions, the GTS 800 unit scans transponder traffic up to 12
nm in the forward direction. The range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of
own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In areas of greater
transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance
System II) systems are detected, the GTS 800 automatically reduces its interrogation
transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from
other signals.
System
Overview
TAS surveillance Volume
CNS
Interface
TAS Symbology
Symbol
GPS
Navigation
The GTS 800 uses symbology to depict intruding traffic using the symbols shown
below.
Description
Flight
Planning
Traffic Advisory.
Traffic Advisory out of the selected display range. Displayed at outer range
ring at proper bearing.
Hazard
Avoidance
Proximity Advisory.
Additional
Features
Non-Threat Traffic.
AFCS
GTS 800 Traffic Symbols
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to
a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical
separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range
(off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative
bearing of the intruder.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
253
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates
the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not
considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for
traffic beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding
intruder symbol in hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is
preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates climbing or
descending traffic with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Relative Altitude
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Vertical trend arrow
Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
Flight IDs may also be displayed with traffic symbols; see the Flight IDs discussion in
this section for more information.
TAS ALERTS
When the GTS 800 detects a new TA, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information
about the bearing, relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that
triggered the TA. The announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would
indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately
four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing
for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map
instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative
altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.
254
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same
Altitude” (if within 200
feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten
Miles”, or “More than ten
miles”
EIS
TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
B
No
Annun/Alerts
No
AFCS
A
Additional
Features
Yes
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20
seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20
seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical
separation is within 600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15
seconds of separation.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
Hazard
Avoidance
A
TA Alerting Conditions
Flight
Planning
Intruder Altitude
Available
GPS
Navigation
The GTS 800 automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood
of nuisance TA alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system
uses Level A TA sensitivity when the groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA
sensitivity applies in all other conditions.
CNS
Interface
TA Alerting Conditions
Sensitivity
Level
Flight
Instruments
Relative Altitude
System
Overview
Bearing
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
255
Sensitivity
Level
Intruder Altitude
Available
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Yes
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
B
SYSTEM TEST
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30
seconds of vertical and horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30
seconds of horizontal separation and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical
separation is within 800 feet.
TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system test during flight.
The GTS 800 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating
normally. The test takes ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a
test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the Traffic Page. If the system test passes,
the aural announcement “TAS System Test Passed” is heard, otherwise the system
announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic
system enters Standby Mode.
Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the FMS Joystick to the Traffic Page.
2) Press the RNG Key to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern
to be displayed during test.
3) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
4) With SELF-TEST highlighted press the ENT Key to start the self-test.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
TA Alerting Conditions
Traffic Page Menu
256
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
EIS
After power-up, the GTS 800 is in Standby Mode. The GTS 800 must be in Operating
Mode for traffic to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode
to Operating Mode as necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into
Standby Mode.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The GTS 800 automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE
mode eight seconds after takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions
from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
System
Overview
OPERATION
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
enroute phase of flight.
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above
and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
257
FLIGHT ID DISPLAY
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on
the Traffic Page. When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the
corresponding traffic symbol on the Traffic Page when this option is enabled.
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
TRAFFIC PAGE
The Traffic Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. It is the primary page for viewing traffic
information. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Key, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner
of the page.
Traffic
Source
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Additional
Features
Altitude/
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic
Advisory,
700’ above,
Climbing
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic,
500’ above,
Descending
Index
Appendix
Flight ID
Traffic Page Full-Screen MFD (GTS 800)
258
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
18,000 FT
Mode A/C
UAT
UAT
1090 ES
Annun/Alerts
ATC
UAT
AFCS
RADAR
GPS
Navigation
1090 ES
10,000 FT
CNS
Interface
1090 ES
UAT
RADAR
Composite
GPS
EIS
ADS-B (Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast) is a surveillance technology
deployed across the United States as the cornerstone of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Transportation System (NextGen). ADS-B enables improved surveillance services, both
air-to-air and air-to-ground, especially in areas where radar is ineffective due to terrain
or where it is impractical or cost prohibitive. Initial applications of air-to-air ADS-B are
for “advisory” use only, enhancing a pilot’s visual acquisition of other nearby ADS-B
equipped aircraft either when airborne or on the airport surface.
Flight
Instruments
The ADS-B receiver is a receive-only data link radio with on-board GPS, 978 MHz
(Universal Access Transceiver frequency band), and 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090 ES)
receivers. It is designed to receive, process, and output traffic (ADS-B air-to-air, and TIS-B
traffic information), and weather (Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B)) information
to the G3X Touch system through an RS-232 serial connection or Bluetooth connection.
System
Overview
DATA LINK TRAFFIC (OPTIONAL)
ADS-B
Ground
Station
Appendix
ADS-B System
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
259
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
For the purpose of distinguishing between levels of ADS-B service, there are three
classifications of aircraft or system capability; ADS-B In, ADS-B Out, and ADS-B
participating. ADS-B In refers to the capability to receive ADS-B information. ADS-B
Out refers to the capability to transmit ADS-B information. ADS-B participating refers
to the capability to both send and receive ADS-B information. Aircraft lacking either
ADS-In, ADS-B Out, or both ADS-B capabilities may also be referred to as ADS-B nonparticipating aircraft.
Currently, rule-compliant ADS-B Out capability in the United States requires a
TSO’ed SBAS-enabled GPS, such as a Garmin GPS 400W or similar, and one of two
possible data links: 1090 ES transponder or a 978 MHz UAT. Either data link system
is capable of transmitting the aircraft’s position, velocity, identification, and other
information every second to compatible aircraft and ground stations called Ground
Based Transceivers (GBTs).
Because 1090 ES transponders and UATs operate on different frequencies, aircraft
not similarly equipped cannot transmit/receive data link information directly to/from
each other. Instead, operation within range of a GBT is required to receive data link
information on both frequencies. The ADS-B receiver is unique in its ADS-B In capability
since it can receive data link information from both 1090 ES transponders and UATs.
Thus, the ADS-B receiver receives traffic information directly from any ADS-B Out
aircraft within range as well as the rebroadcast of ADS-B information from any nearby
GBT. This rebroadcast is called Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
(ADS-R) and is automatically triggered by the detection of an ADS-B participating
aircraft within the service volume of the GBT. As a 978 MHz (UAT frequency) receiver,
the ADS-B receiver can receive both the Traffic Information Service-Broadcast (TIS-B)
and Flight Information Service-Broadcast (FIS-B) provided in conjunction with ADS-R
services when in range of a GBT.
FIS-B service is provided continuously, but ADS-R including TIS-B will only be
broadcast by a GBT when an ADS-B participating aircraft is within the GBT’s defined
service volume. In this case, a GBT will only rebroadcast TIS-B information relative
to the ADS-B participating aircraft. Only traffic that is within 15 nm lateral
and 3,500’ vertical of the ADS-B participating aircraft is provided in the
broadcast. Non-participating traffic aircraft located farther than 15 nm laterally and
3,500’ vertically from the participating aircraft is are excluded from the information
transmitted by the GBT.
260
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Viewing the ADS-B Receiver Traffic and Weather Status:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Data Link’ and press the ENT
Key.
3) To view weather status select the WEATHER Softkey.
Or
1) From the dedicated Traffic Page (TRF) select the INFO Softkey.
2) To view weather status select the WEATHER softkey.
CNS
Interface
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to
accurately depict all of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack
of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from
aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on
the display.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision
avoidance resolution advisories and does not, under any circumstances or
conditions, relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
Flight
Instruments
Since the ADS-B receiver is a receive-only device, even when used onboard an aircraft
equipped with a qualifying GPS and 1090 ES transponder, a GBT may not identify it as
an ADS-B participating aircraft. The squitter of some 1090 ES transponders must be
configured to communicate that the aircraft has 978 MHz receive capability in order to
be identified as an ADS-B participating aircraft.
System
Overview
TIS-B traffic information includes non-participating aircraft detected by ATC
surveillance radar. As TIS-B data is derived from ATC surveillance radar data, TIS-B
traffic position updates typically occur every three to thirteen seconds. Therefore,
TIS-B traffic may be displayed with degraded positional accuracy. Aircraft
without operating transponders are invisible to TIS-B. Aircraft operating
outside of the ATC radar coverage area are also not displayed.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
261
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic system status is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Map Page
as well as the lower left corner of the dedicated Traffic Page.
System Status
Full traffic services available for an
ADS-B participating aircraft (ground
linked TIS-B, FIS-B and ADS-R, and Air-toAir ADS-B). If you are using the ADS-B
on a non-participating aircraft you may
still see this when you are within the
service area of any participating aircraft.
As a non-participating aircraft you are
only receiving TIS-B traffic information
for traffic within 15 nm and 3,500’ of a
participating aircraft.
Traffic Icon
Limited traffic services available (may be
limited to Air-to-Air ADS-B)
No Traffic Data Available
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Traffic Modes
TRAFFIC DESCRIPTION
ADS-B traffic operation is similar to the TAS systems discussed previously, but ADS-B
adds additional symbology. The symbols used to display ADS-B traffic are shown in
the table below. The traffic identifier and altitude are displayed below the traffic symbol. A
small up or down arrow next to the traffic symbol indicates that the traffic is climbing
or descending at a rate of at least 500 feet per minute. The vector line that extends
from the traffic symbol is an indication of the intruder aircraft track. For directional
traffic symbols, the arrow head points in the direction of aircraft’s ground track.
262
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
Description
System
Overview
Symbol
Non-threat, non-directional airborne traffic
Flight
Instruments
Non-threat directional airborne Traffic with track vector. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track.
Non-directional airborne Proximity Advisory (PA). Proximity Advisories are
issued for any traffic within 6 nautical miles and +/- 1,200’.
EIS
CNS
Interface
Directional airborne Proximity Advisory (PA) with track vector. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track. Proximity Advisories are issued for any traffic
within 6 nautical miles and +/- 1,200’.
Non-directional airborne Traffic Advisory (TA)
GPS
Navigation
Non-directional off-scale airborne Traffic Advisory (TA). Displayed at outer
range ring at proper bearing.
Flight
Planning
Directional airborne Traffic Advisory (TA) with track vector. Points in the
direction of the aircraft track.
Hazard
Avoidance
Directional off-scale airborne Traffic Advisory (TA). Points in the direction of
the aircraft track.
*Ground traffic without directional information. Ground traffic is only
displayed when own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
Additional
Features
*Directional surface traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when own
aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
*Non-directional non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed
when own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
Appendix
ADS-B Traffic Symbology
Annun/Alerts
*Ground traffic is only displayed on the Map Page when the aircraft is on the ground or below 1,500 feet
AGL. Ground traffic is always displayed on the dedicated traffic page.
AFCS
*Directional non-aircraft ground traffic. Ground traffic is only displayed when
own aircraft is below 1,500 feet AGL or on the ground.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
263
Traffic Advisories (TA)
The GDL Device automatically adjusts its Traffic Advisory (TA) sensitivity level to
reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerts during various phases of flight. TAs are
issued for traffic when they are predicted to be within a specified volume of airspace
around your aircraft in a specified amount of time. The protected volume and time
interval varies based on the current geodetic altitude and groundspeed. Thus, the
protected volume of airspace increases with altitude and ground speed. Refer to the
following table for details.
Altitude
(Geodetic)
Below 5,000
5,000-10,000
10,000-20,000
20,000-42,000
Above 42,000
Look Ahead
Time (sec.)
30
40
45
48
48
Vertical
Separation (ft.)
+/-850
+/-850
+/-850
+/-850
+/-1,200
Horizontal
Separation (nm.)
.35
.55
.80
1.10
1.10
Traffic Advisories
The following Traffic symbols are displayed on the display when Synthetic Vision (SVX)
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for more information
about SVX.
ADS-B Symbol on the
PFD (SVX Only)
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Description
Annun/Alerts
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Appendix
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Index
Non-threat traffic
PFD ADS-B Symbology (SVX Only)
264
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
• “Traffic”—TIS-B/ADS-B traffic alert received.
EIS
If the number of Traffic Advisories on the traffic display decreases and then increases,
a new voice alert is sounded. The traffic voice alert is also generated whenever TIS-B
service becomes available. The traffic voice alerts are as follows:
Flight
Instruments
A traffic voice alert is generated whenever the number of Traffic Advisories on the
G3X display increases. Limiting Traffic Advisories only reduces the “nuisance” alerting
due to proximate aircraft. For example, when the first Traffic Advisories appear on the
display, the user is alerted audibly. So long as a single aircraft remains on the display,
no further voice alert is generated. If a second (or more) aircraft appears on the screen,
a new voice alert is sounded. Traffic Advisories can only be issued when the GDL
Device knows its own altitude and the altitude of the intruder aircraft.
System
Overview
TRAFFIC ALERTS (ADS-B TIS-B)
• “Traffic Not Available”—TIS-B/ADS-B service is not available or out of range.
Flight
Planning
Disabling/Enabling the traffic alerts:
NOTE: Traffic alerts are reset to ‘enabled’ on the next power cycle.
2)
From the Traffic (TRF) Page touch the DISABLE Softkey to enable/disable
traffic alerts.
Additional
Features
Display the dedicated Traffic (TRF) Page as described in the procedure
above.
Hazard
Avoidance
1)
Appendix
Press the EXIT Softkey or FMS Joystick to exit.
Annun/Alerts
6)
AFCS
Adjusting alert volume:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Sound’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Alert Volume’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired volume (0-10).
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
265
Traffic Warning Window
The Traffic Warning Window is shown, when the GDL Device issues a traffic advisory
(TA). The Traffic Warning Window shows a small pop-up map in the lower left corner.
The Range Rings on the pop-up alert are spaced every whole mile/kilometer/nautical
mile. Press the CLR Key to remove the Traffic Warning Window.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA
Traffic is displayed by default on the Map Page and in the Traffic Warning Window.
Traffic Symbol and Traffic Label (i.e., relative altitude, altitude trend and absolute
motion vectors) settings selects the maximum range at which traffic labels or symbols
are shown. Traffic Labels can also be turned off.
Traffic information is also displayed on the PFD when Synthetic Vision is enabled.
See the ‘Additional Features’ Section for more information.
Enabling/disabling traffic data on the Map Page:
1) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.
Or:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) If necessary, turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Traffic’ Category from
the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Traffic Data’.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘ON/OFF’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Customizing traffic data on the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) If necessary, turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Traffic’ Category from
the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Traffic Symbol’, or ‘Traffic Label’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘OFF’, ‘AUTO’ or range settings for Traffic
Symbol and Traffic Label, and press the ENT Key.
266
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Traffic
Information
Traffic
Symbol
Flight
Planning
Map
Pointer
Hazard
Avoidance
Traffic (Map Page)
Dedicated Traffic Page (TRF)
Appendix
Index
267
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
Displaying/Removing the Traffic Page:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Display’, and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Traffic Page field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Show’ or ‘Hide’.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
Additional
Features
NOTE: Traffic alerts and altitude filters can only be changed on the dedicated
Traffic Page (TRF). If the Traffic Page (TRF) is configured off voice alerts are
enabled and the altitude filter is automatically set to ‘Normal’
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
Traffic Range
and Altitude
Separation using
Map Pointer
Flight
Instruments
Displaying Traffic information using the map pointer:
1) With traffic displayed on the Map Page, press the FMS Joystick. The Map
Pointer is activated.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired traffic.
System
Overview
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Synthetic Vision display:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Hazard Avoidance
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
enroute phase of flight.
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet
above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the aircraft. Typically used during
descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Traffic
Advisory
Directional
Traffic, 2200
feet above
Traffic System
Status Receiving
Air-to-Air and
TIS-B Traffic
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Traffic
Source
Altitude/
Operating
Mode
Proximity
Advisory (PA),
400’ Below,
Climbing
Flight ID Display
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be displayed on the Traffic Page.
When a Flight ID or call sign is received, it will appear below the corresponding traffic
symbol when enabled.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Traffic Page
268
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Hazard Avoidance
System
Overview
Relative Altitude (in
this case 500 feet
above own aircraft)
Aircraft
Identification (tail
number or Flight
ID number)
Flight
Instruments
Altitude Trend (up
arrow indicates
climbing, down
arrow indicates
descending)
EIS
Traffic Absolute
Motion Vector
Example ADS-B Traffic Symbol
CNS
Interface
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
GPS
Navigation
On the Traffic Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
Motion Vectors
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Altitude/
Operating
Mode
Annun/Alerts
Traffic's
Predicated
Relative Location
in 60 seconds
Traffic’s
Predicated
Relative
Location in 60
seconds
Appendix
TragetTrend
Look-ahead
Time
Index
Traffic Page TargetTrend
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Planning
There are two pilot-selectable and mutually exclusive types of motion vectors, Absolute
and TargetTrend, which are differentiated by color and function. Absolute vectors are
white and indicate ground track as reported by the traffic. TargetTrend vectors are green
and indicate the flight path and position, relative to your aircraft, at which the traffic
will be after the passing of one of four predetermined look-ahead intervals. The end of
the TargetTrend vector indicates the traffic’s predicted location relative to your predicted
location at the end of the look-ahead time. For example, if traffic is ahead of you and
traveling along the same track but at a slower rate, the motion vector would point
opposite of its indicated direction of flight showing that you are overtaking the traffic.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
269
The TargetTrend look-ahead time interval is automatically adjusted from 30 seconds to
five minutes and corresponds to the traffic display range setting. The greater the range
setting, the longer the time interval and vise versa. Refer to the table below for more
details.
Traffic Page Range Ring Settings
.5nm to 2nm
2nm to 6nm
6nm to 12nm
12nm to 40nm
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hazard Avoidance
TargetTrend Look-ahead
30 seconds
60 seconds
2 minutes
5 minutes
Motion vector selection is made from the Traffic Page Menu by enabling/disabling
TargetTrend. Absolute vectors are selected by default and are replaced when TargetTrend
is enabled.
Enabling/Disabling TargetTrend:
On the Traffic Page, press the TREND Softkey.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
TragetTrend Look-ahead
270
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
Additional features of the system include the following:
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, FliteCharts, and ChartView in electronic form, it is still advisable to carry another source of charts on board the
aircraft.
• Synthetic Vision (SVX)
CNS
Interface
• SafeTaxi®f
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
GPS
Navigation
• Airport Directory Data (AOPA , AC-U-KWIK, etc.)
• SiriusXM Radio entertainment (Optional)
• Electronic Checklists (Optional)
Flight
Planning
• Flight Data Logging
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
271
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
The optional SiriusXM Radio entertainment audio feature offers more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports.
Annun/Alerts
The Airport Directory contains airport statistics such as pattern altitudes, noise
abatement information, FBO phone numbers, hours of operation, local attractions,
ground transportation, lodging, and services.
AFCS
ChartView and FlightCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedure charts.
Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either
ChartView or FliteCharts may be used at one time, but not both. For example, if
ChartView is on the SD Card and FliteCharts is on the system’s internal memory,
ChartView will always take precedence (FliteCharts may be used once the SD Card
containing ChartView is ejected).
Additional
Features
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more
than 1000 airports in the United States.
Hazard
Avoidance
Synthetic Vision provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on the
PFD. Synthetic Vision imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to
the aircraft attitude, as well as the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or
during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data
on an SD data card. A 2 GB SD card can store over 1,000 hours of flight data or up to
1,000 files (whichever comes first).
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION (SVX)
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain,
obstacle, and traffic avoidance. Synthetic Vision is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain,
obstacles, or traffic.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Synthetic Vision is a visual enhancement to the G3X. Synthetic Vision depicts a
forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft.
Synthetic Vision information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD). The depicted
imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position,
and databases of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. Loss of any of the
required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause Synthetic Vision
to be disabled until the required data is restored.
The Synthetic Vision terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent
with those of the topographical map display), large water features, towers, and other
obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural features
on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries
are not displayed even if those features are found on the Navigation Map. The terrain
display also includes a north-south east-west grid with lines oriented with true north.
Terrain is integrated within Synthetic Vision to provide visual and auditory alerts to
indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight
path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the
accuracy or fidelity on which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain
or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated solely upon the use of the terrain or
obstacle data displayed by Synthetic Vision.
272
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
• Airport Signs
• Zero-Pitch Line
Flight
Instruments
• Flight Path Marker
System
Overview
The following Synthetic Vision enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Pathways
• Runway Display
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Synthetic Vision Imagery (PFD or PFD Page)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
273
Index
Activating and deactivating synthetic vision:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Synthetic Vision’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Appendix
Synthetic Vision is activated from the PFD or PFD Page Option Menu. When Synthetic
Vision is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced.
Annun/Alerts
SYNTHETIC VISION OPERATION
Zero Pitch
Line (ZPL)
Flight
Path
Marker
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Flight
Planning
Synthetic Vision on PFD
PATHWAYS
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course
and altitude deviation information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
NOTE: Pathways boxes may not be displayed for holding patterns, procedure
turns and certain portions of the flight plan being received from an external
GPS navigator.
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of
flight shown as colored rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical
flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet
tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box
width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. Other
than the descending portion of an ILS or WAAS GPS approach (starting from the leg
leading into the FAF), pathways boxes are shown at the level of the altitude bug.
Index
Appendix
Airport
Runway
274
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Selected Altitude
Pathways
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
Pathways (PFD or PFD Page)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Activating and deactivating pathways:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or the split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Pathways’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
Flight
Planning
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/
VNAV, and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational
awareness and should not be used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator,
and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when the selected
navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active
leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the
flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
GPS
Navigation
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending
on the route of flight and navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay
flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to the Magenta CDI.
A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An
inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a
white line drawn on the Navigation Map indicated an inactive leg.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
275
Departure and Enroute
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of
boxes with pointers at each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint.
Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of the flight plan if that segment is a
Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first active GPS
leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the
SVX field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward
this leg. While approaching the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the
number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the selected altitude for the
leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft
performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at
a level above the aircraft at the altitude selected.
Descent and Approach
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: During the final segment of an ILS or WAAS GPS approach, the pathways boxes automatically adjust to correspond with the localizer/glideslope
(ILS) or horizontal/vertical (GPS) deviation signals received from the external
navigator.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown
level at the selected altitude. Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude up to
the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended
vertical descent path or glideslope. From the vertical path descent or glideslope
intercept point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP)
along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at
the segment altitudes if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When
switching to the localizer inbound with LOC selected as the navigation source on the
CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glideslope.
If GPS is the selected navigation source on the HSI, the pathways boxes are magenta.
If LOC is the selected navigation source on the HSI, the pathways boxes are green for
the ILS. Pathways boxes are not displayed for segments such as heading legs or VOR
radials.
276
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Flight
Instruments
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-approach descents NOT displayed by pathway
EIS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Descending final
approach segment
displayed by pathway
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Pathways - Enroute, Descent, and Approach
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
277
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
The FPM may be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant
terrain or obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above
the FPM could indicate a potential conflict, even before a terrain alert is issued. However,
decisions regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
Annun/Alerts
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Vision feature is in operation. The FPM
represents the direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the
display, while the airplane symbol represents the aircraft heading.
AFCS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at
groundspeeds above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft
accounting for wind speed and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
Additional
Features
Pathways are displayed at the selected altitude upon activating the missed approach
on the external GPS navigator.
Hazard
Avoidance
Missed Approach
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Path
Marker
Airport
Runway
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Wind
Vector
Flight Path Marker (PFD or PFD Page)
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the
aircraft attitude with respect to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon,
particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high
altitudes.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Activating and deactivating the flight path marker:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Flight Path Marker’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
278
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Enabling/disabling traffic on the Synthetic Vision display:
1) From the full-screen PFD and/or split screen PFD Page, press the MENU
Key.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘TRAFFIC’ field.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
EIS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations. Traffic symbols are
displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be
displayed on the Synthetic Vision display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent
with that used for traffic displayed on the Inset Map or Map Page. If the traffic altitude
is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the Synthetic Vision display. For
more details refer to the Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) discussion in the Hazard
Avoidance section. Arrows are depicted on the traffic message if traffic is outside the
Synthetic Vision field of view.
Flight
Instruments
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the
Synthetic Vision display or may appear as a partial symbol.
System
Overview
TRAFFIC
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Traffic
Traffic
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Traffic Outside the Field of View
Appendix
Synthetic Vision Traffic (PFD)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
279
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on
the synthetic vision display. Airport Signs appear on the display when the aircraft is
approximately 15 nm from and airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport
signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft is approximately eight nautical
miles from the airport.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Airport Sign
without Identifier
(Between 8 nm
and 15 nm)
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Airport Sign
with Identifier
(Between 4.5 nm
and 8 nm)
Additional
Features
Airport Signs
AFCS
RUNWAYS
Annun/Alerts
WARNING: Do not use Synthetic Vision runway depictions as the sole means
for determining the proximity of the aircraft to the runway or for maintaining
the proper approach path angle during landing.
Index
Appendix
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database,
therefore, these runways are not displayed.
280
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the
surrounding terrain. All runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations
as defined in the database. In some situations, where threshold elevations differ
significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are displayed,
those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways
(those NOT aligned with the aircraft heading) are outlined in gray When an approach
for a specific runway is active, that runway appears brighter and is outlined with a
white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As
the aircraft gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and
centerlines are displayed.
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Hazard
Avoidance
Other
Runway on
Airport
Additional
Features
Airport Runways
AFCS
SYNTHETIC VISION TERRAIN AND OBSTACLE DATA
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
281
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading
displayed on the synthetic vision. In these cases, the conflict is outside the Synthetic
Vision field of view and the alert will have arrows indicating the direction of the alert.
Annun/Alerts
Terrain alerting on the synthetic vision display corresponds to the red and yellow
X symbols on the Inset Map and Navigation Map. For more detailed information
regarding Synthetic Vision Terrain and Obstacle Data, refer to the Hazard Avoidance
Section.
System
Overview
Terrain
Warning
Terrain
Caution
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Terrain
Annunciation
Flight
Instruments
Additional Features
Synthetic Vision Terrain Alerts
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic vision display by standard twodimensional tower symbols found on the Inset Map and Navigation Map. Obstacle
symbols appear in the perspective view with relative height above terrain and distance
from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset Map and Navigation Map display, obstacles on
the synthetic vision display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with
the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual terrain alert.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles
are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
Arrows indicate the
obstacle is outside the
Synthetic Vision field
of view.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Potential
Impact
Points
Obstacle Outside the Synthetic Vision Field of View
282
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Obstacle
Annunciation
Flight
Instruments
Obstacle
Caution
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Potential
Impact
Point
Hazard
Avoidance
Synthetic Vision Obstacle Alerts
Additional
Features
During unusual attitude conditions or when the terrain gradient is great enough
to completely fill the display, a brown (earth) or blue (sky) colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen is displayed to prevent the pilot from losing sight of the horizon.
AFCS
Blue Band
Annun/Alerts
Terrain Completely
Fills Display
Appendix
Index
Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
283
SYNTHETIC VISION FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two
dashed lines forming a V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent
the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Lines Depict
PFD Field
of View
Hazard
Avoidance
Synthetic Vision Field of View
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Configuring field of view:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Miscellaneous’ from the horizontal list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Field of View’.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
284
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports
at close range. When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail, the
map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, runway incursion “Hot Spots”,
and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. The SafeTaxi feature can be seen
on the Map Page and the Waypoint Page
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways
and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution
pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway
incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined by a red shaded area.
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways,
runways, and airport features. When panning over the airport, features such as runway
holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
System
Overview
8.2 SAFETAXI®
Flight
Planning
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
Additional
Features
Aircraft
Position
Hazard
Avoidance
Taxiway Identification
AFCS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
285
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Enabling/disabling SafeTaxi:
1) With the Map Page displayed, press the Menu Key. The Map Page Menu is
displayed.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Airport’ Category from the
horizontal list.
Annun/Alerts
SafeTaxi Depiction on the Map Page
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Safe Taxi’ Field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to access the menu options.
6)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT
Key.
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after
the expiration date. The Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current,
out of date, or not available. The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is
current when the SafeTaxi Expires date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has
expired, the SafeTaxi Expires date appears in yellow.
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date, and Expiration date of the
database cycle can also be found in the Main Menu, under ‘Database Information’.
The SafeTaxi database is provided by Garmin. Refer to Appendix C for instructions
on updating the SafeTaxi database.
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedure charts. The
MFD depiction displays the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of the
approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Index
Appendix
Additional
Features
AFCS
8.3 CHARTVIEW
Annun/Alerts
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a
period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is
disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing. When
turning on the system, the Powe-up Page displays the current status of the ChartView
database.
286
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
• NOTAMs
Flight
Instruments
• Departure Procedures (DP)
System
Overview
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data
includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Approaches
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
The figure below, shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading.
Note, the grey shading is for illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the
published chart or display. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey
supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position.
Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft
position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
EIS
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on
the chart when the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes
are not considered within the chart boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol
reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol is removed from the
display.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Off-Scale
Area
Annun/Alerts
Off-Scale
Areas
Appendix
Index
Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
287
Additional Features
When a terminal procedure chart is not available for the requested airport or there
is an error rendering the data, the banner “CHART NOT AVAILABLE” appears on
the screen. The “CHART NOT AVAILABLE” banner does not refer to the ChartView
subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or
procedure for a selected airport.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Displaying ChartView:
1) With the Waypoint (WPT) Page displayed, press the CHART Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Airport Identifier Field and use the
FMS Joystick to begin entering the desired airport.
Or:
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Chart Field.
b) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a drop-down menu of available charts.
c) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired chart, and press
the ENT Key.
Or:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page (with a waypoint entered), press the SEL
APPR Softkey. The ‘Select Approach Window’ is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Show Chart’, and press the ENT
Key. The selected chart is displayed.
4) Press the EXIT Softkey to return to the previous page.
Or:
1) From the Map Page or Active Flight Plan Page, use the Map Pointer
to highlight the desired airport and press the ENT Key. The Airport
Information Window is displayed.
2) Press the CHART Softkey.
3) With the ‘Chart’ Field highlighted, turn the FMS Joystick to access a dropdown menu of available charts.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired chart, and press the
ENT Key.
288
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Chart Not Available Banner
Flight
Instruments
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
EIS
CNS
Interface
The aircraft symbol is shown in magenta on the chart only if the chart is to scale
and the aircraft position is within the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is
not displayed when the Aircraft Symbol Not Shown Icon (X over the aircraft symbol)
appears in the lower right corner. The Aircraft Symbol Not Shown Icon may appear at
certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
GPS
Navigation
Aircraft
Position on
Chart
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Aircraft Symbol Displayed on Chart (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
AFCS
Aircraft
Not Shown
Icon
Annun/Alerts
Aircraft Not Shown Icon (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
289
Additional Features
System
Overview
Showing/Hiding the aircraft symbol on the chart:
Flight
Instruments
Press the CLR Key to show/hide the aircraft symbol. The Aircraft Symbol
Hidden Icon (circle with a line) is displayed in the lower right corner when
the aircraft symbol is hidden.
EIS
Aircraft
Hidden
Icon
CHART RANGE
Changing the chart range:
Use the down arrow on the RNG Key to zoom in (decreasing), or the up
arrow to zoom out (increasing). Move the FMS Joystick to scroll the chart
up, down, left, or right.
Or:
To quickly zoom all the way out, press the CHART Softkey. Press it again to
return to the previous range (only available from the Waypoint Page).
JEPPESEN DATABASE-PUBLISHED NOTAMS
NOTE: Only NOTAMs for the selected airport is shown (when available).
There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight that may not
be displayed. Contact Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen
database-published NOTAMs.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Aircraft Hidden Icon (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
Recent NOTAMs applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the
ChartView database. If NOTAMs are available for the selected airport, a ‘Chart
NOTAMs’ option will be displayed at the bottom of the drop-down menu of available
charts. Select the ‘Chart NOTAMs’ option from the chart menu to display the applicable
NOTAM information.
290
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Chart Notams
CNS
Interface
Drop-down Chart Menu
GPS
Navigation
8.4 FLITECHARTS®
• Alternate Minimums
Appendix
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on
the chart when the current position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft
symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area depicted on some charts.
Annun/Alerts
• Approaches
AFCS
• Takeoff Minimums
Additional
Features
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Hazard
Avoidance
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office
(NACO) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution
and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from
Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
Flight
Planning
WARNING: Do not use the approach information provided by the VFR
navigation database residing within the G3X as a means of navigating any
instrument approach. The G3X VFR navigation database is limited to present only the waypoints for the final approach leg of a published procedure.
These waypoints and associated course line are made available for monitoring
purposes only.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
291
The figure below shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading.
Note, these areas are not shaded on the published chart. These off-scale areas appear
on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical
position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual
geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these
areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to the offscale area.
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
292
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Displaying FliteCharts:
1) With the Waypoint (WPT) Page displayed, press the CHART Softkey.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Airport Identifier Field and use the
FMS Joystick to begin entering the desired airport.
Or:
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Chart Field.
b) Turn the FMS Joystick to access a drop-down menu of available charts.
c) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired chart, and press
the ENT Key.
Or:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page (with a waypoint entered), press the SEL
APPR Softkey. The ‘Select Approach Window’ is displayed.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Show Chart’, and press the ENT
Key. The selected chart is displayed.
4) Press the EXIT Softkey to return to the previous page.
Or:
1) From the Map Page or Active Flight Plan Page, use the Map Pointer
to highlight the desired airport and press the ENT Key. The Airport
Information Window is displayed.
2) Press the CHART Softkey.
3) With the ‘Chart’ Field highlighted, turn the FMS Joystick to access a dropdown menu of available charts.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired chart, and press the
ENT Key.
System
Overview
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced
aircraft symbol.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
293
System
Overview
Additional Features
Airport Identifier
Field
Chart Field
FliteChart Softkey
FliteCharts (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
When a terminal procedure chart is not available for the requested airport or there
is an error rendering the data, the banner “CHART NOT AVAILABLE” appears on
the screen. The “CHART NOT AVAILABLE” banner does not refer to the FliteCharts
subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or
procedure for a selected airport.
Chart Not Available Banner
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
The aircraft symbol is shown in magenta on the chart only if the chart is to scale and
the aircraft position is within the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not
displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. The Aircraft Not Shown Icon may
appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Available Approaches
294
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Aircraft
Position on
Chart
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Aircraft Symbol Displayed on Chart (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
Flight
Planning
Aircraft
Not Shown
Icon
Hazard
Avoidance
Aircraft Not Shown Icon (Waypoint Page)
(Split-Screen)
Additional
Features
CHART RANGE
Changing the chart range:
Appendix
To quickly zoom all the way out, press the CHART Softkey. Press it again to
return to the previous range (only available from the Waypoint Page).
Annun/Alerts
Or:
AFCS
Use the down arrow on the RNG Key to zoom in (decreasing), or the up
arrow to zoom out (increasing). Move the FMS Joystick to scroll the chart
up, down, left, or right.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
295
Additional Features
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Scroll
Arrow
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Scroll
Bar
FliteCharts (Zoomed Out)
(Split-Screen)
FliteCharts (Zoomed In)
(Split-Screen)
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. FliteCharts do not expire and will remain
viewable after the expiration date. The Power-up Page indicates any of four different
possible criteria for chart availability. These indications are whether the databases are
not configured, not available, current or out of date.
8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATA
The Airport Directory contains airport statistics such as pattern altitudes, noise
abatement information, FBO phone numbers, hours of operation, local attractions,
ground transportation, lodging, and services.
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the
U.S. and it is updated on a 56-day cycle. Detailed information for over 5,300 U.S.
airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs can be
viewed. This service allows the pilot to plan an overnight, choose fuel stops, find
ground transportation, etc.
Optional airport directory databases such as AC-U-KWIK are also supported. ACU-KWIK provides complete listings of FBOs, charter companies, fuel suppliers, ground
transportation, maintenance and catering services at public airports across the world.
If the AOPA database is in use, the AOPA Softkey is displayed on the Waypoint
(WPT) Page. If another airport directory database is in use, such as AC-U-KWIK, the
DIRECTORY Softkey is displayed on the Waypoint (WPT) Page.
296
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
EIS
CNS
Interface
Scroll Bar
Service Icon
Flight
Instruments
Airport Identifier
Field
System
Overview
Viewing Airport Directory information:
From the Waypoint (WPT) Page, press the AOPA or DIRECTORY Softkey.
Or:
1) From any map highlight an airport using the Map Pointer, and press the
ENT Key. The Airport Information Window is displayed.
2) Press the AOPA or DIRECTORY Softkey.
3) To return to the map, press the ENT Key, the CLR Key, or the FMS Joystick.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Airport
Directory
Softkey
Additional
Features
Icon
Hazard
Avoidance
Airport Directory Information
(Waypoint (WPT) Page)
(Split-Screen)
Description
Restaurant on Field
AFCS
Self Serve Fuel
Annun/Alerts
Courtesy Car
Appendix
Airport Directory Service Icons
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
297
8.6 SiriusXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: See the G3X Installation Manual for SiriusXM activation instructions.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances
without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites,
coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are
subscription-based.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a coded ID (Radio
ID).
To access the Radio ID from the XM Audio Page press the INFO Softkey.
Accessing the Radio ID:
From the XM Audio Page press the INFO Softkey.
Or:
From the XM Audio Page select Channel ‘0’ in the ‘All Channels’ Category.
Or:
1) From the WX Page press the MENU Key to display the WX Page Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Weather Products’ and press
the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM
Weather products.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: SiriusXM Radio is only available with the optional GDU 375.
298
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
Radio ID
Flight
Instruments
Weather
Products
Window
EIS
CNS
Interface
XM Information Page
(Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
USING SiriusXM RADIO
Hazard
Avoidance
Selecting the XM Audio Page:
1) If necessary, press the FMS Joystick to interact with the page navigation
bar.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the XM Audio Page.
Flight
Planning
The XM Audio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment
features of the SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Additional
Features
Categories
AFCS
Active Channel Box:
-Artist Name
-Song Title
-Category
-Channel
Signal Strength
Volume
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
XM Audio Page
(Split-Screen)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Selected Channel
299
CATEGORY
The Category Field of the XM Audio Page cycles through a horizontal list of categories
such as jazz, rock, or news.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
CNS
Interface
EIS
Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATEGORY Softkey on the XM Audio Page. The Category Field is
highlighted.
Category Field (Split-Screen)
GPS
Navigation
2)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired category.
Flight
Planning
Or:
1)
Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor. Move the FMS Joystick to
highlight the Category Field (if necessary).
2)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired category.
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
The Channels List of the XM Audio Page shows a list of the available channels for the
selected category. The currently selected channel will flash blue. The Active Channel
is denoted by an arrow.
Arrow
Active Channel
The Active Channel Box (split-screen) or the Now Playing Box (full-screen) shows the
currently selected channel, signal strength, and volume.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Press and hold the CATEGORY Softkey to view the ‘All Channels’ Category.
Index
Selecting a channel:
1) From the XM Audio Page, press the CHANNEL Softkey. The Channel Field
is highlighted.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired channel and press the ENT
Key.
300
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
Press the FMS Joystick. Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the Channel
Field (if necessary).
2)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired channel and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Enter Channel’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn the FMS Joystick to enter the desired channel and press the ENT or
CLR Key.
CNS
Interface
From the XM Audio Page, press the MENU Key.
EIS
1)
Flight
Instruments
1)
System
Overview
Or:
GPS
Navigation
USING FAVORITES
Favorites is a customized category of up to 30 of your SiriusXM Radio favorites.
Flight
Planning
Adding a channel to Favorites:
1) With the favorites channel selected, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Add To Favorites’ selected, press the ENT Key.
3) With ‘Yes’ selected, press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Adding a Channel to Favorites
301
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Selecting Favorites:
1) Press the FAVORITE Softkey on the XM Audio Page. The Favorites category
is displayed.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired channel and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor. Move the FMS Joystick to
highlight the Category Field (if necessary).
2)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the Favorites category.
3)
Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired channel and press the ENT
Key.
Deleting a channel from Favorites:
1) With the Favorites channel selected, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Remove Favorite’ selected, press the ENT Key.
Or:
Highlight ‘Remove All Favorites’ and press the ENT Key to delete all channels
from your Favorites list.
VOLUME
Radio volume is shown in the Now Playing Box in the lower right corner of the
display. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOLUME Softkey, which brings up
the MUTE Softkey, and the volume increase (VOL +) and decrease (VOL – ) softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
1) With the XM Audio Page displayed, press the VOLUME Softkey.
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to
increase volume.
3) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again
to unmute the audio.
Or:
Press and hold the VOLUME Softkey to mute and unmute the audio.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
1)
Index
Volume Control (Split-Screen)
302
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
TRIM L/TRIM R
Device sensitive softkeys for Roll Trim devices.
FLAPS UP/FLAP DN
Device Sensitive Softkeys
Annun/Alerts
Only appears when the landing light(s) have been configured
to ‘wig-wag’. When AUTO (default) is selected the VP-X will
automatically pulse (wig-wag) the landing lights based on the
current phase of flight. When AUTO is not selected the landing
lights will remain steady-on (no wig-wag).
Only appears when the selected device is in a fault condition. By
selecting ‘RESET’ the VP-X will attempt to clear the fault (similar
to resetting the circuit breaker).
AFCS
RESET
Device sensitive softkeys for a Flap motor.
Additional
Features
AUTO
Hazard
Avoidance
Device sensitive softkeys for Pitch Trim devices.
Flight
Planning
TRIM UP/TRIM DN
GPS
Navigation
ON/OFF
Description
Device sensitive softkeys for devices such as; Fuel Pump, Landing
light, or anything else that would have an on/off type function.
CNS
Interface
Device Softkeys
EIS
When an electrical device is selected, device sensitive softkeys appear, which provide
the pilot with control of the device from the GDU. Devices connected to the VP-X can
be controlled via dedicated switches or via softkeys on a GDU. The Vertical Power
system can be connected to the PFD or MFD, but the associated softkeys will only
appear on the GDU to which the Vertical Power system is connected.
Flight
Instruments
The Vertical Power electronic circuit breaker (VP-X) integrates with the G3X system
to provide a visual display of the aircraft’s electrical system. From the Vertical Power
(VP-X) Page pilots control, view and respond to electrical faults. The Vertical Power
(VP-X) Page only appears when a VP-X is connected, configured and operational.
System
Overview
8.7 VERTICAL POWER (OPTIONAL)
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
303
Additional Features
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Selecting and controlling an electrical device from the list:
1) With the VP-X Page displayed, press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor.
2) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired device.
3) Using the device sensitive softkeys select the desired function.
Or:
Select ‘RESET’ to reset a faulted device.
Hazard
Avoidance
Device
ON
Additional
Features
Flight
Planning
System
Schematic
Device
OFF
Fault
Description
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Device
Fault
Index
Appendix
Vertical Power (VP-X) Page
304
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
System
Overview
8.8 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS (OPTIONAL)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
The flight data logging feature automatically stores flight and engine data to an
SD card. Data is recorded to the SD card every second. A data file is created each
time the system is powered on with an SD card inserted, or each time an SD card is
inserted after power on. A 2 GB SD card can store over 1,000 hours of flight data or
up to 1,000 files (whichever comes first). The data files stored on the SD card have an
extension of .csv. This file format can be opened using a spread sheet application on
a personal computer. Garmin recommends using a 2 GB SanDisk or Toshiba SD card.
Flight
Planning
8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
GPS
Navigation
The G3X is capable of displaying checklists (if available from the aircraft manufacturer)
which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground and during each
phase of flight. The G3X accesses the checklist file (*.ace) from the root directory (/*.
ace) of the SD card. If a checklist file is available on the SD card, the ‘Checklists’ Main
Menu Option will appear. The Checklist Editor may be downloaded from the Updates
& Downloads page which can be accessed via the G3X or G3X Touch wepbage or by
entering the following URL into a web browser: http://www8.garmin.com/support/
collection.jsp?product=010-00G3X-00&cID=155&pID=63892.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: Checklists cannot be edited from within the system.
EIS
NOTE: Garmin does not create, modify, or update G3X checklists and thus
cannot be responsible for the availability and/or content.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The information described in this section is not intended to replace
the checklist information described in the AFM.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
305
8.10 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION
(ESP-X)
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
WARNING: Do not assume ESP-X will provide stability protection in all
circumstances. There are in-flight situations that can exceed the capabilities
of ESP-X technology.
NOTE: Third party autopilot installations are not supported for ESP-X. ESP-X
requires Garmin GSA 28 servos.
Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) is an optional feature that is intended to
monitor the aircraft and provide control input feedback when necessary to discourage
operating the aircraft at potentially unsafe attitudes and/or airspeeds. This feature will
only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL and the autopilot is not engaged.
When selected, ESP engages automatically when the aircraft approaches or exceeds
one or more predetermined airspeed or attitude limitations. Stability protection
for each flight axis is provided by the autopilot servos, which apply force to the
appropriate control surface(s) to discourage pilot control inputs that would cause the
aircraft to exceed the normal or “protected” flight envelope. This is perceived by the
pilot as resistance to control movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft
approaches a steep attitude, and/or the airspeed is below the minimum or above the
maximum configured airspeed.
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the
force increases proportionally (up to an established maximum) to encourage control
movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or airspeed
range.
When ESP has been engaged for more than fifteen seconds (cumulative; not
necessarily consecutive seconds) of a 30-second interval, the autopilot can be
configured to automatically engage with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing
the aircraft into level flight. An aural “Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director
mode annunciation will indicate ‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes. When configured,
automatic engagement of level mode becomes available when the aircraft climbs
above 200 feet AGL, and becomes unavailable when the aircraft descends below 1500
feet AGL.
306
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
CNS
Interface
Enabling/Disabling ESP using the G3X:
EIS
ESP is enabled or disabled from the Electronic Stability Setup page or using an
externally wired ESP discrete switch.
Flight
Instruments
ESP is configured on the Electronic Stability Configuration page in Configuration
Mode. Refer to the Installation Manual for more information on configuring ESP.
System
Overview
The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect /
Control Wheel Steering (AP DISC / CWS) switch. Upon releasing the AP DISC / CWS
switch, ESP force will again be applied. ESP can also be overridden by overpowering
the servo’s torque limit.
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Electronic Stability’, and press
the ENT Key.
4)
Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’ in the ‘Stability &
Protection’ Field.
5)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
return to the previous page.
ESP can be configured to be automatically enabled on system power-up.
Additional
Features
ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
Hazard
Avoidance
2)
Flight
Planning
Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
GPS
Navigation
1)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
AFCS (ESP Enabled)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
307
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
Roll Limit Indicators displayed on the roll scale are configurable between 45º and
60º right and left, indicating where ESP will engage. As roll attitude exceeds the
configured limit, ESP will engage and the Roll Limit Indicators will move to 15º less
than the configured ESP bank limit. The Roll Limit Indicator now indicates where ESP
will disengage as roll attitude decreases.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45º)
(Configurable)
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP Enabled but NOT Engaged)
ESP Disengage (30º)
ESP Engage (45º)(Configurable)
(15º < Configured Bank Limit)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 35º
Index
Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
308
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
10º
20º
Minimum
ESP Torque
(30º)
30
4
º
Flight
Planning
75º
90º
90º
75º
GPS
Navigation
60º
60
º
º
Configured
Bank Limit
(45º)
Maximum
ESP Torque
(60º)
CNS
Interface
5º
EIS
0º
45
Configured
Bank Limit
(45º)
Maximum
ESP Torque
(60º)
º
30
10º
20º
Flight
Instruments
Minimum
ESP Torque
(30º)
System
Overview
Once engaged, the torque applied by ESP is at its maximum when bank angle is
15º more than the configured bank limit, and tapers to the minimum applied torque
when the bank angle is 15º less than the configured bank limit. The force increases
as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is
intended to encourage pilot input to return the airplane to a more normal roll attitude.
When beyond 15º of the configured bank limit, the maximum torque is held until the
aircraft returns inside the protected envelope.
Hazard
Avoidance
ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the
direction of pitch travel. This force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis
in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range for the aircraft.
Additional
Features
ESP pitch engagement is configurable between 10º and 25º nose-up and between
5º and 25º nose-down. Once engaged, the torque applied by ESP is at its maximum
when pitch is 5º more than the configured nose-up and nose-down pitch limits, and
tapers to the minimum applied torque when pitch is 5º less than the configured noseup and nose-down pitch limits. When beyond 5º of the configured pitch limit, the
maximum torque is held until the aircraft returns inside the protected envelope.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
309
The presence of yellow chevrons indicate that ESP is engaged in these nose-up/
nose-down conditions.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Additional Features
ESP Engaged (Nose-High)
50˚
45˚
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
50˚
25˚
25˚
20˚
20˚
15˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
ESP Engaged (Nose-Low)
Appendix
40˚
35˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
Index
ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
310
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional Features
Flight
Instruments
An airspeed below the minimum configured airspeed or above maximum configured
airspeed will result in ESP applying force to raise or lower the nose of the aircraft.
When the high or low airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
System
Overview
AIRSPEED PROTECTION
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
ESP Engaged (Low Airspeed)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
8.11 CARBON MONOXIDE (CO) DETECTOR
(OPTIONAL)
311
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Displaying the current CO measurement in the data bar field:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) With ‘Data Bar Fields’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired ‘Field’.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to access the list of options, then turn or move the
FMS Joystick to highlight CO and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
If a carbon monoxide (CO) detector is installed, the current CO measurement in parts
per million (ppm) can be displayed in the data bar.
Additional
Features
NOTE: Refer to the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for emergency
procedures.
Additional Features
System
Overview
6)
Flight
Instruments
CO Measurement In PPM
Data Bar (Split-Screen)
In the event high CO levels are detected, the CO data field will flash yellow (if
displayed) and a CO LEVEL CAS Message is displayed on the PFD.
CO Data Bar Field (High CO)
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
NOTE: Refer to the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for emergency
procedures.
If a pulse oximeter is installed, a CAS message reminder to check blood oxygen
saturation (CHECK SPO2) will periodically appear on the PFD during flight at high
altitudes.
Pulse Oximeter CAS Message (PFD)
When blood oxygen saturation (SpO2) levels and pulse rate are being measured, the
values are displayed in a CAS message displayed on the PFD.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
High CO CAS Message (PFD)
8.12 PULSE OXIMETER (OPTIONAL)
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
To restore defaults, press the MENU Key. With ‘Restore Default’
highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Index
Pulse Oximeter CAS Message (PFD)
Blood Oxygen Saturation and Pulse Rate Measurements
312
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
SECTION 9 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL
SYSTEMS (OPTIONAL)
CNS
Interface
NOTE: VOR, LOC, and GS modes are all GPS-aided. You must have a GPS
position to use VOR, LOC, or GS modes.
EIS
NOTE: Refer to the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for emergency
procedures.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes
the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
GPS
Navigation
AFCS SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
An Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is typically comprised of two major
components: A Flight Director (FD) and Autopilot servos. The Flight Director provides
pitch and roll commands to the autopilot servos. These pitch and rolls commands are
displayed on the PFD as Command Bars. When the Flight Director is active the pitch
and roll commands can be hand-flown by the pilot or when coupled with the autopilot,
the autopilot servos drive the flight controls to follow the commands issued by the
Flight Director. The Flight Director operates independently of the autopilot servos, but
in most cases the autopilot servos can not operate independent of the Flight Director.
On G3X installations that do not have a separate and independent Flight Director, the
Flight Director is always coupled to the autopilot.
AFCS
AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
The autopilot and optional yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos
to provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll
attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch, Roll, and Yaw
(if installed) auto-trim provides trim commands to each servo to relieve any sustained
effort required by the servo(s). Autopilot operation is independent of the optional yaw
damper.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
313
The optional yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies, coordinates turns, and
provides a steady force to maintain directional trim. It can operate independently
of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate
commands are limited to 6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
FLIGHT CONTROL (GSA 28 AND GMC 305/307/507)
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director
modes. Yaw commands are provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the
maximum servo speed and torque. The servo mounts are equipped with electronic
slip-clutches. Slip-clutch torque values are set at installation, see the G3X installation
manual for installation instructions. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency. Third party autopilot systems my not allow servos to be overridden,
consult third party autopilot documents for limitations.
Pitch Axis and Trim
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during
flight director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited,
combined with pitch damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo
measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the pitch trim motor.
The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
NOTE: Auto-trim may also be configured for the roll and/or yaw axis. Consult
the G3X installation manaul for configuration and installation options.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Roll Axis
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight
director maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited,
combined with roll damper control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
Yaw Axis
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural
Dutch roll response. It also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns and reduce
or eliminate the need for the pilot to use rudder pedal force to maintain coordinated
flight during climbs and descents.
314
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
• GDU 370/375 Primary Flight Display (PFD), plus a third party autopilot unit. This
option does not include a separate Flight Director (FD). Selecting a FD mode
engages the autopilot.
Index
315
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the Autopilot with a new
reference. Refer to (Vertical Modes) and (Lateral Modes) for Control Wheel Steering
behavior in each mode.
Additional
Features
Control Wheel Steering allows the aircraft to be hand-flown without disengaging
the AFCS. Press and hold the autopilot unit’s CWS Button (if equipped) to temporarily
disengage the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and hand-fly the
aircraft. The G3X autopilot control is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
Control Wheel Steering. The green ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by a white
‘CW’ for the duration of Control Wheel Steering maneuvers.
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Not all third party autopilot units support Control Wheel Steering
(CWS).
Flight
Planning
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING (CWS) (OPTIONAL)
GPS
Navigation
• GDU 370/375 Primary Flight Display (PFD), plus GSA 28 servos, plus
GMC Mode Controller. This option includes a separate FD. The FD can be on
independent of the autopilot. Selecting a FD mode does not engage the autopilot.
This option supports a Yaw Damper (YD).
CNS
Interface
• GDU 370/375 Primary Flight Display (PFD), plus third party autopilot, plus
GMC Mode Controller. This option includes a separate FD. The FD can be on
independent of the autopilot. Selecting a FD mode does not engage the autopilot.
This option does not support a Yaw Damper (YD).
EIS
• GDU 370/375 Primary Flight Display (PFD), plus GSA 28 servos. This option does
not include a separate Flight Director (FD). Selecting a FD mode engages the
autopilot.
Flight
Instruments
The G3X offers multiple Automatic Flight Control System installation options. The
following options are discussed in this section:
System
Overview
G3X AFCS INSTALLATIONS OPTIONS
G3X AFCS STATUS BOX
The AFCS status box displays Autopilot (AP), Optional Yaw Damper (YD), and
Flight Director (FD) mode annunciations on the PFD. When a third party autopilot
unit is engaged and the G3X is issuing commands to it, lateral and vertical modes
are displayed. When a third party autopilot unit is engaged but it is operating in a
standalone mode (i.e., not responding to the G3X commands), the Autopilot status
(AP) is displayed; however, the lateral/vertical modes are not displayed.
Autopilot (AP) status is displayed on the far left of the G3X Autopilot Status Box.
Lateral modes are displayed in the center, and vertical modes are displayed on the
right. Armed modes are displayed in white and active in green.
Flight Director
Modes
Autopilot
or
Yaw Damper
Status
Lateral Modes
Active
Active
Vertical Modes
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Active
Armed
Additional
Features
Autopilot Status Box
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Autopilot Display (PFD)
316
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GSU 73/25 ADAHRS Unit
• GSA 28 AFCS Pitch/Roll/Yaw
Damper (optional) servos.
EIS
• GMC AFCS Mode Control Unit
Flight
Instruments
• GDU 370/375 Display Unit.
System
Overview
9.1 AFCS OPERATION
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
Flight
Planning
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
GPS
Navigation
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within GDU
370/375. Flight director commands are displayed on the PFD. The flight director
provides:
CNS
Interface
The AFCS system can be divided into these main operating functions:
– Autopilot communication
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional), is self-monitoring and provides
Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral
acceleration, and airspeed. If installed the YD comes on when the autopilot is engaged
and stays on after disengaging the autopilot. The YD can be turned on/off independent
of the autopilot using the YD Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch
servos. It also provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response
to flight director steering commands, Air Data and Attitude and Heading Reference
System (ADAHRS) attitude, rate information, and airspeed.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
317
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — Manual electric trim may provide trim capability
for any properly configured axis (pitch, roll, or yaw) when the autopilot is not engaged.
The G3X can also communicate with various third-party autopilot units. With an
appropriate third-party autopilot installed and the G3X Integrated Autopilot Interface
is configured (refer to the G3X Installation Manual), the G3X issues pitch and roll
steering commands to the autopilot unit. The autopilot unit is then responsible for
moving the flight controls.
This section contains the following terminology:
• Autopilot Unit: Refers to the third-party autopilot box.
• Integrated Autopilot Interface: Refers to the functionality available when the
Autopilot Unit and the G3X are working together.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Flight
Planning
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Installation Manual and the third-party autopilot
vendor documentation for information on installing and configuring the G3X
Integrated Autopilot Interface.
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: This section covers the operation of the G3X when configured with
specific third-party autopilot models. Refer to the third-party autopilot vendor
documentation for standalone autopilot functionality and control features.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
NOTE: In a multiple display configuration, the autopilot unit is connected to
a single GDU (most likely the PFD). In the event that the GDU connected to
the autopilot unit fails, the Integrated Autopilot Interface capability will be
lost; however, the autopilot unit will retain any standalone functionality it
may support on its own.
318
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Before takeoff checklist - Garmin autopilot with GSA 28 servos
and GMC 305/307/507 mode controller:
1) Autopilot - ENGAGE (using AP/CWS button, or AP button on mode
controller)
2) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot can be overpowered in both pitch
and roll)
3) AP DISC button - PRESS (verify autopilot disengages and audio alert is
heard)
4) Yaw damper - OFF (if installed) (verify yaw damper disengages and audio
alert is heard)
5) Flight director - SET FOR TAKEOFF (select TO or VS mode or push FD Button
to turn off the Flight Director)
6) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot servos are disengaged from pitch,
roll, and yaw controls, and all controls move freely)
7) Elevator trim control - SET FOR TAKEOFF
EIS
Before takeoff checklist - Garmin autopilot with GSA 28 servos, no
mode controller:
1) Autopilot - ENGAGE (using AP/CWS button)
2) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot can be overpowered in both pitch
and roll)
3) AP DISC button - PRESS (verify autopilot disengages and audio alert is
heard)
4) Flight controls - CHECK (verify autopilot servos are disengaged from pitch
and roll controls, and all controls move freely)
5) Elevator trim control - SET FOR TAKEOFF
Flight
Instruments
To ensure that the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is operating properly
prior to flight, perform the following Garmin recommended preflight checks.
System
Overview
AFCS PRE-FLIGHT ACTIONS
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
319
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
AFCS CONTROLS
GMC 305/307/507 AFCS CONTROLS
The GMC 305/307/507 AFCS Control Unit have the following controls:
2
HDG Key
NAV Key
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
1
4
AP Key
LVL Key
5
NOSE UP/DN Wheel
6
IAS Key
ALT Key
3
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode. Cancels GS
Mode if LOC Mode is either active or armed.
Cancels GP Mode if GPS Mode is either active or
armed. Cancels LOC Mode if GPS Mode is active
and LOC Mode is armed.
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is
disengaged) in level vertical and lateral modes
Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, and Altitude Hold
modes
Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
8 VNV or VNAV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for
Vertical Navigation flight control
9 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
10 YD Key (if installed)
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
11 FD Key
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the director in the default
vertical and lateral modes. Pressing again
deactivates the flight director and removes the
Command Bars. If the autopilot is engaged, the key
is disabled.
12 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
13 HDG or HDG/TRK Knob Selects the desired Heading*
14 ALT SEL Knob
Selects the desired Altitude setting*
15 TRK Key
Selects/deselects Track (TRK) Mode**
*GMC 307 and 507 only **GMC 507 only
7
320
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
3
4
12
11
10
5
6
7
9
8
6
14
Flight
Instruments
2
System
Overview
1
EIS
Active Mode
CNS
Interface
GMC 305 AFCS Control Unit
1
2
3
4
5
Flight
Planning
12
GPS
Navigation
13
Hazard
Avoidance
11
10
89
9
7
Additional
Features
GMC 307 AFCS Control Unit
12
3
4
5
6
14
AFCS
13
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
1
2
15
11
10
9
89
7
Index
GMC 507 AFCS Control Unit
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
321
AFCS
System
Overview
INTEGRATED AUTOPILOT INTERFACE SPLIT-SCREEN PFD PAGE
& FULL-SCREEN PFD SOFTKEY CONTROLS
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, all mode softkeys are alternate action (i.e.,
press on, press off).
HDG/ROLL
CNS
Interface
EIS
ALT/PTCH
AP HDG
AP NAV
ALT/PTCH
GPS
Navigation
HDG/ROLL
Flight
Planning
(AP APPR)
Hazard
Avoidance
HDG/ROLL
AP VNAV
AP VS
AP ALT
ALT/PTCH
Additional
Features
HDG/ROLL Softkey selected
HDG/ROLL
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the heading/track* and
displays lateral mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to topor
level softkeys
TRK/ROLL*
AP HDG
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
AP NAV
AP TRK *
Index
Appendix
ALT/PTCH
Selects/deselects heading mode
Selects/deselects navigation mode. Cancels GS Mode if LOC
Mode is either active or armed. Cancels GP Mode if GPS Mode
is either active or armed. Cancels LOC Mode if GPS Mode is
active and LOC Mode is armed.
Activates track mode*
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the selected altitude and
displays the vertical mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to
top-level softkeys
322
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
HDG/ROLL
or
AP VS
ALT/PTCH
Additional
Features
Moving the FMS Joystick left/right adjusts the mode reference for Roll Hold (ROL)
mode. The FMS Joystick cannot be used to increase the roll reference bank angle, only
to drive the aircraft towards wings-level.
Hazard
Avoidance
Moving the FMS Joystick up/down adjusts the mode reference for Vertical Speed
(VS), Altitude Hold (ALT), and Pitch Hold (PIT) modes.
Flight
Planning
FMS Joystick
GPS
Navigation
* GMC 507
CNS
Interface
AP ALT
EIS
AP APPR
or
Selects/deselects approach mode
Selects/deselects vertical speed mode
Selects/deselects altitude hold mode
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the selected altitude and
displays the vertical mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to
top-level softkeys
Flight
Instruments
AP VNAV
Initial press allows the pilot to adjust the heading bug and
displays lateral mode softkeys; subsequent press returns to toplevel softkeys
Selects/deselects vertical navigation
System
Overview
ALT/PTCH Softkey selected
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
323
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the GDU softkeys and GMC
305/307/507 AFCS Control Unit:
CWS/AP DISC Button An AP DISC/CWS Button is located on the pilot’s control
(Autopilot Disconnect) stick. This button combines the functions of Autopilot
Disconnect and Control Wheel Steering. (Note: the
Control Wheel Steering function can be disabled in config
mode, which causes the button to perform the Autopilot
Disconnect function only)
Press and release the AP DISC/CWS Button to disengage
the autopilot. Pressing and releasing the button again will
acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Pressing and holding the AP DISC/CWS Button when
the autopilot is engaged will temporarily disengage the
pitch and roll servos and interrupt auto-trim operation.
The pilot can then hand-fly the aircraft to a new attitude
and release the AP DISC/CWS button to re-engage the
autopilot servos and synchronize the flight director to the
aircraft’s new attitude. The ability to use Control Wheel
Steering may be disabled in config mode if desired.
If the configuration supports it, pressing and holding the
AP DISC/CWS button while the autopilot is not engaged
will cause the autopilot to engage. If the flight director
was previously off, the default FD modes (PIT and ROL)
will be selected. The ability to engage the autopilot using
the CWS button may be disabled in config mode if desired.
TO/GA Button
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in
(Takeoff/Go Around)
air) Mode
When properly configured with a GTN, if an approach
procedure is loaded, this switch also activates the missed
approach when the selected navigation source is GPS
or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid
frequency has been tuned.
MET Switch
Used to command manual electric trim for any properly
(Manual Electric Trim) configured servo (pitch, roll, or yaw).
324
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
AP APPR Softkey
Approach
Pitch Hold
PIT
Pitch Hold
PIT
GPS
LOC
Glidepath
Glideslope
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Navigation VNAV
GP
GS
Additional
Features
Roll Hold
Roll Hold
Roll Hold
HDG
GPS
VOR
LOC
ROL
ROL
ROL
Hazard
Avoidance
AP ALT Softkey
AP VS Softkey
AP VNAV Softkey
PIT
Flight
Planning
Navigation
Pitch Hold
GPS
Navigation
AP NAV Softkey
ROL
CNS
Interface
Autopilot Unit
CWS Button (if equipped)
Roll Hold
(press and hold)
AP HDG Softkey
Heading
EIS
Control Pressed
Modes Selected
Lateral
Vertical
Mode/Annunciation
Mode/Annunciation
Roll Hold
ROL
Pitch Hold
PIT
Flight
Instruments
An initial press of a softkey listed below (when the Autopilot is not engaged) will
engage the Autopilot with the listed lateral and vertical modes (some modes may
require an external navigator or NAV receiver):
System
Overview
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
Engaging the Autopilot
The AP NAV and AP APPR Softkeys must have a valid VLOC signal or an active GPS
course to activate the autopilot.
AFCS
The AP VNAV Softkey must have an active flight plan and VNAV enabled to activate
the autopilot.
Annun/Alerts
An initial press of the AP Key on the GMC mode controller will activate the Flight
Director and engage the autopilot in the default PIT and ROL modes.
Appendix
Engaging the Autopilot (GMC 305/307/507)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
325
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT
The Autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the disconnect button on the
autopilot unit, or by pressing the autopilot disconnect button on the control stick or
yoke or by pressing the AP Key on the GMC mode controller. Manual disengagement
is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and an aural alert.
Cancel the aural alert by pressing and releasing the AP/CWS Button again (GSA 28
autopilot only)
Automatic disengagement is indicated by a flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and an
aural alert. The flashing indication continues until acknowledged by pressing the ENT
Key. Automatic disengagement occurs due to:
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default autopilot modes
Disengaging the autopilot when a malfunction is suspected
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the
following steps:
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
• System failure
1)
Firmly grasp the control wheel.
2)
Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power
is removed from the trim motor. Power is also removed from all primary
servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3)
Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4)
Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and
solenoid components.
5)
Release the AP DISC Switch.
Overpowering Autopilot Servos
In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force
applied to the pitch controls when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of
pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot automatic trim to run to
an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the controls
should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
326
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be
overpowered.
2)
Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.
EIS
1)
Flight
Instruments
The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
System
Overview
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to
run, resulting in an out-of-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action
is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated control forces are required after the
autopilot is disengaged.
Flight
Planning
FLIGHT DIRECTOR SETUP
GPS
Navigation
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the pilot and
autopilot, which are displayed on the PFD. With the flight director active, the aircraft
can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars. The Flight Director
has the following maximum commands: pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (30°) angles.
CNS
Interface
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
Hazard
Avoidance
The Flight Director Setup Page allows the user to set the indicator type, TO/GA Pitch,
and simplified flight director operation for certain modes.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Flight Director Setup Page
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
327
Flight Director Indicator Type
The Flight Director Indicator Type controls whether the flight director command
indicator on the PFD uses a single-cue or dual-cue presentation.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Setting the Flight Director Indicator Type:
1) From the PFD1, press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Flight Director’ and press the
ENT Key.
4) With the ‘Indicator Type’ Field highlighted, turn the FMS Joystick to
highlight ‘Single Cue’ or ‘Dual Cue’ and press the ENT Key.
TO/GA Takeoff and Go-Around Pitch
The TO/GA Takeoff and Go-Around Pitch settings control the pitch attitude targets
used for TO and GA modes.
Setting the TO/GA Takeoff and Go-Around Pitch:
1) From the PFD1, press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Flight Director’ and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘TO/GA Takeoff Pitch’ or ‘TO/GA Goaround Pitch’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Enter the desired pitch value and press the ENT Key.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
NOTE: TO/GA must be configured for the settings to appear. Refer to the
G3X Installation Manual for more information.
Appendix
Flight Director Altitude Controls
Index
CAUTION: The following settings change the Flight Director operation. Before
changing these settings become familiar with how these changes affect the
use of the Flight Director.
328
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
When Altitude Controls are set to Normal, the following additional selections
appear:
System
Overview
The Flight Director Altitude Controls allow the user to select Normal or Simplified.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Altitude Controls (Normal)
•
•
Sync Selected Altitude: The Flight Director enters Altitude Hold (ALT)
Mode and the Selected Altitude (Altitude Bug) changes to the current
aircraft altitude.
Select VS Mode: The Flight Director changes from Altitude Hold (ALT)
Mode to Vertical Speed (VS) Mode and initiates a climb or descent.
Subsequent vertical speed adjustments are in increments of 100 fpm. The
Default Vertical Speed that is used for the initial climb or descent is set
using a pair of fields that appear when Select VS is selected.
Annun/Alerts
•
AFCS
Normal: Adjusts the Target Altitude in 10-foot increments, up to +/-200
feet from the original Target Altitude.
Additional
Features
•
Hazard
Avoidance
ALT Mode User Up/Down Action: Determines the behavior of the Flight
Director when the Flight Director is in Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode and the user
moves the pitch wheel on the GMC mode controller, or touches Nose Up or
Nose Down on the AFCS Display. The following two options are available:
Flight
Planning
Normal: The Flight Director enters Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode.
GPS
Navigation
•
CNS
Interface
•
ALT Mode User Select Action: Determines the behavior of the Flight Director
when the user selects Altitude Hold Mode by pressing the ALT key on the
GMC mode controller, or touching the ALT button on the display. The following
two options are available:
Appendix
Index
ALT Mode User Up/Down Action (Select VS Mode)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
329
When Altitude Controls are set to Simplified, Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode behavior
differs in the following ways:
NOTE: With Altitude Controls set to Simplified, the user will not be able to
pre-select a new altitude while ALT mode is already active.
•
Selecting Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode causes the Selected Altitude (Altitude Bug)
to change to the current aircraft altitude.
•
There is no longer a difference between the Selected Altitude (Altitude Bug) and
the Target Altitude for Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode.
•
After Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode captures the Selected Altitude, subsequent
changes to the Selected Altitude will cause ALT Mode to climb or descend
towards the new Selected Altitude.
•
•
Subsequent vertical speed adjustments are in increments of 100 fpm, with
the exception that the user cannot adjust the target vertical speed to a
value that would cause the aircraft to fly away from the Selected Altitude.
•
Unlike Select VS Mode described previously, this option does not switch
to VS mode. Instead, it displays a vertical speed bug.
•
The initial vertical speed used for climb or descent towards the new altitude
is determined by the Default Vertical Speed fields as described previously.
When Altitude Hold (ALT) Mode has captured the Selected Altitude, the vertical
speed bug is removed and vertical speed adjustments have no effect.
Setting the Flight Director Altitude Controls:
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
NOTE: Flight Director Altitude Control settings cannot be changed when ALT
mode is engaged. Turn off the Flight Director or switch to another vertical
mode before attempting to set the Altitude Controls.
330
1)
From the PFD1, press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Flight Director’ and press the
ENT Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Altitude Controls’ field, then turn
the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Simplified’ and press the ENT Key.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
b) Enter the desired values and press the ENT Key.
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Altitude Controls’ field, then turn
the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Normal’ and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
b) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘ALT Mode User Up/Down
Action’ field, then turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ’Normal’ and
press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
Or:
Flight
Planning
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘ALT Mode User Up/Down
Action’ field, then turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ’Select VS’ and
press the ENT Key.
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Default Climb Rate’ or
‘Default Descent Rate’ field and press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
b) Enter the desired values and press the ENT Key.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
PIT
PIT
TO
GA
ALT
VS
331
Index
ALT Key
VS Key
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Appendix
TO/GA Button
Annun/Alerts
FD Key
AP Key
Modes Selected
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
AFCS
An initial press of a key listed in the table below (when the flight director is not
active) activates the flight director in the listed modes. The flight director may be
turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display by pressing the FD Key
again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
Additional
Features
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR USING THE GMC
305/307/507
Control Pressed
EIS
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘ALT Mode User Select Action’
field, then turn the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Normal’ or ‘Sync Selected
Altitude’ and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
Or:
System
Overview
a) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Default Climb Rate’ or ‘Default
Descent Rate’ field and press the ENT Key.
System
Overview
AFCS
Modes Selected
VNV or VNAV Key
IAS Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
APR Key
Approach**
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Control Pressed
Navigation**
HDG Key
TRK Key (GMC 507 Only)
LVL Key
Heading Select
Track Select
Level Hold
HDG
TRK
LVL
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Level Hold
PIT
PIT
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course before
NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
NAV Key
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
VNAV
IAS
Flight Director Activation (GMC 305/307/507)
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes.
Unless otherwise specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off).
In the absence of specific mode selection, the flight director reverts to the default pitch
and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box.
Under normal operation, when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed,
the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition
from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving
to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
Index
Appendix
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
Vertical
Vertical Navigation*
Indicated Airspeed
332
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Autopilot
Status
Flight
Instruments
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to
compute the default flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
System
Overview
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or
unavailable, the flight director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis.
A flashing yellow mode annunciation and annunciator light indicate loss of sensor
(ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNAV) required to compute commands.
When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on
the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is
pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If after 10 seconds no action is taken,
the flashing annunciation stops.
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Autopilot Manually Disengaged
AFCS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on
the PFD. If the aircraft is being flown by hand, the command bars are displayed hollow.
The Command Bars do not override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move
together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll
commands.
Additional
Features
COMMAND BARS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
333
AFCS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Hollow Command Bars (Pilot Hand Flying Aircraft, FD Only)
CNS
Interface
EIS
Solid Command Bars (Autopilot Engaged)
Aircraft Symbol
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or
unavailable, the Command Bars are removed from the display.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Command Bars
334
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
PIT
0.5°
*
ALTS
Appendix
1 kt
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
100 fpm
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
10 ft
AFCS
ALT Key (GMC
305/307/507)
or
Holds the current Altitude
ALT nnnnn ft
AP ALT
Softkey
VS Key (GMC
Maintains the current
305/307/507)
aircraft vertical speed; may
VS nnnn fpm
or
be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
AP VS Softkey
Maintains the current
aircraft airspeed in IAS
IAS Key (GMC
while the aircraft is
305/307/507 IAS nnn kt
climbing/descending to the
only)
Selected Altitude
Additional
Features
Indicated
Airspeed
(IAS)
(default)
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Change
Increment
Flight
Planning
Altitude
Hold
Annunciation
GPS
Navigation
Holds the current aircraft
pitch attitude; may be used
Pitch Hold
to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
Selected
Captures the Selected
Altitude
Altitude
Capture
Control
CNS
Interface
Description
EIS
Vertical
Mode
Flight
Instruments
The table lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations.
The mode reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude
Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel
(GMC control unit) or FMS Joystick, can be used to change the vertical mode
reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed
(GMC mode controller), or Altitude Hold modes. Increments of change of values for
each of these references using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or FMS Joystick, are also
listed in the table.
System
Overview
9.2 VERTICAL MODES
335
Vertical
Mode
Description
Captures and tracks
Vertical
descent legs of an active
Navigation
vertical profile
VNV
Target
Altitude
Capture
Captures the Vertical
Navigation (VNV) Target
Altitude
Glidepath
Captures and tracks
the SBAS glidepath on
approach
Glideslope
Captures and tracks the
ILS glideslope on approach
Commands a constant
pitch angle and wings level
Takeoff
on ground in preparation
for takeoff
Commands a constant
Go Around pitch angle and wings level
in the air
Control
Reference
Annunciation Change
Increment
VNV Key
(GMC 305)
or VNAV
Key (GMC
307/507) or
AP VNAV
Softkey
VNAV
**
ALTV
APR Key
(GMC
305/307/507)
or
AP APPR
Softkey
GP
GS
TO
GA Button
GA
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, IAS, or GA active, and under VNAV when Selected Altitude
is to be captured instead of VNV Target Altitude
** ALTV armed automatically under VNAV when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of
Selected Altitude
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Index
Flight Director Vertical Modes
336
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Flight
Planning
Or
Hazard
Avoidance
Hold the Control Wheel Steering (CWS) Button (if equipped, and the
autopilot unit supports CWS), establish the desired pitch attitude, then
release the CWS Button.
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed
Additional
Features
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
GPS
Navigation
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by
using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC mode controller) or FMS Joystick.
CNS
Interface
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE:
EIS
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the
aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight
director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
Flight
Instruments
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed) or when the Autopilot is
activated, Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the
active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for climb
or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude
Capture Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
System
Overview
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Pitch Hold & Selected Altitude Capture Modes
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
337
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the
following modes:
CNS
Interface
• TO/Go Around (GMC 305/307)
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the
Selected Altitude is to be
captured instead of the VNV
Target Altitude)
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed.
Press the AP ALT Softkey or ALT Softkey, and turn the FMS Joystick to set the
Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude Capture Mode
becomes active.
Selected
Altitude
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions
to Selected Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic
transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds
and the appearance of the white ‘ALTS’ annunciation. The Selected Altitude is shown
as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
Automatic transition to ALTS
Mode with ALT Mode armed
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
• Pitch Hold
• Indicated Airspeed
(GMC 305/307)
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions
from Selected Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the reference altitude.
As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALTS’ annunciation moves to the
active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic
transition.
338
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
Automatic transition to ALTS
Mode with ALT Mode armed
Appendix
Index
339
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when in Selected Altitude
Capture Mode. Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to
Altitude Hold Mode when within 50 feet of the Selected Altitude. In this case,
the Selected Altitude becomes the Altitude Reference.
Hazard
Avoidance
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the AP ALT Softkey or ALT
Key (GMC control unit); the AFCS maintains the current aircraft altitude (to
the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The Altitude Reference, shown
in the G3X Autopilot Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude,
displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by a
green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the G3X Autopilot Status Box.
Flight
Planning
NOTE: For optional Flight Director Altitude Hold Mode settings refer to ‘Flight
Director Setup’ in this section.
GPS
Navigation
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
CNS
Interface
Use of the FMS Joystick to change the Selected Altitude while Selected
Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the autopilot to revert to Pitch Hold
Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the new Selected
Altitude.
EIS
Setting the selected altitude (GMC 305/307/507):
Press the AP Key on the GMC mode controller, and use the ALT SEL Knob.
Or
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the ALT
Softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments
Flight
Instruments
Setting the selected altitude (Integrated Autopilot Interface):
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the ALT/PTCH
Softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
When operating in Altitude Hold Mode, the Altitude Reference can be
adjusted in the following ways:
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
CNS
Interface
EIS
• The Altitude Reference can be adjusted up or down in 10-foot
increments by pressing the FMS Joystick up or down or rolling the
NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC control unit). Using this method, up to 200
feet of altitude change can be commanded. To change the Altitude
Reference by more the 200 feet, use the CWS button (if equipped) as
described below, or climb/descend using another vertical mode (PIT,
VS) to capture the desired Selected Altitude.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
• If the aircraft is equipped with a CWS Button, pressing the CWS Button
allows the aircraft to be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference.
When the CWS Button is released at the desired altitude, the new
altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
Hazard
Avoidance
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Selected
Altitude
Index
Altitude Hold Mode Softkey
Altitude Hold Mode
340
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
AFCS
Vertical Speed Reference. When the CWS Button is released, the aircraft’s
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) is established as the new Vertical
Speed Reference.
Additional
Features
• Press the CWS Button (if equipped) and hand-fly the aircraft to a new
Hazard
Avoidance
up or down to adjust the Vertical Speed Reference in increments of 100
fpm. The current Vertical Speed Reference is displayed in the G3X Autopilot
Status Box for 10 seconds after a change is made and as a reference bug on
the Vertical Speed Indicator. To dismiss the Vertical Speed Reference display,
press ENT.
Flight
Planning
• Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel (GMC control unit) or Move the FMS Joystick
GPS
Navigation
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted in the following ways:
CNS
Interface
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key (GMC control unit)
or AP VS Softkey, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the Autopilot Status Box along with
the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical
Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
Flight
Instruments
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed
Reference. Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical
Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be
used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
System
Overview
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
341
System
Overview
AFCS
Vertical Speed
Reference
Flight
Instruments
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Selected
Altitude
Flight
Planning
Vertical Speed Mode Softkey
Vertical Speed
Reference Bug
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical Speed Mode
342
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
INDICATED AIRSPEED MODE (IAS) (GMC MODE
CONTROLLER)
IAS Speed
Mode Active
Airspeed
Reference
Hazard
Avoidance
Airspeed Reference
Bug
Flight
Planning
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the Autopilot Status Box and above the
Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or FMS Joystick.
GPS
Navigation
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE
CNS
Interface
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch
attitude corresponding to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining
the Airspeed Reference.
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation.
Indicated Airspeed Mode is indicated by a green ‘IAS’ annunciation beside the Airspeed
Reference in the Autopilot Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is also displayed as a
light blue bug corresponding to the Airspeed Reference along the airspeed tape.
Flight
Instruments
Indicated Airspeed Mode is selected by pressing the IAS Key. This mode acquires
and maintains the Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending. When
Indicated Airspeed Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected
Altitude, airspeed and altitude.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
Indicated Airspeed Mode
343
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODE (VNAV)
NOTE: If another vertical mode softkey is pressed while VNAV Mode is selected,
VNAV Mode reverts to armed.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Mode is available for enroute/terminal cruise and
descent operations any time that VNAV flight planning is available. Refer to Section
2.3 (Vertical Navigation) for more information.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button (if equipped) while VNAV Mode is active does
not cancel the mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent
path upon release of the CWS Button.
Flight
Planning
Vertical Navigation
Mode Active
Vertical Navigation
Target Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected
Altitude
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Appendix
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Index
Vertical Navigation Mode
344
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), VNAV Mode
is activated and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (ALTS or ALTV)
is armed as appropriate.
➌
When approaching the VNAV Target Altitude (or Selected Altitude) the system
automatically transitions to ALTS or ALTV Mode with ALT Mode armed.
GPS
Navigation
➊
CNS
Interface
➋
EIS
When a flight plan is active, VNAV data is valid, and the VNV Key (GMC 305), or
VNAV Key (GMC 307/507), or AP VNAV Softkey is pressed, VNAV mode is armed
in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VNAV’ is annunciated in white in the G3X
Autopilot Status Box. If applicable, the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed
for capture of the VNAV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected Altitude (ALTS),
whichever is greater.
Flight
Instruments
➊
System
Overview
Activating Vertical Navigation Mode:
Selected
Altitude
Flight
Planning
➋
Hazard
Avoidance
➌
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
If the altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while VNAV mode is active, the
autopilot increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the
aircraft on the descent path (without commanding a climb). For large changes, it may
take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change
is made while nearing the VNAV waypoint, the aircraft may not reestablish on the
descent path in time to level off at the VNAV Target Altitude. In this case, the autopilot
will revert to Pitch Hold mode upon passing the VNAV waypoint, and Selected Altitude
Capture (ALTV) mode will be automatically armed.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
345
AUTOMATIC REVERSION TO PITCH HOLD MODE
Several situations can occur while VNAV Mode is active which cause the
AFCS to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Deviation Indicator is removed
from the PFD).
Following a reversion to Pitch Hold Mode, VNAV Mode and the appropriate
altitude capture mode become armed to allow for possible profile recapture.
VNAV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
VNAV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture
Mode and is armed automatically after the VNV Key (GMC 305) or VNAV Key
(GMC 307/507), or AP VNAV Softkey is pressed if the VNAV Target Altitude
is to be intercepted before the Selected Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’
indicates that the VNAV Target Altitude is to be captured. Refer to Section
2.3 (Vertical Navigation) for more information on setting up the VNAV target
altitude.
As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, AFCS automatically transitions
to VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This
automatic transition is indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for
up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
At 50 feet from the VNAV Target Altitude, the AFCS automatically transitions from
VNAV Target Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and selects the VNAV target
altitude as the new Autopilot Altitude Reference. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes
active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
346
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Selected
Altitude Below
VNAV Altitude
System
Overview
Automatic Transition to ALTV
Mode with ALT Mode Armed
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Altitude
Reference
Hazard
Avoidance
Automatic Transition
from ALTV to ALT Mode
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
347
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP) (WITH EXTERNAL WAAS ENABLED
IFR NAVIGATOR ONLY)
Glidepath Mode is used to track a WAAS or other satellite-based augmentation
system SBAS generated glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is annunciated
in white in the Autopilot Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance
(LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V) is loaded into the active flight plan. The active
waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint
not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI SRC Softkey
to cycle through navigation sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or Press the ALT/PTCH Softkey to
access the autopilot pitch modes and press the AP APPR Softkey (only
available when an external GPS navigation source (i.e., GTN or GNS Series)
is configured).
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an
aid in flying a stabilized approach. These approaches are NOT considered
Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches that are annunciated
on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA)
and are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information
may be provided.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle)
with the autopilot coupled, the aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if
the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and
begins to capture and track the glidepath.
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
348
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’
annunciation on the HSI)
Flight
Instruments
Glidepath
Mode Active
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Glide Path
Marker
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
Approach Mode Softkey
Glidepath Mode
AFCS
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
349
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired localizer frequency.
2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source
(use the CDI SRC Softkey to cycle through external navigation sources if
necessary).
Annun/Alerts
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the
glideslope. When Glideslope Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC
Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director mode.
3)
Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or press the ALT/PTCH Softkey
to access the autopilot pitch modes and press AP APPR Softkey. This
simultaneously selects LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes.
Or:
1)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired localizer frequency.
2)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Load the approach (LOC, ILS, LDA, SDF, etc) into
the flight plan.
3)
Press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or press the ALT/PTCH Softkey
to access the autopilot pitch modes and press AP APPR Softkey. This
simultaneously selects LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes.
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured.
Upon reaching the glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and
begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Hazard
Avoidance
Glideslope
Mode
Armed
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Glideslope
Index
Glideslope Mode Armed
350
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Pressing the TO/GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wingslevel, pitch-up attitude, allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around.
Go Around Mode arms Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically, and attempts to
modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or FMS Joystick) result
in reversion to Pitch and Roll Hold modes. Go Around Mode disengages the autopilot
if a minimum airspeed is not configured.
CNS
Interface
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode
can be selected only while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Button. The flight
director Command Bars assume a wings-level, pitch-up attitude. Takeoff Mode always
disengages the autopilot when activated.
EIS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated
as both the vertical and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director
commands a constant set pitch attitude and keeps the wings level. The GA Switch
is used to activate both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on
whether the aircraft is on the ground or in the air.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: For optional Flight Director TO/GA Mode settings refer to ‘Flight
Director Setup’ in this section.
System
Overview
GO AROUND (GA) AND TAKEOFF (TO) MODES
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Go Around (GA) Mode Armed
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
351
9.3 LATERAL MODES
The following table lists the lateral modes and respective control(s) and annunciation.
Refer to the vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around
Modes.
Lateral Mode
Roll Hold
Description
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Heading Select
Captures and tracks the Selected
Heading
Track
Captures and tracks the Selected
Ground Track
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Navigation,
GPS
Navigation,
VOR Enroute
Capture/Track
Navigation,
LOC Capture/
Track
(No
Glideslope)
Navigation,
Backcourse
Capture/Track
352
Control
Annunciation
(default)
ROL
HDG Key
(GMC
305/307/507)
or
AP HDG
Softkey
TRK Key
(GMC 507) or
TRK
HDG
TRK
GPS
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Captures and tracks a localizer
signal for backcourse approaches
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
NAV Key
(GMC
305/307/507)
or
AP NAV
Softkey
VOR
LOC
BC
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Annunciation
GPS
APR Key
(GMC
305/307/507)
or
AP APPR
Softkey
VAPP
Flight
Instruments
Control
System
Overview
LOC
EIS
CNS
Interface
TO
GPS
Navigation
Lateral Mode
Description
Approach, GPS
Approach, VOR
Capture/Track
Approach, LOC Captures and tracks the selected
Capture/Track navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
(Glideslope
Mode
automatically
armed)
Commands a constant pitch
Takeoff
angle and wings level on ground
in preparation for takeoff
Commands a constant pitch
Go Around
angle and wings level in the air
TO/GA Button
GA
Flight
Planning
The AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
Flight Director Lateral Modes
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
The CWS Button (if equipped) does not change lateral references for HDG or NAV
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon
release of the CWS Button.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
353
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the
flight director rolls the wings level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by
default. This mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the Autopilot Status Box. The current
aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle condition.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 20°
>20°
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 20°
Changing the Roll Reference
When operating in Roll Hold Mode, the roll reference can be adjusted in the following
ways:
• To decrease the roll reference, move FMS Joystick (PFD) to the left
or right and hold. The AFCS slowly decreases the bank angle. The
current bank angle as the FMS Joystick is released is held (if the
bank angle exceeds 6°). If the bank angle is less than 6° as the FMS
Joystick is released, the AFCS will roll the aircraft wings level. The roll
reference cannot be increased using the FMS Joystick.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Roll Hold Mode Responses
Index
Appendix
• Hold the CWS Button (if equipped), establish the desired bank angle,
then release the CWS Button.
354
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the AP HDG Softkey or HDG Key
(GMC control unit). Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the Selected
Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box
to the upper left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
EIS
NOTE: Press and hold the FMS Joystick (on the PFD or PFD Page) to synchronize
the Selected Heading to the current heading.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug
movement, even if the Bug is turned more than 180˚ from the present heading
(e.g., a 270˚ turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more
than 330˚ at a time result in turn reversals.
Flight
Planning
Holding the CWS Button (if equipped) and hand-flying the aircraft does not
change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the
Selected Heading upon release of the CWS Button.
GPS
Navigation
Changing the selected heading (GMC 305/307/507):
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the HDG
Softkey (if necessary). The Heading Box is highlighted.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired heading. The Selected Heading
is shown to the left of the HSI.
3) Press the HDG Key on the GMC control unit to activate HDG Mode
CNS
Interface
Changing the selected heading (Integrated Autopilot Interface):
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the HDG/ROLL
Softkey (if necessary). The Heading Box is highlighted.
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired heading. The Selected Heading
is shown to the left of the HSI.
Appendix
Index
Heading Mode Annunciation
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
355
TRACK SELECT MODE (TRK)
Track Mode acquires and maintains the Selected Ground Track.
Activating track mode:
Press the TRK Key to activate TRK Mode (GMC 507 only).
Or:
1) From the PFD Page (one display) or PFD (two display), press the HDG/ROLL
Softkey (if necessary).
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
GPS
Navigation
2)
Press the AP TRK Softkey. (NOTE: The HDG/ROLL Softkey is renamed
TRK/ROLL when the AP TRK Softkey is selected.)
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Changing the selected track:
Use the HDG/TRK Knob (GMC 507 only) to select the desired ground
track.
Or:
1) From the PFD Page (one display), press the TRK/ROLL softkey. (NOTE: On
a dedicated PFD, when the user is not modifying CRS/BARO/ALT, the FMS
Joystick defaults to modifying the selected track.)
2) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired track.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Track Mode
356
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV
Key or AP NAV Softkey is pressed, the selected mode is armed. If the CDI is less than
one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key or AP NAV
Softkey is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active
roll mode.
Flight
Planning
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater
than 105° from the aircraft heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks
a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The annunciation ‘BC’ in the Autopilot
Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode.
GPS
Navigation
Pressing the NAV Key or AP NAV Softkey selects Navigation Mode. Navigation
Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight
director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected navigation
source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll
steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can
also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is
not required.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the
localizer front course.
EIS
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at approximately a 45° angle to the track
between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director does not
give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal
or active GPS course for the flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
System
Overview
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
Appendix
Index
Navigation Mode Annunciation
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
357
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS
approach, GPS Navigation Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until
the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation Mode is armed when the automatic
navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key or AP NAV Softkey is pressed
prior to the automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts
to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI SRC Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode
after the automatic navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
LOC Mode is activated when the automatic navigation source switch takes
place. If the APR Key or AP APPR Softkey is pressed prior to the automatic
navigation source switch, LOC Mode is armed.
In the right circumstances, LOC and GS Modes can be armed while GPS
Mode is still active and the external navigator is set to GPS (not VLOC).
Arming LOC & GS Modes while GPS Mode is still active:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired localizer frequency.
2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Load the approach (LOC, ILS, LDA, SDF, etc) into
the flight plan.
3) G3X: While GPS is still the selected navigation source on the external
navigator, press the APR Key (GMC control unit) or AP APPR Softkey to
arm LOC and GS (Glideslope) Modes even with GPS Mode still active. The
external navigator will switch from GPS to VLOC automatically and the G3X
will capture the localizer and then the glideslope.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
The Selected Course is controlled by pressing the OBS CRS Softkey, VOR
CRS Softkey, or LOC CRS Softkey, (while in OBS, VOR, LOC, or BC Mode)
and turning the FMS Joystick on the G3X PFD (or PFD Page) to select the
desired course (or press XPDR/CRS > OBS CRS / VOR CRS / LOC CRS
from the PFD (or PFD Page) if a transponder is configured).
358
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
• Active navigation source manually switched (with the CDI SRC
Softkey on the PFD/PFD Page, or the CDI Key on the external navigator)
EIS
• Active flight plan is deleted (only GPS-based modes)
Flight
Instruments
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation
Mode reverts to armed)
System
Overview
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the AFCS
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• GPS reception is lost
Flight
Planning
In OBS Mode the Selected Course is controlled using the OBS CRS Softkey.
Or press XPDR/CRS > OBS CRS when a transponder is configured and turn
the FMS Joystick.
GPS
Navigation
OBS MODE
CNS
Interface
If VOR Navigation Mode is active and the VOR signal is lost, the autopilot
reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level) and reverts VOR Mode to armed
in the event the VOR signal is reestablished.
Hazard
Avoidance
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (with external GPS navigator configured):
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Press the OBS Key. The ‘Set OBS and Hold’ Active
Flight Plan Page menu option is now available.
2) G3X: Use the OBS CRS Softkey on the PFD page to select the desired
course to/from the waypoint.
Annun/Alerts
Additional
Features
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode (without external GPS navigator):
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key while navigating a
flight plan or Direct-to.
2) With ‘Set OBS and Hold’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The OBS Mode
Box is highlighted.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired course to/from the waypoint.
4) To cancel OBS Mode and return to automatic waypoint sequencing, press
the MENU Key, with ‘Release Hold’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
359
VOR MODE FOR NAVIGATION
VOR Mode can be used for navigation when an external navigation receiver is
configured.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Navigation
Mode Active
Additional
Features
Selected
Navigation
Source
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Navigation
Mode Softkey
Tracking Direct-to a VOR:
1)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired VOR frequency. If a
Appendix
GTN or GNS series unit is not configured skip to Step 3.
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR (GTN or GNS series units only): Ensure the ‘VLOC’
indication is showing in the lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.
Index
2)
360
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
4)
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the VOR CRS Softkey (or press
XPDR/CRS > VOR CRS if a transponder is configured) and turn the FMS
Joystick until the CDI is centered with a ‘TO’ indication.
EIS
Or:
Or: Press the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
1)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired VOR frequency. If a
Hazard
Avoidance
Intercepting and tracking a VOR radial:
Flight
Planning
A green ‘VOR’ indication is displayed in the autopilot status bar and the autopilot
tracks the selected course to the VOR.
GPS
Navigation
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey to activate
VOR Mode.
CNS
Interface
From the PFD or PFD Page press the VOR CRS Softkey (or press XPDR/CRS
> VOR CRS if a transponder is configured), then press and hold the FMS
Joystick to automatically center the CDI.
5)
Flight
Instruments
G3X: Ensure that VOR1 or VOR2 is the selected navigation source (use
the CDI SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external
navigation sources if necessary). It should say ‘VOR1’ or ‘VOR2’ on the HSI
and the needle should be green.
System
Overview
3)
GTN or GNS series unit is not configured skip to Step 3.
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR (GTN or GNS series units only): Ensure the ‘VLOC’
indication is showing in the lower-left corner of the. If not, press the CDI
Additional
Features
2)
Key.
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the VOR CRS Softkey (or press
XPDR/CRS > VOR CRS if a transponder is configured) and turn the FMS
Joystick to select the desired radial.
5)
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey.
Index
Or: Press or the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
4)
Annun/Alerts
G3X: Ensure that VOR1 or VOR2 is the selected navigation source (use
the CDI SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external
navigation sources if necessary). It should say ‘VOR1’ or ‘VOR2’ on the HSI
and the needle should be green.
AFCS
3)
361
If there is less than half-scale deviation when the AP NAV Softkey or NAV Key is
pressed, VOR Mode will activate (green text), intercept, and track the selected radial.
If there is more than half-scale deviation when the AP NAV Softkey is pressed, VOR
Mode will arm (white text) first, then activate when closer to the radial.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Navigation
Mode Active
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Selected
Navigation
Source
Appendix
VOR CRS
Softkey
Index
Intercepting and Tracking a VOR Radial
362
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
BC
Control
Hazard
Avoidance
LOC
Flight
Planning
VOR
Lateral Mode Annunciation
Description
Approach, GPS
GPS
VOR Approach
Captures and
VOR
NAV Key
Capture/Track
tracks the selected
(GMC
navigation source
LOC Capture/
305/307/507) Track (No
(GPS, VOR, LOC)
LOC
or
Glideslope)
AP NAV
Captures and tracks
Softkey
Backcourse
a localizer signal
BC
Capture/Track
for backcourse
approaches
GPS
Navigation
Example
LNAV
CNS
Interface
Press the AP NAV Softkey or NAV Key (GMC control unit) to arm/activate VOR,
LOC/BC, and GPS (LNAV only) lateral modes. Lateral modes acquire and track the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on the loaded approach.
These modes use the selected navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs
to fly the approach. Press the AP NAV Softkey when the CDI is greater than one
dot to arm the selected modes (annunciated in white). Press the AP NAV Softkey
when the CDI deviation is less than one dot to activate, capture and track the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC).
EIS
NOTE: For the autopilot to enter a VLOC mode, the G3X must have GPS
reception and the external navigation receiver must have a valid signal (VOR
or LOC).
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal
or active GPS course for the flight director to enter Approach Mode.
System
Overview
APPROACHES WITHOUT VERTICAL GUIDANCE
Approaches without Vertical Guidance
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
363
GPS APPROACH WITHOUT VERTICAL GUIDANCE
A GPS approach without vertical guidance (LNAV) is flown using GPS NAV Mode.
Selecting a GPS Approach without vertical guidance:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach without vertical guidance
(LNAV) is loaded into the active flight plan.
2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure the ‘GPS’ indication is showing in the
lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.
3) G3X: Ensure that GPS1 is the selected navigation source on the PFD or
PFD Page (use the CDI SRC Softkey to cycle through external navigation
sources if necessary).
4) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the GPS approach using the
PROC Key.
5) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey to activate
GPS Mode.
Or: Press or the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
6) Adjust the aircraft’s pitch axis as required.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
VOR APPROACH
A VOR approach is flown using VOR Mode.
Selecting a VOR Approach:
1)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired VOR frequency. If a
AFCS
GTN or GNS series unit is not configured skip to Step 3.
Annun/Alerts
2)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR (GTN or GNS series units only): Ensure the ‘VLOC’
indication is showing in the lower-left corner of the. If not, press the CDI
Key.
G3X: Ensure that VOR1 or VOR2 is the selected navigation source (use
the CDI SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external
navigation sources if necessary). It should say ‘VOR1’ or ‘VOR2’ on the HSI
and the needle should be green.
4)
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the VOR CRS Softkey (or press
XPDR/CRS > VOR CRS if a transponder is configured) and turn the FMS
Joystick to select the inbound approach course (radial).
Index
Appendix
3)
364
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
5)
Or: Press the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
EIS
6)
Flight
Instruments
If there is less than half-scale deviation when the AP NAV Softkey or NAV
Key is pressed, VOR Mode will activate (green text), intercept, and track
the selected radial. If there is more than half-scale deviation when the AP
NAV Softkey or NAV Key is pressed, VOR Mode will arm (white text) first,
then activate when closer to the radial.
System
Overview
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey.
Adjust the aircraft’s pitch axis as required.
CNS
Interface
LOCALIZER APPROACH (NO GS)
LOC Mode is used to fly a localizer only approach (no glideslope).
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Selecting LOC Mode for a localizer only approach:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency,
2) G3X: Ensure that LOC1 is the selected navigation source (use the CDI
SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external navigation
sources if necessary). The HSI should automatically slew the needle to the
correct course.
3) G3X: From the PFD, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access the autopilot
lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey to activate LOC Mode.
Or: Press or the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
If the localizer deviation is less than half-scale when the AP NAV Softkey
or NAV Key is pressed, the autopilot will activate LOC Mode and track the
localizer, otherwise LOC Mode is armed and the pilot is responsible for
intercepting the localizer. In some cases it may be necessary to use HDG
Mode with LOC Mode armed to follow a vector to the localizer.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
365
AFCS
System
Overview
BACKCOURSE APPROACH
NOTE: ‘BC’ will not be displayed on the G3X HSI.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction.
Backcourse is indicated by ‘BC’ in the autopilot status box.
If GS and LOC Mode are armed, the autopilot can only capture the localizer front
course, indicated by ‘LOC’ in the autopilot status box. If only LOC Mode is armed (not
GS Mode), the autopilot will capture either the front course or the backcourse based
on the angle at which the aircraft intercepts the localizer.
Selecting BC Mode:
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the
localizer front course.
1)
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency.
2)
G3X: Ensure that LOC1 is the selected navigation source on the (use
the CDI SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external
navigation sources if necessary). The HSI should automatically slew the
needle to the correct course.
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey.
Additional
Features
3)
Or: Press or the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
If the aircraft heading is within 75˚ of the localizer backcourse then BC
Mode will be armed. If the aircraft heading is within 105˚ of the localizer
front course, LOC Mode will be armed.
366
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Modes
Annunciation
CNS
Interface
Description
Captures and tracks the
lateral portion of a GPS
approach
GPS
Vertical:
Glidepath
GP
Captures and tracks a
WAAS approach glidepath
Lateral:
Localizer
LOC
Captures and tracks the
localizer
Hazard
Avoidance
Vertical:
Glideslope
GS
Captures and tracks the
glideslope
Additional
Features
Lateral:
GPS
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Control
APR Key
(GMC
LPV,
305/307/507)
LNAV/
VNAV,
or
LNAV+V
AP APPR
Softkey
APR Key
(GMC
LOC, ILS, 305/307/507)
LDA, SDF
or
AP APPR
Softkey
EIS
Example
Flight
Instruments
Press the AP APPR Softkey or APR Key (GMC control unit) to arm/activate both
lateral and vertical modes for approach. When Glidepath (GP) Mode is armed for
a GPS approach with vertical guidance, GPS Mode is automatically armed. When
Glideslope (GS) Mode armed for an ILS approach, LOC Mode is automatically armed.
Press the AP APPR Softkey or APR Key (GMC control unit) when the CDI is greater
than one dot to arm the selected modes (annunciated in white). Press the AP APPR
Softkey or APR Key (GMC control unit) when the CDI deviation is less than one dot to
activate, capture and track the selected navigation source.
System
Overview
APPROACHES WITH LATERAL + VERTICAL GUIDANCE
AFCS
Lateral + Vertical Approaches
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
367
AFCS
NOTE: To cancel Glidepath (GP) Mode without cancelling GPS Mode, press
the AP NAV Softkey once. Pressing it a second time cancels GPS Mode.
When Glidepath (GP) Mode is armed for a GPS approach with vertical guidance, GPS
Mode is automatically armed.
Selecting a GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance
(LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
2) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure the ‘GPS’ indication is showing in the
lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.
3) G3X: Ensure that GPS1 is the selected navigation source on the PFD or
PFD Page (use the CDI SRC Softkey to cycle through external navigation
sources if necessary).
4) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the GPS approach using the
PROC Key.
5) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT/PTCH Softkey to access the
autopilot pitch modes and then press the AP APPR Softkey.
Or Press the APR Key on the GMC control unit.
LOCALIZER WITH GLIDESLOPE
LOC Mode (lateral) and GS Mode (vertical) are both armed by pressing the ALT/
PTCH Softkey and then the AP APPR Softkey from the G3X PFD or by pressing the
APR Key on the GMC control unit. LOC/ILS approach captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105˚.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
GPS APPROACH WITH VERTICAL GUIDANCE
368
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
LOC Mode Glideslope Mode
Active
Active
Flight
Instruments
EIS
Glideslope
Indicator
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Selected
Navigation
Source
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
ILS Approach PFD
Appendix
NOTE: To cancel Glideslope (GS) Mode without cancelling LOC Mode, press
the AP NAV Softkey once. Pressing it a second time cancels LOC Mode.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
369
AFCS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Selecting LOC Mode with GS Mode:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired LOC frequency.
2) G3X: Ensure that LOC1 is the selected navigation source (use the CDI
SRC Softkey on the PFD or PFD Page to cycle through external navigation
sources if necessary). The HSI should automatically slew the needle to the
correct course.
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Selected
Navigation
Source
Flight
Planning
CDI Source
Softkey
Hazard
Avoidance
3)
Or: Press the APR Key on the GMC control unit.
If the following occurs, the autopilot reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and the Navigation source is manually
switched
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
This simultaneously selects LOC Mode and GS (Glideslope) Mode. If the
localizer deviation is less than half-scale when the AP APPR Softkey or
APR Key is pressed, the autopilot will activate LOC Mode and track the
localizer, otherwise LOC Mode is armed and the pilot is responsible for
intercepting the localizer.
• The localizer signal is lost
If the Glideslope signal is lost , GS Mode will revert to Pitch Hold Mode and hold the
last pitch attitude.
Index
Appendix
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT/PTCH Softkey to access the
autopilot pitch modes and then press the AP APPR Softkey.
370
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
The external navigator, G3X, and autopilot can be used to fly a full ILS approach with
procedure turn, from the enroute environment to the missed approach point.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
371
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
NOTE: Check step #5 if the external navigator doesn’t automatically switch
from GPS to VLOC Mode shortly after turning inbound on the final approach
course.
Annun/Alerts
GPS Mode is now active and LOC Mode is armed in the roll axis. ALT
Mode is active and GS is armed in the pitch axis. The autopilot should now
navigate the entire approach from the IAF (Initial Approach Fix) to the MAP
(Missed Approach Point) with the only adjustment being the throttle.
AFCS
Or: Press the APR Key on the GMC control unit.
Additional
Features
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT/PTCH Softkey to access the
autopilot pitch modes and then press the AP APPR Softkey to arm LOC and
GS modes. Press the AP ALT Softkey.
Hazard
Avoidance
6)
Flight
Planning
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and identify the localizer frequency by
pressing the VLOC Flip-flop Key. (Note: The external navigator should have
automatically loaded the localizer frequency into the standby VLOC slot.)
GPS
Navigation
5)
CNS
Interface
Or: Press the NAV Key on the GMC control unit.
EIS
Setting up a coupled ILS approach:
1) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure the ‘GPS’ indication is showing in the
lower-left corner. If not, use the CDI Key.
2) G3X: Ensure that GPS1 is the selected navigation source on the PFD or
PFD Page (use the CDI SRC Softkey to cycle through external navigation
sources if necessary).
3) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select and activate the ILS approach using the
PROC Key.
4) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey to access
the autopilot lateral modes and then press the AP NAV Softkey to activate
GPS Mode. The autopilot should start navigating to the IAF (Initial
Approach Fix).
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Configuration of a GNS 430 or GNS 530 is required for a coupled ILS
approach.
System
Overview
COUPLED ILS APPROACH WITH PROCEDURE TURN
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan
provided that GPS Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source
on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is the active flight plan leg. It is important
to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS. Thus, even if the
APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the
Initial Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is
completed.
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e.
ATC provides vectors to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or
Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically intercept or track the arc unless the pilot
activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation Mode. The AFCS will
not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of
the arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot
deselects GPS Navigation Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
LEVEL MODE
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot in Level
vertical and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude or heading. When the
LVL Key is pressed all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and
flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll. While in level mode, all other
modes are available by pressing the corresponding button.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
372
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Level (LVL) Mode Active
Flight
Planning
AFCS ALERTS
Refer to Section 10.4, ‘PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions’.
Hazard
Avoidance
9.4 EXAMPLE AUTOPILOT FLIGHT PLAN
373
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annun/Alerts
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244
is flown using GPS Navigation. The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS)
approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach is executed.
AFCS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on an example flight plan from KMKC
to KCOS) shows various GMC control unit and Integrate Autopilot interface procedures
used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B. Wheeler Downtown
Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and receives vectors to intercept V4.
Additional
Features
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for
navigation) in this section are for instructional purposes only and should
be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying diagrams
correspond to numbered procedure steps.
AFCS
0
30
27
30
27
30
24
24
21
27
24
27
15
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
Flight
Instruments
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
V4
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
18
V 244
3
9
0
33
KMKC
15
6
KCOS
3
3
30
3
6
0
33
6
System
Overview
33
0
33
12
21
18
EIS
15
Flight Plan Overview
CNS
Interface
DEPARTURE
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
a) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT Softkey and turn the
FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) GMC Control Unit: Push the TO/GA Button to activate Takeoff Mode.
The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude to
follow.
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
c) GMC Control Unit: After takeoff press the AP Key to engage the
autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff
Mode and wings level.
Appendix
2)
In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected
Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Indicated Airspeed Mode may be
used).
a) GMC Control Unit: Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
Index
Or: G3X: After takeoff press the AP VS Softkey to activate Vertical Speed
Mode.
374
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
a) Press the AP HDG Softkey to activate Heading Select Mode while the
autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot follows the Selected
Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
GPS
Navigation
Or: G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG/ROLL Softkey (if
necessary). The Heading Box is highlighted. Turn the FMS Joystick to
select the desired heading, and press the FMS Joystick, complying with ATC
vectors to intercept Airway V4.
CNS
Interface
a) G
MC Control Unit: Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode
while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot follows the
Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired
heading.
EIS
G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG Softkey (if necessary). The
Heading Box is highlighted. Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired
heading, and press the FMS Joystick, complying with ATC vectors to
intercept Airway V4.
Flight
Instruments
3)
System
Overview
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed
Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or FMS Joystick.
Additional
Features
4)
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to
Selected Altitude Capture Mode, indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation
flashing for up to 10 seconds.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes
for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
levels the aircraft.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
375
System
Overview
AFCS
HD
GM
od
e
TO M
o
de
Flight
Instruments
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
EIS
ALT Mode
4
CNS
Interface
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
ode
GPS
Navigation
M
TO
Departure
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode.
Airway V4 to Salina VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight
plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight director Navigation Mode using either VOR
or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR Navigation Mode
is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired VOR frequency.
If a GTN or GNS series unit is configured, ensure the ‘VLOC’ indication is
showing in the lower-left corner. If not, press the CDI Key.
b) G3X: Press the CDI SRC Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
Index
Appendix
c) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the VOR CRS Softkey (or
press XPDR/CRS > VOR CRS if a transponder is configured) and turn
the FMS Joystick to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point,
the flight director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot
continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
376
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
d) GMC Control Unit: Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation
Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of the
active lateral mode.
Flight
Instruments
Or: G3X: Press the AP NAV Softkey. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and
the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of the active lateral
mode.
EIS
The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the
Selected Course.
Flight
Planning
3)
Hazard
Avoidance
0
33
3
30
Hd
29 g
0o
GPS
Navigation
As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions
from Heading Select to VOR Navigation Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation
flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
CNS
Interface
2)
V4
6
27
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
NA
V
Mo
de
9
255
VO
R
Additional
Features
3
o
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
Ar
AFCS
VO
R
m
ed
15
1
Annun/Alerts
21
18
Intercepting a VOR Radial
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
377
AFCS
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes
the flight director to revert back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway
V244. The aircraft is currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) G3X: Press the CDI SRC Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation
source.
b) GMC Control Unit: Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode.
The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight plan leg.
Or: G3X: Press the AP NAV Softkey to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight plan leg.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
2)
Additional
Features
Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under
GPS guidance. Note that in GPS Navigation Mode, course changes defined
by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action required.
0
33
3
o
075
e
30
AV Mod
6
27
GPS N
260
o
15
21
18
12
15
21
18
Appendix
2
12
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
e
AV Mod
VOR N
9
o
Annun/Alerts
V4
6
AFCS
3
30
0
33
Index
Transition to GPS Flight Plan
378
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation
for the approach to KCOS. Two methods are presented for descent:
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Indicated Airspeed descent:
1) Select Indicated Airspeed Mode:
a) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT Softkey and turn the
FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
b) GMC Control Unit: Press the IAS Key to activate Indicated Airspeed
Mode. The annunciation ‘IAS’ appears next to the Airspeed Reference,
which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude
Capture Mode is armed automatically.
EIS
• VNAV descent – VNAV Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path defined
in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight
plan.
Flight
Instruments
• Indicated Airspeed descent (GMC Control Unit)– Indicated Airspeed Mode can
be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a constant airspeed. This descent
method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
System
Overview
DESCENT
Additional
Features
Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel or FMS Joystick to adjust the commanded
airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow
descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode while the autopilot maintains the
current airspeed.
3)
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to
Selected Altitude Capture Mode, indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation
flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
2)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
379
AFCS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching
50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold
Mode and levels the aircraft.
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
EIS
ALT Mode
2
IAS
Mod
e
3
CNS
Interface
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
GPS
Navigation
IAS Descent
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
VNAV descent to VNAV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNAV flight control:
a) GMC Control Unit: Press the VNV Key to arm VNV Mode. The white
annunciation ‘VNAV’ appears.
Or: G3X: Press the AP VNAV Softkey to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode.
The white annunciation ‘VNAV’ appears.
AFCS
b) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT Softkey and turn the
FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude to the flight plan’s VNAV
Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
Annun/Alerts
Or: G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT/PTCH Softkey and turn
the FMS Joystick to set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
Index
Appendix
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNAV Target
Altitude, the flight director captures the Selected Altitude rather than
the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes
active (ALTS is armed rather than ALTV). If no altitude select value has
been entered in the altitude select window, VNAV will flash white one
minute prior to descent and the VNAV profile will not be captured.
380
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions
to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode, indicated by the green ‘ALTV’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
EIS
3)
Flight
Instruments
When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to
VNAV Mode and begins the descent to the VNAV Target Altitude. Intention
to capture the VNAV Target Altitude is indicated by the white ‘ALTV’
annunciation.
System
Overview
2)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50
feet from the VNV Target Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold
Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
Flight
Planning
ALT Mode
TOD
Hazard
Avoidance
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
VNA
VM
Additional
Features
ode
3
BOD
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
AFCS
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Annun/Alerts
VNAV Descent
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
381
APPROACH
Expecting vectors for ILS approach into KCOS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation
Mode with the GFC 3X. When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode
must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Tune and activate the desired localizer
frequency.
b) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for
KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
c) G3X: From the PFD or PFD Page, press the HDG Softkey (if necessary).
The Heading Box is highlighted. Turn the FMS Joystick to select the
desired heading, and press the FMS Joystick, to complying with ATC
vectors.
d) GMC Control Unit: Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft
to the desired heading.
Or: G3X: Press the AP HDG Softkey. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the
desired heading.
e) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
Annun/Alerts
2)
Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is
tuned.
Index
Appendix
b) GMC Control Unit: Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to
arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear in white
as armed mode annunciations.
382
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
System
Overview
Or: Press the AP APPR Softkey when cleared for approach to arm
Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear in white as
armed mode annunciations.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
c) T he navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs,
the localizer signal can be captured and the flight director determines when to
begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight director now
provides guidance to the missed approach point.
CNS
Interface
There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS
approach:
• Use the TO/GA Button (GMC control unit) to execute a missed approach
and apply TO/GA power.
Hazard
Avoidance
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height to execute a missed
approach and apply go-around power.
Flight
Planning
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
GPS
Navigation
3)
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
383
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
ILS Approach to KCOS
384
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the
approach:
CNS
Interface
4)
EIS
Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
Flight
Instruments
3)
System
Overview
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance (SBAS Only):
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) G3X: Press the CDI SRC Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation
source.
b) EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR: Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for
KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) GMC Control Unit: Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has
been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and Glidepath Mode is
armed.
Or: Press the AP APPR Softkey once clearance for approach has been received.
GPS Approach Mode is activated and Glidepath Mode is armed.
• Use the TO/GA Button (GMC control unit) to execute a missed approach
and apply TO/GA power.
AFCS
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height to execute a missed
approach and apply go-around power.
Additional
Features
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
385
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
AFCS
LPV Approach to KCOS
386
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Flight
Instruments
Flying a missed approach:
1) Push the TO/GA (if installed) Button at the Decision height and apply goaround power to execute a missed approach. The flight director Command
Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow.
System
Overview
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
EIS
Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach
Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
G3X: Press the AP NAV Softkey to have the autopilot fly the hold.
GPS
Navigation
GMC Control Unit: Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
(Only available if a GTN is configured)
CNS
Interface
2)
Flight
Planning
From the PFD or PFD Page, press the ALT Softkey and turn the FMS Joystick
to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the IAS Key.
Additional
Features
Or: Use an alternate vertical mode such as vertical speed on the integrate
autopilot interface.
Hazard
Avoidance
3)
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions
to Selected Altitude Capture Mode, indicated by the green ‘ALTS’
annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
387
Index
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching
50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold
Mode and levels the aircraft.
System
Overview
AFCS
Flight
Instruments
4)
The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is
activated.
EIS
4
CNS
Interface
ADANE
GPS
Navigation
N
GPS
ode
˚
073
Hazard
Avoidance
GPS NAV Mode
Flight
Planning
WABOP
M
AV
Additional
Features
3
2
AFCS
GA Mode
KCOS
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
1
Index
Go Around/Missed Approach
388
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
System
Overview
SECTION 10 ANNUNCIATIONS & ALERTS
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
389
Flight
Planning
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
GPS
Navigation
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
CNS
Interface
Comments
Within 200 feet of final VNAV target altitude.
The aircraft is within one minute of reaching the
initial VNAV decent point.
Arriving at XXX
The aircraft is nearing the destination.
Can’t Unlock Maps
No applicable unlock code for one or more maps
was found. All MapSource maps are not accessible.
Database Error
Internal problem with the system. Contact your
dealer or Garmin Product Support to have the unit
repaired.
Fuel Tank
A reminder for switching fuel tanks. The reminder
message repeats at the specified interval after the
beginning of each trip.
Lost Satellite Reception
The system is unable to receive satellite signals.
Memory Full
System memory is full, no further data can be saved.
Proximity Alarm XXXXX
You have reached the distance set for a proximity
waypoint.
Next DTK XXX
The aircraft is nearing a turn in a route.
No XM Signal
The XM antenna is not receiving a signal.
Proximity Alarm Memory Full No additional proximity waypoints can be saved.
Proximity Waypoints Overlap The radius of two proximity waypoints overlap.
Route Already Exists
A route name that already exists has been entered.
Route Memory Full
No additional routes can be saved.
Route Truncated
Uploaded route from another device has more than
300 waypoints.
Route Waypoint Memory Full No additional route waypoints can be saved.
Saving XM Program
An XM Radio channel lineup change has occurred
Information
and the unit is saving the channel lineup to memory.
EIS
Message
Approaching Target Altitude
Approaching VNAV Profile
Flight
Instruments
10.1 MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES
System
Overview
Track Already Exists
Track Log Full
Comments
Approaching a turn that requires a bank angle in
excess of 25 degrees to stay on course.
A saved track with the same name already exists.
The track log is full and track recording was turned
off. To record more track points, you need to clear
the track log and turn track recording on.
No more track data can be stored. Delete the old
track data to store the new data.
A complete uploaded track will not fit in memory.
The oldest track log points have been deleted.
Data transfer was completed.
VNAV function has been cancelled due to a change
in the active route.
A waypoint with the same name already exists.
The unit has stored the maximum number of
waypoints.
EIS
Message
Steep Turn Ahead
Flight
Instruments
Annunciations & Alerts
Track Truncated
Transfer Complete
VNAV Cancelled
Waypoint Already Exists
Waypoint Memory Full
Miscellaneous Message Advisories
AIRSPACE MESSAGES
Message
Inside Airspace
Airspace Near and Ahead
Airspace Ahead, Within 10
Minutes
Airspace Near, Within 2 nm
Comments
Inside the boundaries of the airspace.
Within two nautical miles of an airspace
and your current course takes you inside the
airspace.
The projected course takes you inside an
airspace within the next 10 minutes or less.
Within two nautical miles of an airspace but not
projected to enter it.
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Track Memory Full
390
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
EIS
A yellow MSG (Message) alert will flash in the bottom right corner of the splitscreen PFD Page or full-screen PFD to alert the pilot of System Status Messages on
the INFO Page.
Flight
Instruments
The ‘INFO’ Page on the Navigation Bar will flash yellow if there is a System Status
Message (split-screen and full-screen MFD).
System
Overview
10.2 SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES (INFO PAGE)
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
System Status Message Alert
(Split-Screen and Full-Screen MFD)
Hazard
Avoidance
Accessing the Info Page system status messages:
1) When the ‘INFO’ Page on the Page Navigation Bar is flashing, use the FMS
Joystick to access the Info Page.
2) Press the yellow MESSAGES Softkey. The Messages Page is displayed.
Flight
Planning
System Status Message Alert
(Split-Screen PFD Page &
Full-Screen PFD)
Additional
Features
AFCS
System Status Message Alert (Info Page)
(Split-Screen)
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Messages Page (Split-Screen)
3)
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
To return to the Info Page, press the FMS Joystick, CLR Key, or EXIT
Softkey. The Info Page will stop flashing, but remain yellow until the
message is resolved.
391
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
The following system status messages may appear on the Info Page.
SYSTEM STATUS MESSAGES
Message
[LRU name] hardware fault
Comments
The specifice LRU has a hardware fault and
requires service.
Config module error
The GDU has encountered a problem writing to/
from the config module The G3X system should
be serviced.
Config module missing
The PFD1 config module is not connected.
[LRU name] using backup RS-232 The specified LRU was wired for both CAN and
interface
RS-232 communication paths, and the device is
not communicating via CAN.
[LRU name] temperature out of
The specified LRU is either too hot or too cold.
spec
Check installation and/or hardware for cause.
[LRU name] power supply fault
The specified LRU’s internal power supply has
a problem or the input voltage is out of the
required specifications.
AHRS [number] not calibrated
The specified AHRS is either not calibrated
or requires the post installation calibration
procedure. See G3X installation manual for
calibration instructions.
AHRS [number] magnetometer
The specified AHRS is either not calibrated or
not calibrated
requires the magnetometer post installation
calibration procedure. See G3X installation
manual for calibration instructions.
AHRS [number] not receiving
The specified AHRS is not receiving
magnetometer data
magnetometer data. Check installation and
configuration.
AHRS [number] not receiving air The specified AHRS is not receiving air data.
data
Check installation and configuration.
AHRS [number] not receiving GPS The specified AHRS is not receiving any or any
data
useful GPS information. Check installation and
configuration.
392
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Message
Comments
AHRS [number] magnetic
An anomaly has been detected in the
anomaly - check mag installation magnetometer data. Heading may or may not
be flagged invalid.
AHRS [number] magnetic field
The data being communicated by the GMU
model invalid
to the specified AHRS is invalid. Heading is
flagged invalid and the AHRS will use GPS for
backup mode operation.
AHRS [number] model out of
The specified AHRS Earth magnetic field model
date
is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
Network communication error
Two or more LRUs may have the same network
address. Check wiring and configuration.
[LRU name] Network address
One or more LRUs on the CAN bus have an
changed
indeterminate network address. This likely
indicates a wiring issue or an intermittent
connector pin. If the problem persists, the G3X
system should be serviced.
[GDU name] software version
The PFD and MFD do not have the same
mismatch
software version installed. Display crosstalk is
disabled. Ensure all installed display software
matches.
[GDU name] obstacle database The PFD and MFD have different obstacle
mismatch
database versions installed. Install the correct
obstacle database on all displays for proper
terrain/obstacle alerting.
[GDU name] obstacle database The obstacle database is missing. Install the
missing
correct obstacle database on all displays for
proper terrain/obstacle alerting.
[GDU name] terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain
mismatch
database versions installed. Install the correct
terrain database on all displays for proper
terrain/obstacle alerting.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
393
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Message
[GDU name] terrain database
missing
Comments
The terrain database is missing. Install the
correct terrain database on all displays for
proper terrain/obstacle alerting.
[GDU name] navigation
The PFD and MFD have different navigation
database mismatch
database versions installed. Install the correct
navigation database on all displays for proper
navigation.
[GDU name] navigation
The navigation database is missing. Install the
database missing
correct navigation database on all displays for
proper navigation.
[GDU name] audio database
The audio database is missing. Return unit for
missing.
service
[GDU name] audio database
The audio database is incompatible. Return
incompatible
unit for service
Using external GPS position data The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
connection is not available; the remaining
displays are using 2D GPS position data from
an external GPS navigator.
[GDU name] GPS antenna not
The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
connected
connection does not detect any antenna current
draw from the GPS antenna RF connector.
[GDU name] GPS antenna
The display that is configured for a GPS antenna
shorted to ground
connection detects the GPS antenna RF
connector is shorted to ground.
[GDU name] GPS receiver needs The internal GPS receiver in the specified GDU
service
is not responding. The affected GDU should be
serviced.
XM receiver needs service
The display should be serviced when possible.
Not receiving external GPS
Not receiving RS-232 data from the specificed
[number] RS-232 Aviation data
external GPS navigator.
Not receiving GTX TIS-A RS-232
Not receiving RS-232 data from the GTX.
data
394
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Demo Mode - Do not use for
navigation
Flight
Planning
Aviation waypoint has moved
GPS
Navigation
Aviation waypoint was deleted
CNS
Interface
Not receiving Vertical Power RS232 data
Using internal flight plan for
navigation
Not receiving RS-232 data from the external
third-party autopilot unit.
The third-party autopilot unit is reporting a fault
and needs service.
Incorrect OBS value received from nav/comm.
Check nav/comm OBS resolver setup (see
Installation Manual guidance).
Data is not being received on the specified GSU
73 ARINC 429 input (port number can be 1-4).
Data received on an ARINC 429 input does not
match the expected configuration.
Not receiving RS-232 data from the Vertical
Power unit.
Communication with the external GPS
navigation source has failed. The G3X internal
flight plan is being used for navigation.
A waypoint that was part of a stored flight
plan was deleted from the latest navigation
database. Check stored flight plans
A waypoint that was part of a stored flight plan
was moved. Check stored flight plans.
The system is in demo mode, do not use for
navigation.
EIS
Not receiving ARINC 429 [port
number] data
ARINC 429 receiver error
Not receiving RS-232 data from the nav/comm.
Flight
Instruments
VHF nav/comm communication
error
Comments
System
Overview
Message
Not receiving nav/comm
[number] RS-232 data
Not receiving autopilot RS-232
data
Autopilot fault detected
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
395
10.3 AUDIO ALERTS
VOICE ALERTS
• “Five Hundred”—when the aircraft descends through 500 feet above the destination airport.
The following voice terrain alerts are issued when flight conditions meet
parameters that are set within the software algorithms, and are dependent on
the sensitivity level set in the Terrain Setup Menu.
Alert Severity
Terrain
Obstacle
Descent Rate
Caution
“caution, terrain”
“caution, terrain
ahead”
“caution, obstacle”
“caution, obstacle
ahead”
“caution, sink
rate”
Warning
“terrain ahead! pull
up!”
“terrain! terrain! pull
up! pull up!”
“obstacle ahead! pull
up!”
“obstacle! obstacle!
pull up! pull up!”
“sink rate, pull
up!”
“pull up!”
Voice Alerts Summary
AOA AURAL ALERT
When a G3X is configured with a GSU 25, a GAP 26 and AOA is configured. The
G3X will issue an aural alert when the aircraft’s pitch attitude approaches a stall. A
persistent beeping will begin at the first red chevron and will become progressively
faster as the AOA is increased. A constant tone will be heard at the second red chevron
indicating a stall condition.
Stall Warning
AOA (Flashes)
(Constant
Aural Tone)
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Index
Aural Beeping
begins
Angle of Attack Display (AOA)
396
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
System
Overview
10.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING
FUNCTIONS
Flight
Instruments
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD.
UNCERTAIN HEADING
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
If the G3X senses that the magnetic heading measurement is valid, but possibly
outside of the internal accuracy limits, the numeric heading value on the PFD is display
in yellow. When the system heading is uncertain, features that use heading data may
not be available (e.g., autopilot HDG mode or PFD wind calculations). An uncertain
heading value can be caused by magnetic anomalies or installation/calibration issues.
Refer to the G3X installation manual for installation and calibration information for
the magnetometer
Flight
Planning
Uncertain Heading
Hazard
Avoidance
EXTERNAL NAVIGATOR MESSAGES (OPTIONAL)
Additional
Features
When an external navigator has a pending message, a yellow ‘MSG’ annunciation
will appear in the bottom left quadrant of the HSI.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
External
Navigator
Message
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
External Navigator Messages (HSI)
397
CAS MESSAGES (OPTIONAL)
The CAS messages displayed depend upon the current configuration, and will
vary from the examples listed below. Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for more
information on configuring CAS messages (if applicable).
CAS Messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory, and safe):
• WARNING (red): Requires immediate attention. Warning messages will flash
until acknowledged by pressing the ENT Key.
• CAUTION (yellow): Requires pilot awareness and possible future corrective
action.
• ADVISORY (white): Provides general information.
• SAFE (green): Indicates a safe condition (i.e., GEAR DOWN).
Warning annunciation text is shown in red in the CAS Annunciation Window on the
full-screen PFD and/or split-screen PFD Page.
CAS Messages will appear to the right of the Horizontal Situation Indicator
(dependent on number of CAS messages configured) on the full screen PFD and/or the
split-screen PFD Page.
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Index
Appendix
CAS Warning Example
398
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Important CAS Messages my not be visible at all times (e.g., split-screen PFD Page is
not displayed, or FPL or NRST Pages are displayed on the full-screen PFD). In that case
a Check Alerts Triangle is displayed to the right of the Airspeed Indicator as a reminder
to check the CAS Messages.
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
CAS Warning Example (Check Alerts Triangle)
Flight
Planning
If less than four CAS Messages are configured for the system, the CAS Messages
are displayed to the right of the Airspeed Indicator and the Check Alerts Triangle is not
displayed.
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
CAS Warning Example
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
399
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
In addition to the Terrain Pop-up Alert in the lower left corner of the page, terrain
and obstacle annunciations appear on the PFD and/or PFD Page in the upper left
corner of the Attitude Indicator. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more
details.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Additional
Features
Terrain Pop-up Alert
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Terrain Alerts
(PFD and/or PFD Page)
400
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
Flight
Instruments
The G3X displays traffic symbolically on the Map Page, and the Traffic Warning
Window (Inset Map) in the lower left corner of the display(s). Refer to the Hazard
Avoidance Section and the Annunciations and Alerts section for more details.
System
Overview
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Inset Map (Traffic
Warning Window)
Additional
Features
Traffic Alerts
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
401
AHRS ALERTS (OPTIONAL)
Multiple ADAHRS units may be installed to provide redundancy for critical flight
data. If the PFD ADAHRS source selection is set to Auto, and attitude or air data from
the default ADAHRS source becomes unavailable, the PFD will automatically switch to
using attitude and air data from another valid ADAHRS source. The selected ADAHRS
source can also be manually changed by the pilot. In either case, a message appears
on the PFD to indicate that an alternate source of attitude and air data is being used
(e.g. ‘USING AHRS2’).
Selected Sensor Messages
If a standby flight display is present, and all installed ADAHRS sources are unavailable,
the messages ‘AHRS REVERT’ and ‘ADC REVERT’ will appear. These messages indicate
that the PFD has reverted to using attitude and air data from the standby flight display
instead of a dedicated ADAHRS unit.
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are continuously monitored and
compared. If the difference between the outputs of two or more sensors exceeds a
specified amount, a message appears on the PFD and the discrepancy is annunciated
as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If not enough sensor data is available to make a
comparison, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
No-Compare Messages
If the ADAHRS source selection is set to Auto and an attitude miscompare condition
is detected, the flight director cannot be engaged until the pilot determines which
source of attitude data should be used. When the pilot selects a specific ADAHRS
source other than Auto, the flight director and autopilot may be used (or re-engaged)
even if the miscompare condition persists.
402
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
System
Overview
AFCS ALERTS (OPTIONAL)
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
AFCS Alerts
Up-elevator Trim Required
TRIM UP
Down-elevator Trim Required
TRIM DOWN
Description
The autopilot does not have the
required elevator authority to
reach the desired flight condition.
AFCS
Annunciation
Additional
Features
Alert Condition
Hazard
Avoidance
If the commanded operation cannot be achieved due to the limitations configured,
the following messages can be displayed over the pitch ladder. The annunciation is
removed once the condition is resolved.
Flight
Planning
STATUS ALERTS
Status Alerts
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
403
The following messages are displayed in the G3X Autopilot Status Box.
Alert Condition
Annunciation
Autopilot Failure
AP
Autopilot inoperative
Manual Autopilot
Disengagement
AP
Autopilot Disengaged
Yaw Damper Failure
YD
Yaw Damper inoperative
YD
Yaw Damper Disengaged
Yaw Damper Manual
Disengagement
Flight Director and Autopilot
Failure
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
Autopilot Failure
Flight Director and Autopilot
inoperative
Autopilot inoperative, Flight
Director operative
(GMC 305/307 only)
AFCS System Alerts
SPEED ALERTS
If the remote autopilot unit supports speed alerts and the airspeed limitations
configured have been reached, the following messages can be displayed over the pitch
ladder. The annunciation is removed once the condition is resolved.
Alert Condition
High speed
Protection
Low speed
Protection
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
AFCS
Description
Annunciation
Description
Autopilot unit will raise the nose to limit the
MAX SPEED
aircraft’s speed.
Autopilot unit will lower the nose to prevent
MIN SPEED
the aircraft’s speed from decreasing.
Index
Appendix
Speed Alerts
404
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Annunciations & Alerts
VERTICAL POWER FAULT INDICATIONS
Over Current
Device current too high.
No Current
Runaway
Switch Disabled
Flap or trim runaway condition detected.
Flap or trim switch disabled.
XX indicates an internal VP-X fault code (consult Vertical Power for
details).
Unable to clear fault or other error occurred.
Device Faults
Hazard
Avoidance
Error
Short circuit detected.
Flight
Planning
Fault Code XX
Device not drawing current (possible open circuit.
GPS
Navigation
Short Circuit
CNS
Interface
Description
Voltage too high (only appears for alternator devices).
EIS
Device Fault
Over Voltage
Flight
Instruments
Manual disengagement of the autopilot is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow
‘AP’ annunciation and an aural (bee-boop) alert. Cancel the aural alert by pressing and
releasing the AP/CWS Button again (GSA 28 autopilot only)
System
Overview
AFCS AURAL ALERT
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
405
Index
Appendix
Annun Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Annunciations & Alerts
Blank Page
406
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix A
System
Overview
SECTION 11 APPENDICES
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
407
GPS
Navigation
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
CNS
Interface
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
DATA BAR FIELD OPTIONS
Data Bar Field
Definition
AGL - Height Above
Height Above Ground Level. This field will display dashes
Ground Level
when below a specified AGL.
BRG - Bearing to
The compass direction from the present position to the next
Waypoint
waypoint.
CLG - Climb Gradient Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by groundspeed)
(Percent)
in percent.
CLM - Climb Gradient Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by groundspeed)
(ALT/NM)
in altitude per nautical mile.
CO -Carbon Monoxide Displays current carbon monoxide level in parts per million.
(PPM)
(Requires a compatible CO detector.)
DA - Density Altitude Pressure Altitude adjusted for non-standard temperature.
DST - Distance to
The distance to the next waypoint in the Active Flight Plan.
Waypoint
DTK - Desired Track
The desired course between the active “from” and “to”
waypoints.
ECO - Fuel Economy
This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed
by the current fuel flow.
EDR - Fuel Endurance This value is obtained by dividing the amount of fuel on
board by the current fuel flow (endurance to empty - no
reserve included).
ESA - En Route Safe
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left
Altitude
or right of the desired course on an active flight plan or
direct-to.
ETA - Estimated Time The estimated time at which the aircraft should reach the
of Arrival
next waypoint, based upon current ground speed and track.
ETE - Estimated Time The estimated time it takes to reach the next waypoint from
En Route
the present position, based upon current ground speed.
Flight
Instruments
APPENDIX A: DATA FIELD OPTIONS
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix A
DATA BAR FIELD OPTIONS (CONT.)
Data Bar Field
Definition
ETV - Estimated Time The estimated time until reaching the VNAV profile or target
to VNAV
altitude.
FLT - Flight Time
The total time in flight.
FF - Fuel Flow
The current fuel flow.
G - G-Meter
The amount of positive or negative G’s.
GS - Ground Speed
The velocity that the aircraft is traveling relative to a ground
position.
LCL - Time of Day
The current time and date in 12-hour or 24-hour format.
(Local)
MACH - Mach Number A unit of speed that measures the ratio of the speed of an
airplane to the speed of sound in the same atmospheric
conditions.
MSA - Minimum Safe Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten
Altitude
miles of the aircraft’s present position.
OAT - Outside Air
The static air temperature outside the aircraft. This is the
Temperature
temperature measured by the OAT probe, with correction
for ram temperature rise.
RAT - Ram Air
The temperature measured by the OAT probe, without
Temperature
correction for ram temperature rise.
REM - Fuel Remaining The current fuel remaining (gal) adjusted for fuel burn and
based on fuel flow.
TRK - Ground Track
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position.
USD - Fuel Used
The quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow.
UTC - Time
The current time and date in Universal (UTC) time.
VSR - Vertical Speed The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb from the
Required
current position and altitude to the previously selected
VNAV position and altitude, based upon current ground
speed.
WPT - Next Waypoint The next waypoint in the flight plan or direct-to route.
XTK - Crosstrack Error The distance the aircraft is from a desired course in either
direction, left or right.
408
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix A
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
INFO PAGE DATA FIELD OPTIONS (FULL-SCREEN)
Info Page Data Field Option Definition
Accuracy
The current accuracy of the GPS determined
location.
Altitude (GPS ALT)
The current altitude in geometric height above
Mean Sea Level (MSL).
Bearing (BRG)
The compass direction from the present position
to a destination waypoint.
Climb Gradient (Percent) (CLG)
Current climb gradient in (climb rate divided by
groundspeed) in percent.
Climb Gradient (ALT/NM) (CLM)
Current climb gradient (climb rate divided by
groundspeed) in altitude per nautical mile.
Course to Steer (CTS)
The recommended direction to steer in order
to reduce cross-track error and return to the
course line.
Crosstrack Error (XTK)
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course
in either direction, left or right.
Density Altitude (DENSITY ALT)
Pressure Altitude adjusted for non-standard
temperature.
Desired Track (DTK)
The desired course between the active “from”
and “to” waypoints.
Distance (Destination) (DIST
The distance to the destination waypoint in the
DEST)
Active Flight Plan.
Distance (Next) (DIST NEXT)
The distance to the next waypoint in the Active
Flight Plan.
En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
The recommended minimum altitude within ten
miles left or right of the desired course on a
active flight plan or direct-to.
Estimated Time En Route
The estimated time it takes to reach the
(Destination) (ETE DEST)
destination waypoint from the present position,
based upon current ground speed.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
409
INFO PAGE DATA FIELD OPTIONS (FULL-SCREEN) (CONT.)
Info Page Data Field Option Definition
Estimated Time En Route
The estimated time it takes to reach the next
(Next) (ETE NEXT)
waypoint form the present position, based upon
current ground speed.
Estimated Time of Arrival
The estimated time at which the aircraft should
(Destination) (ETA DEST)
reach the destination waypoint, based upon current
speed and track.
Estimated Time of Arrival
The estimated time at which the aircraft should
(Next) (ETA NEXT)
reach the next waypoint, based upon current speed
and track.
Estimated Time to VNAV
The estimated time until reaching the VNAV profile
(VNAV TIME)
or target altitude..
Flight Timer (FLT TIMER)
Total time in-flight (HH:MM).
Fuel Economy (ECONOMY)
Current Mile Per Gallon (MPG), based upon ground
speed and fuel flow.
Fuel Endurance (ENDURANCE) This value is obtained by dividing the amount of
fuel on board by the current fuel flow (endurance
to empty - no reserve included).
Fuel Flow (FUEL FLOW)
The current fuel flow.
Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM)
The current fuel remaining (gal) adjusted for fuel
burn and based on fuel flow.
Fuel Tank Timer (FUEL TIMER) Elapsed time since the Fuel Tank Reminder Alarm
was last issued (HH:MM).
Fuel Used (FUEL USED)
The quantity of fuel used (gal) based on fuel flow.
Glide Ratio (G/R)
The ratio of horizontal distance (distance traveled
over the ground) to vertical distance traveled
(nn.n:1).
Ground Speed
The velocity that the aircraft is traveling relative to
a ground position.
Ground Track (TRK)
The direction of aircraft movement relative to a
ground position.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix A
410
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix A
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
411
EIS
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Instruments
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
System
Overview
INFO PAGE DATA FIELD OPTIONS (FULL-SCREEN) (CONT.)
Info Page Data Field Option Definition
Mach Number (MACH)
A unit of speed that measures the ratio of the
speed of an airplane to the speed of sound in the
same atmospheric conditions.
Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA) Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude
within ten miles of the aircraft’s present position.
Next Waypoint
The next waypoint in the flight plan or direct-to
route.
Outside Air Temperature
The static air temperature outside the aircraft. This
(OAT)
is the temperature measured by the OAT probe,
with correction for ram temperature rise.
Ram Air Temperature (RAT)
The temperature measured by the OAT probe,
without correction for ram temperature rise.
Sunrise
Time of sun rise on this day (current location).
Sunset
Time if sun set on this day (current location).
Time (UTC)
The current time and date in Universal (UTC) time.
Time of Day (Local)
The current time and date in 12-hour or 24-hour
format.
Vertical Speed (VS)
The rate of climb or descent (GPS-derived).
Vertical Speed Required (VSR) The vertical speed necessary to descend/climb from
the current position and altitude to the previously
selected VNAV position and altitude, based upon
current ground speed.
Weather (Altimeter) (WX
The altimeter setting at the nearest METAR
ALTIM)
reporting station.
Weather (Dew Point) (WX
The dew point at the nearest weather reporting
DEW PT)
station.
Weather (Rel. Humidity) (WX The relative humidity at the nearest weather
HUMIDITY)
reporting station.
Weather (Temperature) (WX The temperature at the nearest weather reporting
TEMP)
station.
Weather (Wind) (WX WIND)
The wind speed and direction at the nearest
weather reporting station.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix A
Blank Page
412
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
System
Overview
APPENDIX B: UTILITIES
FLIGHT LOG
Appendix
Index
413
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Viewing details for a flight:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice to
display the Main Menu. (The ‘Flight Log’ option is not available from the
full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Flight Log’, and press the ENT
Key. (Hours and minutes can be displayed by pressing the MENU Key and
selecting ‘Show Hours and Minutes’).
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select the desired flight from the list, and
press the ENT Key. Route, date, hours, distance, and actual flight path is
displayed (full-screen). Use the MAP and INFO Softkeys to toggle between
the Flight Log Map Page and the Flight Log Information Page (split-screen).
Hazard
Avoidance
Select any listed entry in the log to view additional information, including a map
displaying the actual path flown.
Flight
Planning
VIEWING THE FLIGHT LOG
GPS
Navigation
With no EIS items configured, recording begins when the aircraft reaches 250 feet
of altitude. When the aircraft’s groundspeed drops below 30 knots, the flight entry is
saved and a new entry is recorded when departing the airport. A touch-and-go or brief
stop of less than 10 minutes appends to the current flight record, rather than starting
a new entry.
CNS
Interface
With EIS items configured, recording begins when the engine hours timer or airframe
total hours is running. This allows recording of time spent on ground before takeoff
and after landing while the engine is running.
EIS
The Flight Log shows a list of any recorded flights, including date, route of flight,
and flight time. The G3X saves up to 50 recorded flights. Entries on this list are
automatically created for each flight.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: The Flight Log option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main
Menu.
Appendix B
With ‘Done’ selected, press the ENT Key to return to the previous page.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
4)
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight Log List (Split-Screen)
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Flight Log Information
(Split-Screen)
Index
Flight Log Map
(Split-Screen)
414
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
You can delete the highlighted flight record or delete all flight records from the Flight
Log.
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
The G3X draws an electronic breadcrumb trail or “track log” on the Map Page. The
track log contains points along its path, including time and location for each point.
CNS
Interface
NOTE: The Track Log option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main
Menu.
EIS
TRACK LOG
Flight
Instruments
Deleting flight records:
1) From the split-screen and/or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice to
display the Main Menu. (The ‘Flight Log’ option is not available from the
full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Flight Log’, and press the ENT
Key.
3) Select the desired flight (if applicable), and press the MENU Key.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Delete Flight’ or ‘Delete All’, and
press the ENT Key.
System
Overview
DELETING FLIGHT RECORDS
Additional
Features
AFCS
Track Log
Annun/Alerts
Track Log (Map Page)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
415
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix
The track log starts recording as soon as the G3X gets a location fix. For the best
results, clear the track log before each flight. When the track log is full, new track
points overwrite the oldest track points (if set to ‘Wrap’ in the Track Log Settings).
The percentage of memory used by the current track log appears at the top of the
Track Log Window. After the track log is cleared, it shows zero percent. When the
screen reaches 100%, the most recent track points start to overwrite the least recent
track points (if ‘Wrap’ is selected in the Record Mode Field). To avoid losing track
points, save the track log when it approaches the 99% mark.
The Save feature allows storage of up to 15 track logs.
Displaying/removing the track log on the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key. The Map Page Menu is
displayed. (The ‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD
Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Up Map’ from the Map Page
Menu, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Line’ options from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Track Log’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page.
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix B
Annun/Alerts
Map Page Menu
(Split-Screen)
Map Setup Page
Index
Appendix
Changing track log settings:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
416
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field.
4)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select the desired setting.
System
Overview
3)
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Track Log Window (Split-Screen)
Additional
Features
• Show On Map—Select ‘Yes’ to display the track log on the map.
Hazard
Avoidance
• Interval—’Distance’ records track points after a specified distance has been traveled. ‘Time’ creates track points after a specified time has elapsed.
Flight
Planning
• Record Mode—’Wrap’ records over the oldest tracks when the track log reaches
100%. ‘Fill’ records a track log until the track log is full (100%).
• Map Color—Select a color for the track when it appears on the map.
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Clearing the track log:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired saved track, and press the
CLEAR Softkey. (Or press the MENU Key, with ‘Clear Active Track‘ selected,
press the ENT Key.) The ‘Clear Active Track Log?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘Yes’ selected, press the ENT Key.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
417
Appendix B
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Saving a track log:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the SAVE Softkey. (Or press the MENU Key, with ‘Save Active Track‘
selected, press the ENT Key.) The ‘Save Active Track?’ window is displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘Entire Active Track’, ‘Past 24 Hours’, ‘Past 7
Days’, or ‘Specify Dates’.
CNS
Interface
5)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Save’ and press the ENT Key.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Editing a track log:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired saved track, and press the
ENT Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to make the desired changes.
6) With ‘Done’ selected, press the ENT Key.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Exporting a track log:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
3) Using the FMS Joystick highlight the desired track log to export.
4) With an SD card inserted, press the EXPORT Softkey.
418
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
Heading
Line
Flight
Instruments
The G3X draws an electronic “heading line” on the Map Page. The heading line can
be set to time or distance.
System
Overview
HEADING LINE
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Heading Line (Map Page)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Changing the heading line settings on the Map Page:
1) From the Map Page, press the MENU Key. The Map Page Menu is
displayed.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Set Up Map’ from the Map Page
Menu, and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Line’ options from the horizontal
list.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Heading Line’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On/Off’ ,‘Distance’, or ‘Time’ and press the
ENT Key. If necessary, move the FMS Joystick to set the desired time or
distance, and press the ENT Key.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Heading Line Settings (Map Setup Page)
Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, or the EXIT Softkey to return to the
Map Page.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
419
Index
6)
WEIGHT & BALANCE
NOTE: Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for information on configuring
the Weight & Balance Page.
Weight & Balance may be used during pre-flight preparations to verify the weight
and balance conditions of the aircraft. By entering the weight values on this page, the
G3X can calculate the total weight, moment, and center of gravity (CG).
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix B
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Stations
AFCS
Additional
Features
C.G.
Location
(in range)
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
Weight and Balance Page
(C.G. in Range)
420
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
C.G.
Location
(out of
range)
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Weight and Balance Page
(C.G. Out of Range)
Index
421
Appendix
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
AFCS
Performing weight and balance calculations:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Weight & Balance’, and press
the ENT Key.
3) Move the FMS Joystick to select the desired station.
4) Turn the FMS Joystick to enter the desired weight and press the ENT Key.
5) Repeat Steps 3 and 4 using the FMS Joystick to enter the desired weights.
Press the ENT Key after each entry. The calculated moment, weight, and
CG figures appear at the bottom of the page.
6) To empty the aircraft, press the MENU Key and select ‘Empty Aircraft’, or
press the EMPTY Softkey.
Additional
Features
NOTE: This information is only for flight planning purposes. Consult the
aircraft’s pilot operating handbook for the official weight and balance data.
Appendix B
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Resetting weight & balance page:
1) From the Weight & Balance page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Empty Aircraft’, and press the
ENT Key. “Empty All Stations?” window is displayed.
Weight & Balance Page Menu
Or:
3)
With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
If the Loading Limit for a particular station is exceeded, the station name will turn
yellow.
Loading Limit Exceeded
EPE CIRCLE
Estimated Position Error (EPE) indicates the accuracy of the position fix. EPE uses
Dilution of Precision (DOP) and other factors to calculate a horizontal position error.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where
they are relative to each other).
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Press the EMPTY Softkey. “Empty All Stations?” window is displayed.
Index
Setting up and customizing the EPE circle for the map page:
1) From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Miscellaneous’ from the horizontal list.
422
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix B
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired feature.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
System
Overview
4)
The Proximity Waypoints Page allows the pilot to define an alarm circle around a
waypoint location.
Flight
Instruments
PROXIMITY WAYPOINTS
EIS
CNS
Interface
Proximity
Circle
GPS
Navigation
Proximity
Alarm
Flight
Planning
Proximity Waypoint Alarm
Appendix
Index
423
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Setting up and customizing proximity waypoints for the map
page:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’, and press the
ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
Defining proximity waypoints:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Press the PROXIMITY Softkey. The Proximity Waypoints Page is displayed.
4) Press the NEW Softkey. The New Proximity Waypoint Window is displayed.
5) Select ‘Use Map’ or ‘Use Identifier’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Select the desired waypoint using the Map or Select Waypoint Window, and
press the ENT Key. The ‘Distance’ field is highlighted.
7) Using the FMS Joystick, enter the desired distance and press the ENT Key.
System
Overview
Appendix B
3)
Press the PROXIMITY Softkey. The Proximity Waypoints Page is displayed.
4)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
Or:
1)
Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’, and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Alarms’, and press the ENT
Key.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Proximity Alarm’ Field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’, and press the ENT Key.
GPS
Navigation
From the Map Page press the MENU Key.
2)
Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Set Up Map’ and press the
ENT Key.
3)
Turn the FMS Joystick to select the ‘Point’ from the horizontal list.
4)
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the ‘Proximity Circle’ Field.
5)
Turn the FMS Joystick to access a list of options for each feature (On/Off,
Auto, or range settings).
6)
Highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
1)
Flight
Planning
Or:
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Deleting proximity waypoints:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘User Waypoints’, and press the
ENT Key.
3) Press the PROXIMITY Softkey. The Proximity Waypoints Page is displayed.
4) Select the desired waypoint to be deleted.
5) Press the CLR Key or the MENU Key and select ‘Remove Selected
Waypoint’ or ‘Remove All Waypoints’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove Proximity Waypoint for XXXX’ Window is
displayed.
7) With ‘Yes’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
424
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix C
System
Overview
APPENDIX C: SD CARD USE AND DATABASES
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
MapSource detailed maps are available from your local Garmin dealer. Refer to
the Garmin website (www.garmin.com) for instructions on downloading software
updates. Refer to the lastest revision of the G3X Instillation Manual for software
update instructions.
CNS
Interface
The G3X uses an SD Card for software updates, database updates, MapSource® data,
checklist files, Chartview, Flight Data Logging, exporting Track Logs/User Waypoints,
importing/exporting Flight Plans and user-downloaded vehicles. Garmin recommends
using a 2 GB SanDisk or Toshiba SD Card.
EIS
NOTE: When flying the G3X system, any SD card(s) used in the GDU(s)
should contain only files which are necessary for the flight of the aircraft.
Non-essential files may have a negative effect on display performance.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: It is recommended to maintain three SD cards for the G3X system.
One SD card should be used exclusively for loading software, another SD card
should be used exclusively for loading databases, and a third card should be
used exclusively for flight purposes.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
425
INSTALLING AND REMOVING SD CARDS
NOTE: SD Cards are not waterproof. They should not be exposed to moisture
or excessive static charges, and should be stored in the case supplied with
the card.
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix C
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
SD Card Slot
Flight
Planning
SD Card Slot(s)
If you insert an SD Card and get a card format not recognized message, try removing
the card and reinserting it. If the card is still not recognized, contact Garmin Product
Support or your Garmin dealer.
Removing an SD Card:
1) Push the card into the unit until it stops.
2) Release the card. The card should eject for easy removal.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Installing an SD Card:
1) Insert the card into the slot on the top, right, front of the bezel. Be sure the
SD Card contacts are facing the display.
2) Firmly push the card into the unit. It is not necessary to force the card.
3) The unit takes a few seconds to read the card. When the data card has
been properly installed and accepted, a summary screen noting the card
details appears. Press ENT Key to acknowledge.
With the card ejected, pull the card out of the slot.
Index
3)
426
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix C
Americas
Atlantic
Pacific
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Flight
Planning
+
GPS
Navigation
+
+
CNS
Interface
Hazard
Avoidance
Worldwide Basemap
Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
Navigation Database
(Garmin, Jeppesen® or AeroNav (US only))
FliteCharts®
SafeTaxi®
Obstacle
Terrain
EIS
Database
Flight
Instruments
The following databases are avialable with the G3X depending on the unit
(Americas, Atlantic, or Pacific). See the Additional Feature section for information on
Airport Directories, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi®. See the Hazard Avoidance section for
information on Obstacles and Terrain.
System
Overview
G3X DATABASES
Additional
Features
Available Databases
Annun/Alerts
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as
river, lakes, and towns. It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is
no expiration date.
AFCS
BASEMAP
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
427
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASES
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the
U.S. and it is updated on a 56-day cycle. Detailed information for over 5,300 U.S.
airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs can be
viewed. This service allows the pilot to plan an overnight, choose fuel stops, find
ground transportation, etc.
Optional airport directory databases such as AC-U-KWIK are also supported. ACU-KWIK provides complete listings of FBOs, charter companies, fuel suppliers, ground
transportation, maintenance and catering services at public airports across the world.
NAVIGATION DATABASE
The G3X includes an internal navigation database that provides location and facility
information for thousands of airports, VORs, NDBs, and more. Updates to the navigation
database are available every 28 days online (www.fly.garmin.com). There are three
navigation database products available: Garmin Navigation Database, Jeppesen
Navigation Database, which is sourced by Jeppesen, and the US VFR Navigation
Database sourced by AeroNav Products, a division of the FAA.
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix C
• *Airport—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, latitude/longitude, field
elevation, available fuel types, runway designations and layout, runway surface,
runway length, runway width, runway lighting, communication frequencies, and
published approaches (Jeppesen Navigation Database only).
Appendix
• Weather—frequencies associated with an airport (ASOS, ATIS, and AWOS).
• *VORs—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, location (latitude/longitude),
frequency, service volume (high, low, terminal), and type (such as VOR-DME,
TACAN, and VORTAC).
Index
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
NOTE: Although the Jeppesen Navigation Database and the US VFR Navigation Database contain much of the same information, pilots may notice
differences in behavior, nearest list functionality, direct-to functionality, and
map page display due to data content variations. The US VFR Navigation
Database, by AeroNav Products, does not contain any approach data.
• *NDBs—identifier, facility name, city/state/country, location (latitude/longitude),
and frequency.
428
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix C
• ARTCC—Air Route Traffic Control Centers.
Flight
Instruments
• Airspace—boundaries (Class B, Class C, Control Zones, SUAs, and MOAs),
controlling agency, and vertical boundaries.
System
Overview
• Intersections—identifier, nearest VOR, radial and distance from nearest VOR,
location (latitude/longitude), and region/country.
• FSS—Flight Service Stations.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports.
These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying
the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and
services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Additional
Features
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a
period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is
disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing. The
ChartView database is always on the SD Card and is not copied to the GDU’s internal
memory.
Hazard
Avoidance
CHARTVIEW
Flight
Planning
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This
database is updated on a 28-day cycle.
GPS
Navigation
FLITECHARTS
CNS
Interface
NOTE: After performing a navigation database update, verify all flight plan(s)
(routes) are current. If there is an obsolete aviation point in a saved route, the
route is locked and unusable. A new route with current navigation database
points will need to be created.
EIS
* Symbology used for NDBs, VORs, and airports is consistent with those used on a
sectional chart.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
429
OBSTACLE
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a
potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle
database. It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and
therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on
a 56-day cycle.
TERRAIN
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix C
The terrain database is updated periodically and has no expiration date.
UPDATING G3X DATABASES
NOTE: The databases are stored internally on each GDU. When updating a
system with multiple GDUs, each GDU will need to be updated individually
using the same SD card.
The G3X database updates can be obtained by visiting the ‘flyGarmin’ website
(www.fly.garmin.com). The ‘flyGarmin’ website requires the unit’s System ID to update
databases. This allows the databases to be encrypted with the unit’s unique System ID
when copied to the SD Card.
Obtaining the System ID:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to access the Main Menu.
2) Select ‘System Setup’ and press the ENT Key.
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
Index
System Setup Page
430
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix C
System
Overview
Or:
Select ‘Database Information’ and press the ENT Key.
Flight
Instruments
EIS
System ID
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Database Information Page
Hazard
Avoidance
Updating G3X Databases:
Equipment required to perform the update:
Additional
Features
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• Verbatim 96504 SD Card Reader or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the flyGarmin website
2)
Power on the display. The Update Databases Page is displayed. A green
checkbox indicates that the database already installed on the G3X is up
to date. An empty checkbox indicates that the database on the SD card is
more current and should be installed.
Appendix
After the data has been copied to the SD Card, insert the SD card in the SD
card slot of the display.
Annun/Alerts
1)
AFCS
• SD Card, 2 GB recommended (Garmin recommends SanDisk or Toshiba SD cards)
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
431
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix C
CNS
Interface
Update Databases Page
With ‘Update All’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The database status is
updated.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
3)
Hazard
Avoidance
Update Databases Page
Or:
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Move the FMS Joystick to highlight a single database to update, and press
the ENT Key. The database status is updated.
Index
Update Databases Page
(Database Status Updated)
4)
432
Press the RESTART Softkey. Once the database(s) have been successfully
updated, the SD Card can be removed from the unit.
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix C
System
Overview
Flight
Instruments
Update Databases Page
5)
Repeat steps 1-4 for the remaining GDUs if applicable.
EIS
RELOADING G3X DATABASES:
2)
Power on the display.
3)
Press the MENU Key twice to open the Main Menu.
4)
Select ‘Database Information’ and press the ENT Key..
5)
Press the Update DB Softkey. The database status is updated.
GPS
Navigation
Insert the SD card containing the data to be reloaded into the SD card slot
of the display.
CNS
Interface
1)
Flight
Planning
EXPORTING TRACK LOGS AND USER WAYPOINTS
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Exporting User Waypoints:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘User Waypoints’ from the Main
Menu, and press the ENT Key.
3) With an SD card inserted, press the Menu Key.
4) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Export Waypoints’ from the Option
Menu, and press the ENT Key.
Hazard
Avoidance
Exporting a track log:
1) From the split-screen or full-screen MFD, press the MENU Key twice. (The
‘Track Log’ option is not available from the full-screen PFD Main Menu).
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to select ‘Track Log’ from the Main Menu,
and press the ENT Key.
3) Using the FMS Joystick highlight the desired track log to export.
4) With an SD card inserted, press the EXPORT Softkey.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
433
IMPORTING/EXPORTING FLIGHT PLANS
Importing flight plans:
1) With a flight plan saved to the SD Card, press the FPL Key and turn the
FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List Page.
2) Press the IMPORT Softkey.
3) Using the FMS Joystick highlight the desired flight plan to import.
4) Press the IMPORT Softkey again and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix C
FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
The G3X also has the ability to log flight data. Refer to the Additional Features
section for more information.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
Exporting flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the FMS Joystick to display the Flight Plan List
Page.
2) Press the FMS Joystick to activate the cursor, and turn or move the FMS
Joystick to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EXPORT Softkey and press the ENT Key.
434
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix D
System
Overview
APPENDIX D: MAP DATUM AND LOCATION
FORMATS
Flight
Instruments
MAP DATUMS
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Changing position settings:
1) Press the MENU Key twice to display the Main Menu.
2) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘System Setup...’ and press the
ENT Key.
3) Turn or move the FMS Joystick to highlight ‘Position’ and press the ENT
Key.
4) Move the FMS Joystick to highlight the desired field, and select the desired
option by turning the FMS Joystick.
5) Press the FMS Joystick, the CLR Key, the EXIT Softkey or the MENU Key to
remove the menu.
Flight
Planning
Map Datum and Location Format selection can be performed on the Position Setup
Page.
GPS
Navigation
Your current location can be viewed on the GPS in the form of coordinates. Since
different charts use different location formats, Garmin GPS units allow you to choose
the correct coordinate system for the type of chart you are using. The most common
format is latitude and longitude, which is used by all Garmin units. You can change the
location format to use with other coordinate systems.
CNS
Interface
LOCATION FORMATS
EIS
A datum is a mathematical model of the Earth that approximates the shape of the
Earth and enables calculations to be carried out in a consistent and accurate manner.
The datum is physically represented by a framework of ground monuments (such as
trig. stations) whose locations have been accurately measured and calculated on this
reference surface. Lines of latitude and longitude on a chart are referenced to a specific
map datum. Every chart has a map datum reference and the G3X can be set to match
most of those commonly used.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
435
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix D
Blank Page
436
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix E
System
Overview
APPENDIX E: GENERAL TIS-A INFORMATION
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
TIS-A VS. TAS/TCAS
GPS
Navigation
The Traffic Information Service (TIS-A) provides traffic advisory information to nonTAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft. TIS-A is a ground-based service providing the relative
locations of all ATCRBS (Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System) Mode-A and Mode-C
transponder equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS-A ground
sensor uses real-time track reports to generate traffic notification. The G3X displays
TIS-A traffic information on the Map Page. Surveillance data includes all transponderequipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The G3X displays up to eight traffic
targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the
requesting aircraft.
CNS
Interface
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to
accurately depict all of the traffic within range of the aircraft. Due to lack
of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information from
aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on
the display.
EIS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering. The traffic display does not provide collision
avoidance resolution advisories and does not, under any circumstances or
conditions, relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
Flight
Instruments
NOTE: Aircraft without an operational transponder are invisible to TIS-A.
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS-A) and Traffic
Advisory (TAS) or Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance
data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a half-second update rate, while
TIS-A utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to
provide a five-second update rate. TIS-A and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
437
TIS-A LIMITATIONS
• TIS-A operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
• TIS-A is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft
and the Mode-S radar antenna. Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes
between the transponder antenna and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal
may be temporarily interrupted.
Flight
Planning
CNS
Interface
TIS-A relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar system similar to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are
inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by TIS-A is neither
better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS-A is intended only to
assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC).
While TIS-A is a useful aid for visual traffic avoidance, system limitations must be
considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers are given,
nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS-A intruder display or TIS-A advisory.
GPS
Navigation
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix E
Hazard
Avoidance
NOTE: Refer to the TIS-A Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more comprehensive explanation of limitations and
anomalies associated with TIS-A.
Additional
Features
NOTE: TIS-A is unavailable at low altitudes in many area of the United States.
This is often the case in mountainous regions.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM
for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.
TIS-A information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information
is then sent through the Mode S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the
surveillance information is approximately five seconds old. TIS-A ground station tracking
software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time
of display. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation
and create slight errors on the Map Page which affect relative bearing information and
the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information. However,
intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to
assist in spotting traffic. The following errors are common examples:
438
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix E
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained
at FAA FSSs, General Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and
General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)
GPS
Navigation
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility
CNS
Interface
Pilots using TIS-A can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions
by reporting observations of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time
of observation, location, type and identity of the aircraft, and describe the condition
observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder
software version. Since TIS-A performance is monitored by maintenance personnel,
not ATC, malfunctions should be reported in the following ways:
EIS
These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once
the client/intruder aircraft course stabilizes.
Flight
Instruments
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly
changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS-A may display the intruder aircraft on the
incorrect side of the client aircraft.
System
Overview
• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking
algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft
stabilizes.
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
439
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix E
Blank Page
440
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix F
System
Overview
APPENDIX F: ABNORMAL OPERATION
Flight
Instruments
LOSS OF GPS POSITION
When the G3X loses the GPS signal for any reason, the following will occur:
• A blinking red question mark will appear over the airplane icon on the map.
EIS
• The ‘Lost Satellite Reception’ message will display.
• Any GPS dependent data fields will not be available.
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
GPS Signal Lost
If the Terrain Page doesn’t have at least a 3D fix (i.e. altitude unknown), a
Red X will be displayed.
Additional
Features
HAZARD DISPLAY WITH LOSS OF GPS POSITION
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Map Page Red X (Terrain)
(Split-Screen)
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Index
Terrain Page Red X
(Split-Screen)
441
G3X SYSTEM FAILURE ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over
the instrument(s) or data experiencing the failure. Upon G3X power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should
be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the
G3X should be serviced.
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix F
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook for additional information
regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
Index
G3X System Failure Annunciations
(Split-Screen)
442
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix F
Flight
Instruments
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward
the horizon warn of extreme pitch and data fields are decluttered (removed) from the
display. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and
30˚ below the horizon line.
System
Overview
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Pitch Attitude Warnings
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
443
REVERSIONARY MODE (FULL-SCREEN)
In the event of a display failure, the G3X System automatically switches to
reversionary (backup) mode. In reversionary mode, the information is presented on
the remaining display in the split-screen configuration.
If a display failure occurs with the GDU 375, the WX and XM Pages will no longer
be available since the XM receiver resides in the GDU 375.
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix F
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
G3X Full-Screen Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
AFCS REVERSIONARY MODE
In a two display system, in the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary
mode, and the autopilot is disengaged. If the MFD fails, the PFD goes into reversionary
mode and the autopilot continues to function.
In a GMC 305/307/507 installation, in the event of display failure(s), basic autopilot
functionality remains as long as a ADAHRS unit is still available. The FD is no longer
available, but LVL, AP, ALT, and YD are available.
FAILURE OF THE EXTERNAL GPS NAVIGATION SOURCE
If the external GPS navigation source fails, the system reverts to the internal GPS
navigation source and ‘REV’ is shown in yellow in the upper left corner of the Data Bar
as well as the lower left quadrant of the HSI.
444
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix F
System
Overview
External
GPS Failure.
Reverted to
Internal GPS
Flight
Instruments
EIS
CNS
Interface
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
REV: External
Navigation Source
failed. Reverted to
internal VFR GPS
for navigation.
Annun/Alerts
External GPS Navigation Failure
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
445
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix F
SYNTHETIC VISION TROUBLESHOOTING
Synthetic Vision is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading,
obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs (in most areas). Synthetic Vision is disabled
when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case
of invalid Synthetic Vision data, the PFD display reverts to the standard blueover-brown attitude display.
Synthetic Vision becomes disabled without the following data resources:
CNS
Interface
• Heading data
GPS
Navigation
• Attitude data
• Terrain data
• GPS position data
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database
Synthetic Vision can be displayed on the remaining display(s) in Reversionary
Mode. If it is enabled when the system switches to Reversionary Mode,
Synthetic Vision may take up to 30 seconds to display. The standard display
will be shown in the interim.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
REVERSIONARY MODE WITH SYNTHETIC VISION
446
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix G
System
Overview
APPENDIX G: DISPLAY SYMBOLS
Item
Symbol
Item
Civilian, Serviced
Non-towered, Serviced
Military, Serviced
Towered, Serviced
Civilian, Soft/Unknown
Surface, Non-serviced
Soft Surface, Non-serviced
Civilian, Soft/Unknown
Surface, Serviced
Soft Surface, Serviced
Hazard
Avoidance
Towered, Non-serviced
Flight
Planning
Military, Non-serviced
GPS
Navigation
Non-towered, Non-serviced
CNS
Interface
Civilian, Non-serviced
Symbol
EIS
Unknown
Flight
Instruments
VFR SYMBOLS
Atlantic Database Airports
Additional
Features
Soft Surface, Private
AFCS
Paved, Private
Annun/Alerts
Seaplane Base
Heliport
Appendix
Americas/Pacific Database Airports
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
447
Appendix G
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Item
Item
Intersection
Interstate Highway
Visual Reporting Point
US Highway
LOM (compass locator at
outer marker)
State Highway
NDB (non-directional radio
beacon)
National Highway
VOR
Small City
VOR/DME
Medium City
ILS/DME or DME only
Large City
Hazard
Avoidance
VORTAC
Symbol
Miscellaneous
Additional
Features
TACAN
Navaids
IFR SYMBOLS
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Symbol
Index
Appendix
Item
Item
Symbol
VFR, Soft/unknown Surface,
Non-serviced
Low-Altitude
VFR, Soft/unknown Surface,
Serviced
High- Altitude
Atlantic Database Airports
448
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Symbol
Airways
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix G
Symbol
Item
LOM (compass locator at
outer marker)
IFR Airport, Non-serviced
NDB (non-directional radio
beacon)
VFR Airport, Serviced
VOR
IFR Airport, Serviced
VOR/DME
VFR, Soft Surface, Nonserviced
ILS/DME or DME Only
VFR, Soft Surface, Serviced
VORTAC
VFR, Soft Surface, Private
TACAN
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
VFR, Paved, Private
CNS
Interface
VFR Airport, Non-serviced
EIS
Intersection
Flight
Instruments
Unknown
Symbol
System
Overview
Item
Navaids
Additional
Features
VFR Seaplane Base
AFCS
VFR Heliport
Annun/Alerts
Americas/Pacific Database Airports
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
449
AIRSPACE SYMBOLS
Item
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix G
Symbol
Class B, Class E,
CTA
Class B, Class E,
CTA
Class A, Class C,
TMA
Class A, Class C,
TMA, TRSA
Class D
Class D
Mode C Veil
MOA
Flight
Planning
MOA
Hazard
Avoidance
Danger, Alert, or
Training Area
Restricted,
Prohibited, or
Warning Area
Radar Area
ATZ, TIZ
Radar Area
Misc/Unknown
ATZ, TIZ
AFCS
Symbol
Danger, Alert, or
Training Area
Restricted,
Prohibited, or
Warning Area
TRSA
Additional
Features
Item
IFR Americas/Pacific Database
Annun/Alerts
MATZ
Appendix
ADIZ
Misc/Unknown
Index
VFR Americas/Pacific Database
450
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix G
Symbol
Symbol
Training Area
Flight
Instruments
Danger or Alert
Area
Restricted,
Prohibited, or
Warning Area
Item
System
Overview
Item
IFR Atlantic Database Exceptions
EIS
Training Area
CNS
Interface
VFR Atlantic Database Exceptions
GPS
Navigation
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
451
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix G
Blank Page
452
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix H
ADS-B In
CNS
Interface
An aircraft that has both ADS-B In and ADS-B Out
capabilities.
GPS
Navigation
Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Rebroadcast
Above Ground Level
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Angle of Attack
Autopilot
airport
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Automated Weather Observing System
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
ºC
Calibrated
Airspeed
cm
degrees Celsius
Indicated airspeed corrected for installation and instrument
errors.
centimeter
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
453
Index
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint.
Appendix
Bearing
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
EIS
ADS-B Out
ADS-B
Participating
Aircraft
ADS-R
AGL
AIM
AIRMET
AOA
AP
APT
ASPC
ARTCC
ASOS
ATC
ATIS
AWOS
Air Defense Identification Zone
Automatic Dependant Surveillance-Broadcast
Ability to receive ADS-B information from other aircraft and
Ground Based Transceivers (GBTs)
Ability to transmit ADS-B data on 1090 ES or 978 MHz
Flight
Instruments
ADIZ
ADS-B
System
Overview
APPENDIX H: GLOSSARY
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix H
COM
Course
Course to Steer
Crosstrack Error
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
CTS
dBZ
deg
Desired Track
DIS
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Distance
DME
DTK
communication radio
The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce
course error or stay on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course and proceed along
the flight plan.
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right.
Course to Steer
decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
degree
The desired course between the active “from” and “to”
waypoints.
distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the present position to a
destination waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Desired Track
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or
right of the desired course on an active flight plan or directto.
ENT
enter
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of The estimated time at which the aircraft should reach the
Arrival
destination waypoint, based upon current speed and track.
Estimated Time
The estimated time it takes to reach the destination waypoint
Enroute
from the present position, based upon current ground speed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
Enroute Safe
Altitude
454
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix H
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Federal Communication Commission
flight plan
feet per minute
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
gal
geodetic altitude
gallon(s)
GPS calculated altitude
The ratio of horizontal distance (distance traveled over the
ground) to vertical distance traveled (nn.n:1).
ground
gallons per hour
Global Positioning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; one degree latitude by
one degree longitude in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of the
grid
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground
position.
Provides ADS-R, TIS-B and FIS-B broadcasts to ADS-B
participating aircraft.
see Track
Ground speed
Appendix
Index
455
Annun/Alerts
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Additional
Features
Hg
hPa
hr
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications
from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro.
mercury
hectopascal
hour
Hazard
Avoidance
Heading
Flight
Planning
Ground-Based
Transceiver
Ground Track
GS
GPS
Navigation
Groundspeed
CNS
Interface
Grid MORA
EIS
GND
gph
GPS
Flight
Instruments
Glide Ratio, G/R
System
Overview
ºF
FAA
FAF
FCC
FPL
fpm
FSS
ft
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix H
HSI
Hz
IAF
IAT
ICAO
IFR
ILS
IMC
in
in HG
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hertz
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Temperature
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
inch
Information provided by properly calibrated and set
instrumentation on the aircraft panel.
inches of mercury
kg
kHz
km
kt
kilogram
kilohertz
kilometer
knot
LAT
lb
Leg
LON
latitude
pound
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints.
longitude
m
MAP
METAR
MHz
Minimum Safe
Altitude
MOA
meter
Missed Approach Point
Meteorological Aviation Routine
megahertz
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten
miles of the aircraft present position.
Military Operations Area
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
Indicated
456
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix H
psi
pounds per square inch
QTY
quantity
rpm
revolutions per minute
SBAS
SD
sec
SIGMET
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Secure Digital
second(s)
Significant Meteorological Information
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TER
TFR
TOPO
TIS-A
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
terrain
Temporary Flight Restriction
topographic
Traffic Information Service
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Hazard
Avoidance
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Planning
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
GPS
Navigation
OAT
OBS
CNS
Interface
NAVigation AID
Non-directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
nautical mile(s)
nearest
EIS
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD
nm
NRST
Flight
Instruments
Minimum Safe Altitude
Mean Sea Level
System
Overview
MSA
MSL
457
TIS-B
TRSA
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position;
also ‘Ground Track’
Terminal Radar Service Area
UTC
Coordinated Universal Time
VFR
VHF
VNAV
VOL
VOR
VSI
VSR
VTF
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
vertical navigation
volume
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
vector to final
WAAS
WPT
WX
Wide Area Augmentation System
waypoint
weather
Track
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix H
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
VORTAC
458
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix I
System
Overview
APPENDIX I: LICENSE AGREEMENT AND
WARRANTY
EIS
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
459
Flight
Planning
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
GPS
Navigation
LIMITED WARRANTY
Aviation Limited Warranty
All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for the earlier
of: 2 years or 800 flight hours from the date of purchase for new TSO remote-mount and TSO panel-mount
products; 1 year or 400 flight hours from the date of purchase for new Non-TSO remote-mount* and Non-TSO
panel-mount*, portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products; 6 months or 200 flight hours
for factory repaired or newly-overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center.
Within the applicable period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal
use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor, provided that the
customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This Limited Warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic
damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product damage has
occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water,
flood, fire, or other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who
is not an authorized service provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered
without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims
against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country.
This Limited Warranty also does not apply to, and Garmin is not responsible for, any degradation in the
performance of any Garmin navigation product resulting from its use in proximity to any handset or other device
that utilizes a terrestrial broadband network operating on frequencies that are close to the frequencies used by
any Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) such as the Global Positioning Service (GPS). Use of such devices
may impair reception of GNSS signals.
CNS
Interface
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN (“THE GARMIN
PRODUCT”), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its subsidiaries (“Garmin”) grants you a
limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product (the “Software”) in binary executable form in the
normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software
remain with Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin
and/or its third-party providers and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international
copyright treaties. You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade
secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a valuable trade
secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile, disassemble, modify, reverse
assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software or any part thereof or create any derivative
works based on the Software. You agree not to export or re-export the Software to any country in violation of the export
control laws of the United States of America.
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Flight
Instruments
CONTACT GARMIN
Contact Garmin if you have any questions while using your G3X Touch. Contact Garmin Product Support at www.
fly.garmin.com.
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Appendix I
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS
WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM
DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the
product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE
YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
Online auction purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage.
Online auction confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or
copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from
any package purchased through an online auction.
International purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased
outside the U.S., depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is provided by the local in-country
distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device. Distributor warranties are only valid in the
area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the U.S. or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service
center in the U.K., the U.S., Canada or Taiwan for service.
*All new G3X units, including Non-TSO remote-mount or Non-TSO panel-mount, are warranted to be free from
defects in materials or workmanship for the earlier of: 2 years or 800 flight hours from the date of purchase.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Phone: 913 397 8200
Fax: 913 397 8282
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR, U.K.
Phone: +44 (0) 238 052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 238 052 4004
Aviation Support: +44 (0) 370 850 1243
Refer to the G3X Installation Manual for warranty registration instructions.
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
AOPA AIRPORT DIRECTORY NOTICE
AOPA MEMBERSHIP PUBLICATIONS, INC. AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS (HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY
“AOPA”) EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, WITH RESPECT TO THE AOPA INFORMATION INCLUDED
IN THIS DATA, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS”
AND AOPA DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY,
OR OTHERWISE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL AOPA BE LIABLE FOR ANY
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES THAT RESULT FROM THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE OR RELATED DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF AOPA OR AN AOPA AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. USER AGREES NOT TO SUE AOPA AND, TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AOPA FROM ANY CAUSES OF
ACTION, CLAIMS OR LOSSES RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION
ARISING OUT OF GARMIN’S USE OF THE INFORMATION IN THE DATASETS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
460
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Appendix I
System
Overview
AC-U-KWIK LICENSE AGREEMENT
Flight
Instruments
EIS
AC-U-KWIK AND ITS RELATED ORGANIZATIONS (HEREINAFTER COLLECTIVELY “AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS”)
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE AC-U-KWIK INFORMATION INCLUDED IN THIS DATA,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS
DO NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING ITS ACCURACY, RELIABILITY, OR OTHERWISE.
LICENSEE AGREES NOT TO SUE AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS AND, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, TO
RELEASE AND HOLD HARMLESS AC-U-KWIK ORGANIZATIONS FROM ANY CAUSES OF ACTION, CLAIMS OR LOSSES
RELATED TO ANY ACTUAL OR ALLEGED INACCURACIES IN THE INFORMATION ARISING OUT OF GARMIN’S USE OF
THE INFORMATION IN THE DATASETS. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO LICENSEE.
CNS
Interface
SiriusXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICE AGREEMENT
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio by phone at 800.985.9200 to subscribe to XM WX Weather and/or SiriusXM
Radio.
Flight
Planning
THE USER AGREES THAT THE SIRIUS XM WEATHER SERVICE OFFERING IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, THAT YOUR
GARMIN HARDWARE EQUIPMENT ONLY ALLOWS THE DISPLAY OF SUCH SERVICE OFFERING, AND THAT ANY
CHANGES BY THE SERVICE PROVIDER MAY INTERFERE WITH THE ABILITY OF YOUR GARMIN HARDWARE
EQUIPMENT TO RECEIVE OR DISPLAY SUCH SERVICE OFFERING. FURTHER, SUCH SERVICE OFFERING CONTAINS
INFORMATION FURNISHED BY OTHERS WHO ARE NOT UNDER THE CONTROL OF GARMIN, AND THEREFORE
THE SERVICE OFFERING IS ACCORDINGLY FURNISHED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF GARMIN, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
GPS
Navigation
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately. USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT GARMIN HAS NO
CONTROL OVER THE TERMS AND REQUIRMENTS OF THE SUBSCRIPTION. COMPATABILITY OF HARDWARE
EQUIPMENT WITH THEN-CURRENT SUBSCRIPTION OFFERING OF SERVICE PROVIDER IS ALSO BEYOND
GARMIN’S CONTROL. GARMIN SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY IF CHANGES IN SERVICE PROVIDER’S SUBCRIPTION
OFFERING NEGATIVELY IMPACTS OR RENDERS IMPOSSIBLE THE USE OF PURCHASED GARMIN HARDWARE
EQUIPMENT WITH THE SERVICE PROVIDER’S OFFERING IN THE FUTURE. Subscription fee is consumer only. Other
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All programming fees and weather data subject
to change. Sirius XM weather data and individual product availability vary by hardware equipment. Reception
of the Sirius XM signal may vary depending on location. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement included
with the Sirius XM Welcome Kit and available at www.siriusxm.com. USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT GARMIN IS
AN INTENDED THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY OF SUCH CUSTOMER AGREEMENT, AND THAT ALL DISCLAIMERS
CONTAINED THEREIN EQUALLY APPLY AS IF SUCH DISCLAIMERS WERE MADE DIRECTLY BY GARMIN. Available
only in the 48 contiguous United States.
Appendix
Index
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
461
Appendix I
System
Overview
USER SAFETY
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
THE WEATHER DATA SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OF
NON-INFRINGEMENT ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED.
Flight
Instruments
WEATHER DATA WARRANTY
If you use XM Services it is your responsibility to exercise prudent discretion and observe all safety measures
required by law and your own common sense. You assume the entire risk related to your use of the Services.
XM and Garmin assume no responsibility for accidents resulting from or associated with use of the Services.
Your Radio Service includes traffic and weather information, and you acknowledge that such information is not
for “safety for life”, but is merely supplemental and advisory in nature, and therefore cannot be relied upon as
safety-critical in connection with any aircraft, sea craft or automobile usage. This information is provided “as is”
and XM and Garmin disclaim any and all warranties, express and implied, with respect thereto or the transmission
or reception thereof. XM and Garmin further do not warrant the accuracy, reliability, completeness or timeliness
of the traffic and weather information disclosed on the Radio Service. In no event will XM and Garmin, their data
suppliers, service providers, marketing/distribution, software or Internet partners or hardware manufacturers be
liable to you or to any third party for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special, exemplary or punitive
damages or lost profits resulting from use of or interruptions in the transmission or reception of the Services.
LIMITS ON OUR RESPONSIBILITY
a) DISCLAIMERS.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN, WE MAKE NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE RADIO SERVICE. YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. THE CONTENT
AND FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SERVICE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED. ALL SUCH WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT)
ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.
b) LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY.
WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES
RELATING TO THE USE OF THE RADIO SERVICE, WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE. OUR TOTAL
LIABILITY TO YOU AND ANY OTHER PERSONS RECEIVING OUR SERVICES, REGARDLESS OF THE CAUSE, WILL IN
NO EVENT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS THAT YOU HAVE PAID TO US FOR THE SERVICE THAT YOU RECEIVED DURING
THE SIX (6) MONTH PERIOD IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO THE SPECIFIC EVENT THAT GAVE RISE TO THE APPLICABLE
DAMAGE OR LOSS. THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK IS REFLECTED IN OUR PRICES. YOU MAY HAVE GREATER RIGHTS
THAN DESCRIBED ABOVE UNDER YOUR STATE’S LAWS
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
This product was developed using DAFIF™, a product of the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency.
This product has not been endorsed or otherwise approved by the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency, or the
United States Department of Defense (10 U.S.C. 425)
a. Under 10 U.S.C. 456, no civil action may be brought against the United States on the basis of the content
of a navigational aid prepared or disseminated by either the former Defense Mapping Agency (DMA), National
Imagery and Mapping Agency (NIMA), or the National Geospatial-Intelligence Agency (NGA).
b. The DAFIF™ product is provided “as is,” and no warranty, express or implied, including, but not limited to the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for particular purpose or arising by statute or otherwise in law or
from a course of dealing or usage in trade, is made by NGA as to the accuracy and functioning of the product.
c. Neither NGA nor its personnel will be liable for any claims, losses, or damages arising from or connected with
the use of this product. The user agrees to hold harmless the United States National Geospatial-Intelligence
Agency. The user’s sole and exclusive remedy is to stop using the DAFIF product.
462
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Index
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Index-1
Hazard
Avoidance
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
Carburetor Temperature Indicator 111
CDI source 87
Chart Not Available 288, 294
Check Engine Triangle 122
Color Mode 61
Command Bars 333
Communication (COM) Frequency Box
73
Compass Arc 135
Control Wheel Steering (CWS) 315
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) 87
Crew Alerting System (CAS) 113, 117,
121, 398
Current Icing Product (CIP) 214
Cylinder Head Temperature 111
GPS
Navigation
C
CNS
Interface
Barometric setting, Altimeter 73, 79–80
Basemap 427
Bearing/Distance, Measuring 143, 145,
147, 149
Bearing Pointers 87
Bearing source 88
EIS
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
B
Flight
Instruments
Acquiring Satellites 52
ADS-B 269
ADS-B In 260
ADS-B Out 260
ADS-B participating 260
ADS-R 260
Air Data Computer (ADC) 2, 3
AIRMET 211, 228
Airport
Criteria 68
Nearest 162
Review 158
Weather 163
Airspace 140, 171
Alerts 172
Selecting and Viewing 171
Smart 172
Airspeed Indicator 74
Airways 154
Reviewing 155
Alarms 66
Alerts 389
Altimeter 73, 78–82
Altitude Alerting 81
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) 339
Altitude Reference 338
Ammeter 111
AOPA 296
Approach 194
Activating Vectors-to-Final 198
Chart 196
ILS 382
Loading 195
Missed 387
Removing 197
Selecting 195
WAAS 385
Approach Mode 363, 382, 383, 385
Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS) 2, 3, 24
Attitude Indicator 76
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast 259
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceRebroadcast 260
Automatic Reversion 346
Autopilot Disconnect 324
Auto-Slewing 97
System
Overview
A
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Index
D
Data Bar Fields 58, 407
Databases 427
Updating 430
Data Entry 29–30
Date & Time 63
Delete
Flight Plans 188, 191
Flight Records 415
Individual Waypoint 192
Direct-to 173
Cancelling 176
Display
Backlighting 56
Color Mode 61
Dual 20, 22
Operation 19
Overview 15
Single 20
Symbols 447
E
Echo Tops 207
Engine/Airframe Unit 2
Engine Indication System (EIS) 109
Engine Manifold Pressure 111
ENG Page 109
EPE Circle 422
Estimated Position Error (EPE) 422
Exhaust Gas Temperature 111
External Navigator 90
F
Field of View 284
FIS-B 260
Flight director (FD) 317
Modes, vertical 335–349
Index-2
Flight Information Service-Broadcast
260
Flight Instruments 71
Flight Level Change Mode 343, 379
Flight Log 413
Flight Plan 177
Activation 185
Active 182
Adding Waypoints 186
Approaches 194
Copying 191
Creation 182
Data Fields 178
Editing 186
Fuel Flow 188
Inverting 193
Name 188
Speed 188
Waypoints, Adding 186
Flight Plan (FPL) Pages 34
FliteCharts 291
Expiration 296
Range 290, 295
FMS Joystick 17
Forecast 215
FPL Key 17
Freezing Levels 213
Frequencies 125
Fuel Calculator 117
Fuel Flow Indicator 111
Fuel Pressure Indicator 111
Fuel Quantity Indicator 111
Fuel Range Ring 143, 145, 147, 149
G
Garmin Display Unit (GDU) 68
Garmin Sensor Unit (GSU) 2, 3
GBT 260
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Index
License Agreement 459
Lightning 209
Limited Warranty 459
Line Replaceable Unit (LRU) 1
Location Formats 66, 435
LPV 373
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
Annun/Alerts
Appendix
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Flight
Planning
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Lean Assist 113
Legends 219, 234
Magnetometer 4
Main Pages 32
Map
Airways 155
Customizing 139
Detail 153
Displays 136
Orientation 137
Panning 143
Range 141
Satellite View 151, 152
Setup 137
Symbols 152, 447
Map Datum 435
MAP Page
Defaults 218, 234
XM Weather 217
Map Range 141
Map Symbols 152
Measuring
Bearing 150
Distance 150
MENU Key 17
Menus 28
Main Menu 28
Navigating 23, 28, 328, 330
Page Menu 28
Messages
Miscellaneous 389, 390
System 391
CNS
Interface
L
EIS
Hazard Display 441
Heading 73
Heading Line 419
Heading Select Mode 355
Heading Strip 99
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) 73,
85
Annunciations 87
Icing Forecast 214
ILS approach 382
INFO Page
Data Fields 55, 409
Layout 55
Show/Hide Lat/Lon 54
Information Window 87
Integrated Autopilot
Alerts 403
Disengaging 326
Engaging 325
Intersections 164
Inverting, Flight Plan 193
Flight
Instruments
M
H
I
System
Overview
GDL 39 44, 220, 222, 244
GDU 370 1
Glidepath Mode (GP) 348, 385
Glideslope Mode 349, 382, 383
GMU 44 4
GPS Receiver Status 50
Ground Based Transceivers 260
GSU 73 2
GTP 59 3, 4, 5, 6
Index-3
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Index
METAR 210, 227
Flag Color 210, 227
Text 210, 227
Missed Approach 387
N
Navigation Mode 357–358, 376–377
Navigation Source 13, 90
NDBs 165
Nearest
Airport 162
Airspaces 171, 172
NDB 165
VORs 166
Nearest Information 161
Nearest (NRST) Pages 34
Nearest Type
Changing 54
New Location 52
NEXRAD 204, 206, 223, 224
Normal Mode 20, 22
NRST Key 17
O
OBS Mode 100
Obstacles 239
Oil Pressure Indicator 111
Oil Temperature Indicator 111
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) 73, 101
P
Pages 31
Flight Plan (FPL) 34
Information (INFO) 50
MAIN 32
Nearest (NRST) 34
Panning 143
PFD
Index-4
Annunciations 397
PFD Page 71
PIREP 213, 230
Pitch Hold Mode 337
Position 53
Settings 66
Power-up 18
Procedures
GFC 700 373–388
Proximity Waypoints 423
R
Red X 24, 441
Reversionary Mode 21, 23
Reversionary Sensor Window 26
RNG Key 17
Roll Hold Mode 353
Runway Extension line 138
Runway Number 138
S
SafeTaxi 272, 286
Satellite Information 53
Satellite Mosaic 206
Satellite View 151, 152
Secure Digital (SD) Cards 15, 425
Installing 16
Selected Altitude 73, 337, 338, 341
Selected Altitude Bug 73
Selected Altitude Capture Mode 337,
338, 341, 351
Selected Course 358
Selected Ground Track 356
Selected Heading 85, 355
Settings 56
SIGMET 211, 228
SiriusXM 203, 204, 216, 217, 219,
271, 298, 299, 301, 461
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Index
Flight
Planning
Hazard
Avoidance
Additional
Features
AFCS
V
Index-5
Index
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
Vectors 198
Vectors-to-Final 198
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) 82
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) 104
Capturing 107
Configuring 106
Indicator 106
Vertical Power 32, 46, 303, 304, 405
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) 82
Vertical Speed Mode 341
Vertical Speed Reference 341
Annun/Alerts
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
GPS
Navigation
Tachometer (RPM) 111
TAFs 210, 227
Takeoff Mode 351
TAS 437
TCAS 437
Temperature Probe 4
Temperatures Aloft 226
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRS)
212
Terrain 236
Alerts 240, 241
Annunciations 400
Obstacle Information 239
Shading 237
Views 238
TIS-B 260
Topography 150
Track Log 415
Track Select Mode 356
CNS
Interface
UAT 260
Universal Access Transceiver 259
User Waypoints 166
Creating 167
Deleting 169
Editing 169
Nearest 169
Renaming 169
EIS
T
U
Flight
Instruments
Traffic Information Service-Broadcast
260
Traffic Information Service (TIS) 244,
437–438
Annunciations 246, 401
Audio Alerts 248
General Information 437
Ground Track 249
Limitations 438
traffic warning window 266
Traffic Warning Window 248
Transponder
Status Box 73
True Airspeed (TAS) 73, 74
Turbulence Forecast 214
Turn Rate Indicator 73, 99
System
Overview
Smart Airspace 172
Softkeys 36, 48
Softkey Selection Keys 17
Sound 63
Storm Cells 209
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) 214
Surface Pressure 208
Symbols 152
Synthetic Vision (SVX) 271
System
Annunciations 24
Controls 16
Date & Time 64, 65
Functionality 28
Initialization 18
Power-up 18
Settings 56
System ID 430
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV) 346
Voltmeter 111
VORs 166
VP-X 32, 46, 303
Vspeed Reference 61, 67, 76
W
WAAS 373
WAAS precision approach 385
Warranty 459
Water Temperature 215
Waypoints 156, 166
Creating 167
User 166
Weather Information 163
Weight & Balance 420
Wind Data 102
Winds Aloft 207, 225
X
XM
Accessing 204
XM Satellite Radio 298, 305
XM Lightning 209
X Symbol 237
Index
Appendix
Annun/Alerts
AFCS
Additional
Features
Hazard
Avoidance
Flight
Planning
GPS
Navigation
CNS
Interface
EIS
Flight
Instruments
System
Overview
Index
Index-6
Garmin G3X Pilot’s Guide
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Zhangshu 2nd Road
Xizhi District, New Taipei City, Taiwan
Garmin Product Support: www.fly.garmin.com
www.garmin.com
© 2009 - 2016, 2019 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries
190-01115-00 Rev. Q
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising